Trimble SURVEY PRO

for Windows CE Users Manual

2002 Tripod Data Systems, Inc. All Rights Reserved

TRIPOD DATA SYSTEMS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT IMPORTANT: BY OPENING THE SEALED MEDIA PACKAGE, YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE LICENSE AGREEMENT AND LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY ("Agreement"). THIS AGREEMENT CONSTITUTES THE COMPLETE AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AND TRIPOD DATA SYSTEMS, INC. ("Licensor"). CAREFULLY READ THE AGREEMENT AND IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS, RETURN THE UNOPENED MEDIA PACKAGE AND THE ACCOMPANYING ITEMS (including written materials and binders or other containers) TO THE PLACE WHERE YOU OBTAINED THEM FOR A FULL REFUND. LICENSE. LICENSOR grants to you a limited, non-exclusive license to (i) install and operate the copy of the computer program contained in this package ("Program") on a single computer (one central processing unit and associated monitor and keyboard) and (ii) make one archival copy of the Program for use with the same computer. LICENSOR retains all rights to the Program not expressly granted in this Agreement. OWNERSHIP OF PROGRAMS AND COPIES. This license is not a sale of the original Program or any copies. LICENSOR retains the ownership of the Program and all subsequent copies of the Program made by you, regardless of the form in which the copies may exist. The Program and accompanying manuals ("Documentation") are copyrighted works of authorship and contain valuable trade secrets and confidential information proprietary to LICENSOR. You agree to exercise reasonable efforts to protect LICENSOR'S proprietary interest in the Program and Documentation and maintain them in strict confidence. USER RESTRICTIONS. You may physically transfer some Programs from one computer to another provided that the Program is operated only on one computer. Other Programs will operate only with the computer that has the same security code and cannot be physically transferred to another computer. You may not electronically transfer the Program or operate it in a time-sharing or service bureau operation. You agree not to translate, modify, adapt, disassemble, de-compile, or reverse engineer the Program, or create derivative works based on the Program or Documentation or any portions thereof. TRANSFER. The Program is provided for use in your internal commercial business operations and must remain at all times upon a single computer owned or leased by you. You may not rent, lease, sublicense, sell, assign, pledge, transfer or otherwise dispose of the Program or Documentation, on a temporary or permanent basis, without the prior written consent of LICENSOR. TERMINATION. This License is effective until terminated. This License will terminate automatically without notice from LICENSOR if you fail to comply with any provision of this License. Upon termination you must cease all use of the Program and Documentation and return them, and any copies thereof, to LICENSOR. GENERAL. This License shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Oregon, United States of America. LIMITED WARRANTIES AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY LICENSOR grants solely to you a limited warranty that (i) the media on which the Program is distributed shall be substantially free from material defects for a period of NINETY (90) DAYS, and (ii) the Program will perform substantially in accordance with the material descriptions in the Documentation for a period of NINETY (90) DAYS. These warranties commence on the day you first obtain the Program and extend only to you, the original customer. These limited warranties give you specific legal rights, and you may have other rights, which vary from state to state. Except as specified above, LICENSOR MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE PROGRAM, MEDIA OR DOCUMENTATION AND HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. LICENSOR does not warrant the Program will meet your requirements or that its operations will be uninterrupted or error-free. If the media, Program or Documentation are not as warranted above, LICENSOR will, at its option, repair or replace the nonconforming item at no cost to you, or refund your money, provided you return the item, with proof of the date you obtained it, to LICENSOR within TEN (10) DAYS after the expiration of the applicable warranty period. If LICENSOR determines that the particular item has been damaged by accident, abuse, misuse or misapplication, has been modified without the written permission of LICENSOR, or if any LICENSOR label or serial number has been removed or defaced, the limited warranties set forth above do not apply and you accept full responsibility for the product. The warranties and remedies set forth above are exclusive and in lieu of all others, oral or written, express or implied. Statements or representations which add to, extend or modify these warranties are unauthorized by LICENSOR and should not be relied upon by you. LICENSOR or anyone involved in the creation or delivery of the Program or Documentation to you shall have no liability to you or any third party for special, incidental, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, loss of profits or savings, downtime, damage to or replacement of equipment and property, or recovery or replacement of programs or data) arising from claims based in warranty, contract, tort (including negligence), strict liability, or otherwise even if LICENSOR has been advised of the possibility of such claim or damage. LICENSOR'S liability for direct damages shall not exceed the actual amount paid for this copy of the Program. Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of implied warranties or liability for incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. U.S. GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS If the Program is acquired for use by or on behalf of a unit or agency of the United States Government, the Program and Documentation are provided with "Restricted Rights". Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013, and to all other regulations, restrictions and limitations applicable to Government use of Commercial Software. Contractor/manufacturer is Tripod Data Systems, Inc., PO Box 947, Corvallis, Oregon, 97339, United States of America. Should you have questions concerning the License Agreement or the Limited Warranties and Limitation of Liability, please contact in writing: Tripod Data Systems, Inc., PO Box 947, Corvallis, Oregon, 97339, United States of America. TRADEMARKS Survey Pro is a registered trademark of Tripod Data Systems, Inc. Windows and Windows CE are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

.MAN-TMBSURVPRO

05102002

ii

Table of Contents
Getting Started __________________________________________ 1

Manual Conventions ________________________________ 1 Installation and Upgrading __________________________ 2 Angle and Time Conventions ________________________ 4
Azimuths _________________________________________________ 4 Bearings___________________________________________________ 4 Time______________________________________________________ 4

Starting the Program and Creating a New Job __________ 5 Navigating Within the Program ______________________ 7 Hotkeys ___________________________________________ 9 Parts of a Screen ___________________________________ 10
Input Fields_______________________________________________ 10 Output Fields _____________________________________________ 10 Input Shortcuts ___________________________________________ 12

The Map View ____________________________________ 14 The Settings Screen ________________________________ 15

Navigating to the Screens___________________________________ 16 Instrument Settings Page ___________________________________ 16 Units Settings _____________________________________________ 18 Format Settings ___________________________________________ 18 Files Settings______________________________________________ 19 Surveying Settings_________________________________________ 20 Stakeout Settings __________________________________________ 21 Repetition Settings_________________________________________ 24 Date/Time Settings ________________________________________ 25 General Settings ___________________________________________ 26

Required Files _____________________________________ 28

Job Files __________________________________________________ 28 Raw Data Files ____________________________________________ 29

Control Files ______________________________________ 30

Control File Example ______________________________________ 31

Description Files___________________________________ 32
Description Files Without Codes_____________________________ 32 Description Files With Codes________________________________ 33 Opening a Description File__________________________________ 34

Feature Codes _____________________________________ 35

Features__________________________________________________ 36 iii

Attributes_________________________________________________36 Using Feature Codes in Survey Pro ___________________________37

Layers____________________________________________ 38
Layer 0 ___________________________________________________38 Other Special Layers _______________________________________38 Managing Layers __________________________________________39

2D / 3D Points ____________________________________ 40 Polylines _________________________________________ 41 Alignments _______________________________________ 41

Creating an Alignment _____________________________________42

Fieldwork ______________________________________________ 47
Scenario One ______________________________________________48 Scenario Two______________________________________________48 Scenario Three_____________________________________________49 Scenario Four _____________________________________________50 Summary _________________________________________________50

Data Collection Example____________________________ 51

Setup_____________________________________________________52 Performing a Side Shot _____________________________________55 Performing a Traverse Shot _________________________________56 Data Collection Summary ___________________________________58

Stakeout Example__________________________________ 59
Set Up____________________________________________________60 Staking Points _____________________________________________61 Point Staking Summary_____________________________________64

Surveying with True Azimuths ______________________ 65

Road Layout ____________________________________________ 67

Overview_________________________________________ 67
Horizontal Alignment (HAL) ________________________________67 Vertical Alignment (VAL) ___________________________________67 Templates ________________________________________________67 POB______________________________________________________69

Road Component Rules ____________________________ 69

Alignments _______________________________________________69 Templates ________________________________________________69 Widenings and Super Elevations. ____________________________70 Road Rules Examples_______________________________________72

Creating Templates ________________________________ 75 Building an Alignment _____________________________ 77 Putting the Road Together __________________________ 78
iv

Staking the Road __________________________________ 83 Slope Staking the Road _____________________________ 84

DTM Stakeout __________________________________________ 87

Create a DTM or DXF File __________________________ 87 Set Up the Job _____________________________________ 88

Select Your Layers _________________________________________ 90 Select a Boundary (optional) ________________________________ 90 Select any Break-lines (optional) _____________________________ 91

Stake the DTM ____________________________________ 93

View the DTM ____________________________________________ 94

Screen Examples ________________________________________ 97

Import / Export Coordinates ________________________ 97

Importing *.JOB Coordinates ________________________________ 98 Importing *.CR5 Coordinates _______________________________ 98 Exporting Coordinates _____________________________________ 99

Repetition Shots __________________________________ 100

Repetition Settings Screen _________________________________ 100 Repetition Shots Screen____________________________________ 102

Shoot From Two Ends _____________________________ 104 Offset Shots ______________________________________ 105
Distance Offset Screen ____________________________________ 105 Horizontal Angle Offset Screen_____________________________ 106 Vertical Angle Offset Screen _______________________________ 107

Resection ________________________________________ 108

Performing a Resection____________________________________ 108

Solar Observations ________________________________ 110

Performing a Sun Shot ____________________________________ 110 What to Do Next _________________________________________ 113

Remote Control __________________________________ 115

The Remote Control Screen ________________________________ Taking a Shot in Remote Mode _____________________________ Stake Out in Remote Mode ________________________________ Slope Staking in Remote Mode _____________________________ 115 116 117 118

Slope Staking ____________________________________ 119

Defining the Road Cross-Section____________________________ 120 Staking the Catch Point____________________________________ 122

Intersection ______________________________________ 125 Map Check ______________________________________ 126

Entering Boundary Data___________________________________ 126 Editing Boundary Data ____________________________________ 127 v

Adding Boundary Data to the Current Project ________________127

Predetermined Area ______________________________ 128

Hinge Method ____________________________________________128 Parallel Method __________________________________________129

Horizontal Curve Layout __________________________ 131

PC Deflection ____________________________________________131 PI Deflection _____________________________________________131 Tangent Offset____________________________________________132 Chord Offset _____________________________________________132

Parabolic Curve Layout ___________________________ 133 Spiral Layout_____________________________________ 134 Curve and Offset _________________________________ 135
Define Your Curve ________________________________________135 Setup Your Staking Options ________________________________136 Aim the Total Station ______________________________________136 Stake the Point ___________________________________________137

Scale Adjustment _________________________________ 138 Translate Adjustment _____________________________ 139

Translate by Distance and Direction _________________________139 Translate by Coordinates __________________________________140

Rotate Adjustment ________________________________ 141 Traverse Adjust __________________________________ 142

Angle Adjust _____________________________________________142 Compass Rule ____________________________________________142 Adjust Sideshots __________________________________________143 Performing a Traverse Adjustment __________________________144

vi

Getting Started
TDS Survey Pro for Windows CE is available with different options and sold under the names, Survey Standard, Survey Pro, Survey Pro Robotic, Survey Pro GPS, and Survey Pro Max. Throughout the manual and software, it is simply called Survey Pro. For a listing of which features are included in each product, contact your local TDS dealer. This manual covers the routines that are available in all of the different software packages except for the GPS routines, which are included with Survey Pro GPS and Survey Pro Max. The GPS routines are covered in a separate manual.

Manual Conventions
Throughout the Survey Pro Manual, certain text formatting is used that represents different parts of the software. The formatting used in the manual is explained below.

Fields
When referring to a particular field, the Field Label, or its Corresponding Value is shown with text that is similar to what you would see in the software.

Screens and Menus

When referring to a particular screen or menu, the text is underlined.

Buttons
When referring to a particular button, the text is shown in a :9943 472,9 , similar to that found in the software.

Users Manual

Installation and Upgrading

The Survey software that you purchased is shipped pre-installed on the data collector. Upgrading the software is simply a matter of purchasing a registration code that is specifically generated for your data collector. Once entered in the data collector, it will activate the appropriate add-on module. If you start Survey Pro and the Standard Module has not yet been registered, the first screen shown here will open. If you select the #0 8907 4/: 08 button, you will access the Register Modules screen, described next. If you select the #:3 3 024 4/0 button, the software will run in demo mode. When running in this special mode, all areas of the software are available. The only limitation is, a job cannot exceed 25 points. If a job is stored on the data collector that exceeds this limit, it cannot be opened. Add-on modules can be purchased from your local TDS dealer to upgrade your TDS Survey Software. Upgrading is a quick and easy process and described below. 1. On the data collector, tap  0 , #0 8907 4/: 08 from the Main Menu. 2. Contact your TDS Dealer and give him your unique serial number that is displayed on your screen. He will give you a registration number for the module that you purchased. 3. Tap the #0 8907 button for the appropriate module, enter the registration number in the dialog box that opens and tap . All the features for the module that you purchased will now be available.

Getting Started

Note: You should keep a record of all registration codes purchased in case they need to be reentered at some point. Upgrading from Version 1.x or 2.x to Version 3.0 or later is a chargeable upgrade. Once the new software is installed, the screen shown here will be displayed. A new registration code must be purchased and entered in the Code field or the software will only run in Demo Mode, as described above. Only one upgrade code is required to upgrade all of the earlier-version modules that were previously registered. Users that are upgrading to Version 3.0 or later from Version 1.x or 2.x must consider the following limitations before installing the new software: You should have a Ranger with at least 32-MB of onboard memory. The 16-MB models are not sufficient to run the program and store a large job. The Ranger must have Version 2.1 or later of Windows CE installed before installing the new Survey Pro software.

Users Manual

Angle and Time Conventions

Throughout the software, the following conventions are followed when inputting or outputting angles and time:

Azimuths
Azimuths are entered in degree-minutes-seconds format and are represented as DD.MMSSsss, where: One or more digits representing the degrees. Two digits representing the minutes. Two digits representing the seconds. Zero or more digits representing the decimal fraction part of the seconds. For example, 212.5800 would indicate 212 degrees, 58 minutes, 0 seconds. DD MM SS sss

Bearings
Bearings can be entered in either of the following formats: S32.5800W to indicate South 32 degrees, 58 minutes, 0 seconds West. 3 32.5800 to indicate 32 degrees, 58 minutes, 0 seconds in quadrant 3.

Time
When a field accepts a time for its input, the time is entered in hoursminutes-seconds format, which is represented as HH.MMSSsss where: 4 HH MM SS sss One or more digits representing the hours. Two digits representing the minutes. Two digits representing the seconds. Zero or more digits representing the decimal fraction part of the seconds.

Getting Started

Starting the Program and Creating a New Job

Since Survey Pro runs in the Windows CE operating system, selections and cursor control can be made by simply tapping the screen with your finger or a stylus. You can start the Survey Pro program by double tapping the located on the desktop. icon

Survey Pro cannot start without a job being open so the Welcome to Survey Pro screen will ask if you want to open a recently opened job, open an existing job, or create a new job. For this example we will create a new job so you can begin exploring the software. 1. Tap the 0 button. The Create a New Job dialog box will open, which prompts you for a job name where the current date is the default name. 2. Either type in a new name or accept the default name and tap 0 9  to continue.

Users Manual 3. Another screen will open where you select some of the job settings. Select the settings that you desire and tap 0 9  to continue. Note: When creating a new job, it is important that the Units for Distances field be set to the correct units. This allows you to seamlessly switch between different units in mid-job. Problems can arise if these units are inadvertently set to the incorrect units when new data is collected. 4. Since all jobs must have at least one point to start with, the final screen displays the default point name and coordinates for the first point. Accept the default values by tapping  3 8 . This will create and store the new job. You are now ready to explore the software.

Note: The settings and values entered for a new job become the default values for any subsequent new jobs with the exception of the Use Scale Factor setting, which always defaults to off.

Getting Started

Navigating Within the Program

The starting point in Survey Pro, which appears once a job is open, is called the Main Menu, shown here. All the screens that are available in Survey Pro are accessed starting from the Main Menu. Likewise, closing the screens in Survey Pro will eventually take you back to the Main Menu. The Main Menu consists of two columns. The left column contains all of the available menus and the column on the right contains the menu items associated with the active menu. When a menu is selected from the left column, the corresponding menu items will become available in the right hand column. When a menu item is activated from the right hand column, the corresponding screen will open. It is from these screens where you do your work. Navigation through the menus and menu items can be done using any of the methods described below. The best way to become familiar with navigating through the Main Menu is to simply try each method. Each menu has a number associated with it, whereas the menu items have letters associated with them. Pressing the associated number or letter on the data collectors keypad will activate the corresponding menu or menu item. You can scroll through the list of menus and menu items by using the arrow keys on the keypad. The up and down arrow keys will scroll up and down through the selected column. The other column can be selected by using the horizontal arrow keys. You can also scroll through the list of menus and menu items by tapping the special arrow buttons on the screen located at the bottom of each column. If one of these buttons appears blank, it indicates that you can scroll no further in that direction. When the desired menu item is selected, it can be activated by tapping it or pressing the [Enter] key on the keypad. 7

Users Manual There are three icons in the Main Menus title bar. The first icon indicates which collection mode the software is running in. When surveying with a total station, the icon is displayed and when surveying with a GPS icon is displayed. Tapping this icon will receiver, the open the Collection Mode dialog box where the software can be switched to the other mode. The battery icon indicates the condition of the data collectors rechargeable battery. The icon has five variations depending on the level of charge that is remaining: 100%, 75% 50%, 25% and 5%. button in the title bar will access the map view of the The current job when it is tapped. The map view is available from most screens and is discussed later. Note: Tapping the battery icon is a shortcut to the Microsoft Power Properties screen, which is normally accessed from the Windows CE Control Panel. Tap the button in the title bar of this screen to view the online help.

Getting Started

Hotkeys
There are several shortcuts available to quickly access a variety of screens no matter where you are at in the software. These shortcuts are called hotkeys. Each hotkey is activated by holding down the Ctrl key as you press the associated hotkey on the keypad. Each hotkey is listed below. A B D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S Y Calculator Enter Note View Points View Raw Data View Map Inverse Point to Point Corner Angle Triangle Solutions Past Results Manage Layers Auto Linework Horizontal Curve Solution Vertical Curve Solution Distance Offset Horizontal Angle Offset Vertical Angle Offset Traverse / Sideshot Where is Next Point? Remote Control

Users Manual

Parts of a Screen
Many screens share common features. To illustrate some of these features, we will examine parts of the Backsight Setup screen, shown here. You can access the Backsight Setup screen by selecting $:7;0 , ,. 8 9 $09:5 from the Main Menu.

Input Fields
An input field is an area where a specific value is entered by the user. An input field consists of a point label, which identifies the data that is to be entered in that field. It has a rectangular area with a white background, where the data is entered. A field must first be selected before data can be entered in it. You can select a field by tapping on it or pressing the [Tab] key on the data collector repeatedly until it is selected. When a field is selected, a dark border is drawn around it and a blinking cursor is inside the field. In the Backsight Setup screen above, the Occupy Point field is selected.

Output Fields
Output fields only display information. These fields typically display values in bold text, do not have a special colored background, and the value cannot be changed from the current screen. For example, in the Backsight Setup screen, the Backsight Circle value is an output field.

Power Buttons
The Backsight Setup screen contains two power buttons. Power buttons are typically used to provide alternate methods of entering or modifying data in an associated field. To use a power button, simply tap it. Once tapped, a dropdown list will appear with several choices. 10

Getting Started The choices available vary depending on with which field the power button is associated. Simply tap the desired choice from the dropdown list. Tapping the first power button in the Backsight Setup screen allows you to specify an occupy point using other methods or view the details of the currently selected point. You should experiment with the options available with various power buttons to become familiar with them.

Choose From Map Button

The Choose From Map Button is always associated with a field where an existing point is required. When the button is tapped, a map view is displayed. To select a point for the required field, just tap it from the map. Note: If you tap a point from the map view that is located next to other points, another screen will open that displays all of the points in the area that was tapped. Tap the desired point from the list to select it.

Scroll Buttons

:9943

When a button label is preceded with the symbol, it indicates that the button label can be changed by tapping it, thus changing the type of value that would be entered in the associated field. As you continue tapping a scroll button, the label will cycle through all the available choices. In the Backsight Setup screen, the backsight can be defined by a point or a direction by toggling the scroll button between $ !4 39 and $  70.9 43 .

Special Point Symbols

Some field labels are preceded with a special symbol. For example, the Occupy Point field in the Backsight Setup screen is displayed as + Occupy Point The plus symbol indicates that the occupy point is represented as a plus symbol when viewing it in the Map View. Other symbols are also used to represent other types of points. 11

Users Manual

Index Cards
Many screens actually consist of multiple screens. The different screens are selected by tapping on various tabs, which look like the tabs on index cards. Because of this, each individual screen is referred to as a card. The tabs can appear along the top of the screen or the right edge. The Backsight Setup screen consists of two cards. One is titled Input, and the other is titled Map. The Settings screen has a variant of the Index Card format for accessing several screens and is discussed in more detail starting on Page 15.

Input Shortcuts
Distances and angles are normally entered in the appropriate fields simply by typing the value from the keypad, but there is a shortcut that can simplify the entry of a distance or angle. If you want to enter the distance between two points in a particular field, but you do not know offhand what that distance is, you can enter the two point names that define that distance separated by a hyphen. For example, entering 1-2 in a distance field would compute the horizontal distance from Point 1 to Point 2. As soon as the cursor is moved from that field, the horizontal distance between the points will be computed and entered in that field. An alternate method to using this shortcut is to tap the power button, select Choose from map and then tap the two points that define the distance that you want to enter. Once you tap from the Map View, the horizontal distance between the two tapped points will appear in the corresponding field. Likewise, there is a similar shortcut to enter angles in fields that accept them. If you wanted to enter the angle, , from the illustration shown here, you would simply enter 1-2-3 in the appropriate field. As soon as the cursor is moved from that field, the angle formed by the three points entered will be entered in that field. As with specifying a distance, you could also use the power button as described above and tap the points of the angle in the correct order. 12

Getting Started

Entering Distances in Other Units

When a distance is entered in a particular field, it is normally entered using the same units that are configured for the current job, but distances can also be entered that are expressed in other distance units. When entering a distance that is expressed in units that do not match those configured for the job, you simply append the entered distance with the abbreviation for the type of units entered. For example, if the distance units for your current job were set to Feet and you wanted to enter a distance in meters, you would simply append the distance value with an m or M for meters. As soon as the cursor is moved to another field, the meters that were entered will be converted to feet. The abbreviations can be entered in lower case or upper case characters. They can also be entered directly after the distance value, or separated with a space. The following abbreviations can be appended to an entered distance: Feet: f or ft

US Survey Feet: usf or usft Inches: Meters: Centimeters: Millimeters: Chains: in m cm mm c or ch

13

Users Manual

The Map View

Many screens provide access to a map view. The map view is a graphical representation of the points and other useful information in the current job and can be accessed with the and buttons. A bar is shown at the bottom that indicates the scale of the map view. The buttons along the left edge of the screen allow you to manipulate the map view so that it displays what you want to see. Some map views also display a vertical profile. Tip: You can pan around your map by dragging your finger or stylus across the screen.

Zoom Extents Button

This button will change the scale of the screen so that all the points in the current job will fit on the screen.

Zoom Preview Button

When this button is available, it will display only the points that are currently in use.

Zoom In Button
This button will zoom the current screen in by approximately 25%.

Zoom Out Button

This button will zoom the current screen out by approximately 25%.

14

Getting Started

Zoom Window Button

After tapping this button, a box can be dragged across the screen. When your finger or stylus leaves the screen, the map will zoom to the box that was drawn.

Increase Vertical Scale

This button is only available when viewing a vertical profile. Each time it is tapped, the vertical scale of the view is increased.

Decrease Vertical Scale

This button is only available when viewing a vertical profile. Each time it is tapped, the vertical scale of the view is decreased.

Display / Hide Labels Button

In some screens, this button will simply toggle the point names and descriptions on and off in a Map View, but in other screens it will open the Map Display Options screen, which gives you even more control over what is displayed in the Map View.

The Settings Screen

The Settings screen is used to control all of the settings available for your total station, data collector, current job, and Survey Pro software. Most of the settings remain unchanged unless you deliberately change them, meaning the default settings are whatever they were set to last. For example, if you create a new job where you change the direction units from azimuths to bearings and then create another new job, the default direction units for the new job will be bearings. Survey Pro behaves in this way since most people use the same settings for a majority of their jobs. This way, once the settings are set, they become the default settings for all new jobs and current jobs. Some settings are considered critical and are therefore stored within the job. The following settings are stored within a job and will 15

Users Manual override the corresponding settings in the Settings screen when it is opened: Scale Factor Surveying Settings Card Earth Curvature On or Off Surveying Settings Card Units for Survey Data (distances) Units Settings Card North or South Azimuth Units Settings Card Angle Units Units Settings Card GPS setup information such as localization, mapping plane, etc. (Requires GPS Module)

Navigating to the Screens

The Settings screen actually consists of several separate screens where each individual screen contains different types of settings. There are two ways to navigate to the various screens. The first method is to tap the button to drop down the list of available screens and then tap on the desired screen from the list to open it. The second method is to tap the buttons to the side of the screen title, which will open the previous or next screen respectively. For example in the screen shown, you could tap to open the previous (General Settings) screen, or tap to open the next (Units Settings) screen. Repeatedly tapping either of these buttons will cycle through all the available screens.

Instrument Settings Page

The Instrument Settings are used to define the type of total station that is being used so it can communicate with the data collector. When your data collector is connected to a total station, the Brand and Model should be selected to match your total station. If your exact model is not 16

Getting Started listed, you should select from the models that are available until you find one that works. When set to Manual Mode, the data collector will not communicate with a total station. Instead, when a button is pressed that would normally trigger the total station to take a shot; a dialog box will open where you enter the shot data manually from the keypad. When you are learning the software in an office environment, it is usually easiest to set the software to manual mode. Model: is where you specify the model of the total station that you are using from a dropdown list. When a particular model is selected, the default settings for that model are automatically selected. If those setting are changed manually, you can switch back to the default settings by tapping the 01,: 98 button. The 3897:2039 $099 3 8 button accesses the settings that are specific for the selected total station model. This screen can also quickly be accessed from anywhere in the program by using the. Note: The options available after tapping the 3897:2039 $099 3 8 button, or the Ctrl -W hotkey directly toggle settings that are built into your particular total station. These settings are explained in your total stations documentation and are not explained in the Survey Pro Manual. The $03/ 94 3897:2039 button is available when certain models are selected. When this button is available, it should be tapped after turning the total station on. This will send an initializing string to the instrument that will make certain robotic functions work more smoothly.

17

Users Manual

Units Settings
The Units Settings defines the units that are used within the software, including those that are sent from the total station, entered from the keypad and displayed on the screen. You can select the following settings for your job. Units for Distances: defines the units used for distances as Meters, Feet, or International Feet. Units for Angles: defines the units used for angles as Degrees or Grads. Display Directions As: will display directions as a Bearing or Azimuth. Azimuth Type: defines if you are using a North Azimuth or a South Azimuth.

Format Settings
The Format Settings defines the precision (the number of places beyond the decimal point) that is displayed for various values in all screens, and how stations are defined. Note: All internal calculations are performed using full precision. Northings / Eastings: will allow you to display from zero to six places passed the decimal point for northing and easting values. Elevations: allows you to display from zero to six places passed the decimal point for elevations. Sq Feet / Meters: allows you to display from zero to four places passed the decimal point for 18

Getting Started square feet or square meter values. Acres / Hectares: allows you to display from zero to four places passed the decimal point for acre or hectare values. Distances: allows you to display from zero to six places passed the decimal point for distances. Angles: allows you to include from zero to four fractional seconds with angle values. Stations: allows you to display stations in any of the following formats: 12+34.123: displays stations where the number to the left of the + advances after traveling 100 feet or meters. 1+234.123: displays stations where the number to the left of the + advances after traveling 1,000 feet or meters. 1,234.123: displays standard distances rather than stations.

Files Settings
The Files Settings allow you to select a control file or description file to use with the current job. Control File: allows you to select a control file to use with the current job. Control files are discussed in more detail on Page 28. Description File: allows you to select a description file to use with the current job. Description files are discussed in more detail on Page 32. This File Uses Codes: Check this box if the description file contains codes and associated descriptions. Leave the box unchecked if the description only contains descriptions (no codes).

19

Users Manual Feature Code File: allows you to select a feature code file to use with the current job. You can switch between different feature code files in mid-job, but if a collected attribute does not match an attribute in the feature code file, it can only be viewed, but not edited.

74 80 : allows you to select a file to use with the current job. Simply tap on the filename and then tap the 503 button.  0,7 : closes the currently selected file so that it is no longer used
with the current job.

Surveying Settings
The Surveying Settings allows you to select various options that affect how data collection is performed. Prompt for Description: when checked, a prompt for a point description will appear before any new point is stored. Prompt for Height of Rod: when checked, a prompt for the rod height will appear before any new point is stored. Survey with True Azimuths: when checked, angle rights will be referenced from true north when traversing. Adjust for Earth Curvature / Refraction: when checked, the elevations for new points are adjusted to compensate for the curvature of the earth and refraction. Prompt for Layer: when checked, a prompt to select a layer will appear before any new point is stored from only the routines under the Survey menu. Prompt for Attributes: when checked, a prompt to select feature information will appear before any new point is stored from only the routines under the Survey menu. This also requires that a feature file be selected from the Files Settings card, described above. 20

Getting Started Use Scale Factor: when checked, horizontal distances to all new points will be scaled by the factor entered here. Elevations are not affected.

, . $., 0 : allows you to automatically compute the scale factor from a selected map projection. If a mapping plane is not already selected, you will fist be prompted to select one.
Prompt to Reset Scale on New Setups: if checked when a map projection is selected and you setup over a new location, the specified scale factor is compared to the scale factor defined for your current location in the mapping plane. If the scale factor is different, you will be prompted to use the new scale factor.

Stakeout Settings
The Stakeout Settings contains the setting that control how stakeout is performed. Stake Corners, Not Just Even Intervals: when staking by stations, locations where a line segment changes, such as from a straight section to a curve, will also be staked when this is checked. Always Start Stakeout With Coarse Mode: when checked, the Coarse EDM (fast shot) checkbox found in all stakeout screens will initially be checked. This instructs the total station to measure distances faster, but with slightly less accuracy. Use Manual Updating (Remote Control): When this is checked, an &5/,90 button in the stakeout screens must be pressed to take a shot. When this not checked, shots are continuously taken in the stakeout screens. (This is only valid when running in remote mode using a robotic total station.) Design Elevation from Offset Segment: When checked during offset or road stakeout, cut and fill information will be computed from 21

Users Manual the design elevation at the node furthest from the centerline of the current segment. When unchecked, cut and fill information will be computed from the design elevation of the segment at the current rod location. Note: If staking extends beyond the end of the cross section, the cut / fill information will always be computed from the design elevation at the node furthest from the centerline of the current segment. Write Cut Sheet Data Only (No Store Point): When checked, asbuilt points are not stored to the JOB file when staking points; only the raw data is written to the RAW file. Display Left / Right From Rod (non-remote): When checked, the move left or right information will be presented from the rod persons point of view. When unchecked, it will be presented from the total stations point of view. (This option only applies when a robotic total station is selected in the Instrument Settings.) Display Left / Right From Rod (remote): When checked, the move left or right information will be presented from the rod persons point of view. When unchecked, it will be presented from the total stations point of view. (This option only applies when a non-robot total station is selected in the Instrument Settings.) Prompt for Layer: when checked, a prompt to select a layer will appear before any new point is stored from only the routines under the Stakeout menu. Prompt for Attributes: when checked, a prompt to select feature information will appear before any new point is stored from only the routines under the Stakeout menu. This also requires that a feature file be selected from the Files Settings card, described earlier. Note: There is no Prompt for Description checkbox as in the Survey Settings because you will always be prompted for a description when storing a point from a stakeout routine. Horizontal Distance Tolerance: this setting affects the Remote Staking and Stake to Line routines. When staking to a line and the prism is located at a perpendicular distance to the specified line that 22

Getting Started is within the range set here, a message will state that you are on the line. When performing Remote Stakeout, the final graphic screen that is displayed when you are near the stake point will occur when you are within the distance to the stake point specified here. Turn Gun To Design Point: only applies to motorized total stations. The following options are available: Yes: 2D (HA only): The total station will automatically turn horizontally toward the design point. Yes: 3D (HA and ZA): The total station will automatically turn horizontally and vertically toward the design point. No: The total station must be turned manually.

Cut Sheet Offset stored: The cut sheet offset information can be stored to the raw data file in either of the following formats when performing any offset staking routine: Design Offset: when selected, a cut sheet report will list the design-offset values. Actual Offset: when selected, a cut sheet report will list the measured-offset values.

23

Users Manual

Repetition Settings
The Repetition Settings contains the settings that control how repetition shots are performed and the acceptable tolerances. Horizontal Tolerance: a warning message will be displayed if a horizontal angle exceeds the tolerance entered here during a repetition shot. Zenith Tolerance: a warning message will be displayed if a vertical angle exceeds the tolerance entered here during a repetition shot. Distance Tolerance: a warning message will be displayed if a distance exceeds the tolerance entered here during a repetition shot. Shoot Distance To Backsight: when checked, a distance will be measured to each shot to the backsight. When unchecked, only the angles are measured. Do Not Shoot Reverse Distances: when checked, distances are not measured during reverse shots. Enable Automatic Repetition: when checked, all remaining shots after the first shot to the backsight and foresight will occur automatically when using a motorized instrument. Shooting Sequence: specifies the order that the shots are taken from the following options: BS > FS ^ FS > BS: Backsight, Foresight, flop, Foresight Backsight BS > FS ^ > BS > FS: Backsight, Foresight, flop, Backsight, Foresight BS ^ BS > FS ^ FS: Backsight, flop, Backsight, Foresight, flop, Foresight FS ^ FS > BS ^ BS: Foresight, flop, Foresight, Backsight, flop, Backsight FS > BS ^ BS > FS: Foresight, Backsight, flop, Backsight, Foresight

24

Getting Started FS > BS ^ > FS > BS: Foresight, Backsight, flop, Foresight, Backsight BS ^ BS ^ > FS ^ FS ^: Backsight, flop, Backsight, flop, Foresight, flop, Foresight, flop

Date/Time Settings
The Date/Time Settings is used to set the date and time in the data collector. Date: displays the current date. Time: displays the current time. Format: Select Local to display your local time, or UTC to display Coordinated Universal Time. Note: The date, time and UTC are computed using Windows CEs Date/Time properties.

$09 ,90 : will set the system date with the date that is entered. $09 % 20 : will set the system time with the time entered. $ 3. 743 0 : when pressed, will zero the fractional portion of the
current time and advance to the nearest second so that the time can be set more accurately. Set DUT: is the polar wandering correction factor, in seconds, used to convert UTC to UT1. (UT1=UTC+DUT)

25

Users Manual

General Settings
The General Settings contains the following settings: Use Enter Key to Move Between Fields: when checked, the [Enter] key will move the cursor to the next field in all screens. When unchecked, the [Enter] key will perform a different function depending on the field selected. Note: The arrow keys and the [Tab] key can also be used to move the cursor between fields. Allow Alphanumeric Point Names: when checked alphanumeric point names can be assigned to any point. When unchecked, all point names must be numeric. Always Prompt for Backsight Check: when checked, you will be prompted if you attempt to exit the Backsight Setup screen without first performing a backsight check. Beep When Storing Points: when checked, a beep will sound whenever a new point is stored. Prompt for Description: when checked, a prompt for a description will appear before any new point is stored from any routine other than those included in the Survey and Stakeout menus. Prompt for Layer: when checked, a prompt to select a layer will appear before any new point is stored from any routine other than those included in the Survey and Stakeout menus. Prompt for Attributes: when checked, a prompt to select feature information will appear before any new point is stored from any routine other than those included in the Survey and Stakeout menus. This also requires that a feature file be selected from the Files Settings card, described earlier. Prompt to Backup When Closing Job: when checked, a reminder will open to backup the current job prior to closing it.

26

Getting Started Write Point Attributes to Raw Data: when checked, point feature and attribute information will be written to the raw data file. Auto time stamp every ___ min: when checked, will store a note record to the raw data file containing the current date and time each time the specified number of minutes passes. This is useful for tracking down when specific raw data records were written to the file. Remind to backup job every ___ hrs: when checked, will open a reminder to backup the current job after every specified number of hours passes.

27

Users Manual

Required Files
Every job that is used with TDS Survey Pro actually consists of at least two separate files; a job file and a raw data file. Each file performs a different role within the software. A job file can be created in the data collector, or on a PC using TDS Survey Link and then transferred to the data collector. A raw data file is automatically generated once the job file is open in the data collector. A raw data file cannot be created using any other method. There are two other optional types of files that can be used with Survey Pro called control files and description files. Job files and raw data files are explained below. Control files and description files are explained, starting on Page 28 and 32, respectively and include examples to illustrate their use.

Job Files
A job file is a binary file that has a file name that is the same as the job name, followed by a *.JOB extension. A job file is similar to the older TDS-format coordinate file, except in addition to storing point names and their associated coordinates, a job file also contains all of the line work as well. When you specify points to use for any reason within Survey Pro, the software will read the coordinates for the specified points from the job file. Whenever you store a new point within Survey Pro, the point is added to this file. A job file can be edited on the data collector when using the Edit Points screen. Since a job file is binary, it requires special software for editing on a PC, such as TDS Survey Link. It can also be converted to or from an ASCII file using Survey Link. (Refer to the Survey Link documentation for this procedure.) When a job file is converted to an ASCII file, the resulting file is simply a list of points and coordinates. Each line consists of a point name, northing or latitude, easting or longitude, elevation or elliptical height, and a note where each value is separated by a comma. 28

Getting Started

Raw Data Files

A raw data file is an ASCII text file that is automatically generated whenever a new job is created on the data collector. It has the same file name as the job file (the job name), followed by the *.RAW extension. A raw data file is essentially a log of everything that occurred in the field. All activity that can create or modify a point is written to a raw data file. Survey Pro never reads from the raw data file it only writes to the file. Since a raw data file stores all of the activity that takes place in the field, it can be used to regenerate the original job file if the job file was somehow lost. This process requires the TDS Survey Link software. Since a raw data file is considered a legal document, it cannot be edited using any TDS software other than appending a note to it using the View Raw Data screen. Editing a raw data file would invalidate all of its contents and is not supported in any way by TDS. When viewing a raw data file on a PC using a simple text editor or on Survey Pro using the View Raw Data screen, the file is shown unaltered, which can appear somewhat cryptic. Appendix B, in the Reference Manual, explains all of the raw data codes to assist in reading the file using this method. When viewing the file from within Survey Link, the codes are automatically translated on the screen to a format that is easier to understand.

29

Users Manual

Control Files
A Control File is simply an existing job that is optionally opened within the current job so that the points from the control file are also available for use in the current job. The points stored in a control file are called Control Points. Some users prefer to keep a set of known points in a separate control file when repeatedly working on new jobs in the same general area. That way when they return to the job site, they can create a new job, but select the control file to easily have access to the known control points. Once a control file is selected in the current job, the control points can be used in the same way as the jobs points with the following exceptions: A control file has read only attributes. This means that the points in a control file cannot be modified or deleted; they can only be read. For example, you can select a control point to use as an occupy point during data collection or as a design point during stake out, but you could not use a control point for a foresight where you intend to overwrite the existing coordinates with new coordinates. You would also be unable to modify a control point from the Edit Points screen. Since the points in a control file are essentially merged with the points in the current job, you cannot open a control file if any of the point names used in it are also used in the current job. If you attempt to do so, a dialog will tell you that a duplicate point name was encountered and the control file will not be opened. Only points are used from a control file. If a control file contains other objects, such as polylines or alignments, they will be ignored.

30

Getting Started

Control File Example

The following general example explains one scenario where a control file is used. In this example, a new job is created with a point that has arbitrary coordinates. The control file is selected and used to replace the arbitrary coordinates with coordinates that are in the same coordinate system as those in the control file. The steps in this example can be modified to fit your specific situation. Assume that you already have a job that contains several known points for an area where you intend to work. You want to create a new job and select the existing job as a control file to make the control points available in the new job. Also, assume that the control file contains points named 1 through 10. 1. Create a new job by selecting Menu.

 0 , 5030

from the Main

2. Enter a point name for the first point in the job that will not conflict with the names that are in the control file. In this example, you could enter either any alphanumeric name or any numeric name that is above 10. (Accept the default coordinates for now they will be overwritten later.) 3. Select the Files tab from the Settings screen. 4. Tap the 74 80 button in the Control File section of the screen and select the job that you want to use as a control file. 5. Define your Occupy and Backsight points using points from the control file and enter the point name that was just created as the Foresight. 6. Take a side shot or traverse shot and overwrite the original coordinates with the new coordinates. This will tie in the coordinates for the new point with the coordinates in the control file. 7. Continue your survey.

31

Users Manual

Description Files
A Description File is used to automate the task of entering descriptions for points that are stored in a job. They are especially useful when the same descriptions are frequently used in the same job. A description file is a text file containing a list of the descriptions that you will want to use with a particular job. The file itself is usually created on a PC, using any ASCII text editor such as Notepad, which is included with Microsoft Windows. It is then saved using any file name and the .txt extension and then transferred to the data collector. It is important to realize that when you use a more sophisticated application, such as a word processor to create a description file, you must be careful how the file is saved. By default, a word processor will store additional non-ASCII data in a file making it incompatible as a description file. However this can be avoided if you use the File | Save As routine from your word processor and choose a Text Only format as the type of document to save. For more information on creating a text file using a word processor, refer to the your word processors documentation. Description files can be created in two different formats; one includes codes and the other does not. The chosen format determines how descriptions are entered. Each format is described below.

Description Files Without Codes

A description file that does not contain codes is simply a list of the descriptions that you will want to use in a job. The content of a sample description file, without codes, is shown here. The following rules apply to description files without codes: 32 Each line in the file contains a separate description. A description can be up to 16 characters in length (including spaces). A description can contain any characters included on a keyboard.

Getting Started Descriptions do not need to be arranged in alphabetical order. (Survey Pro does that for you.) Descriptions are case sensitive.

To use a description from a description file, simply start typing that description in any Description field. (You can experiment with descriptions in the $:7;0 , %7,;0780  $ /08 49 screen.) Once you start typing a description, a dropdown list will appear displaying all of the descriptions in the descriptor file along with all the descriptors that have been used in the current job in alphabetical order. If the first letter(s) that you typed match the first letters of a description in the descriptor file, that description will automatically be selected in the dropdown list. Once it is selected, you can have that description replace what you have typed by pressing [Enter] on the keypad. You can also use the arrow keys to scroll through the dropdown list to make an alternate selection. If you wanted douglas fir to be selected with the sample description file used here, you would have to start typing with lower case characters since descriptions are case sensitive. (Typing Dou would not work.)

Description Files With Codes

A description file that uses codes is similar to those without codes, except a code precedes each description in the file. A sample description file with codes is shown here. The following rules apply to description files that use codes: Each line in a description file begins with a code, followed by a single space, and then the description. A description code can consist of up to seven characters with no spaces. Description codes are case sensitive. The description is limited to 16 characters. 33

Users Manual Descriptions can include any character included on a keyboard.

To use a description from a description file with codes simply type the code associated with the desired description in any Description field. As soon as soon as the cursor moves out of the Description field, the code is replaced with the corresponding description. For example, if you typed lo in a description field while using the description file shown above, lo would be replaced with Lodgepole Pine once the cursor was moved to another field. You can combine a description with any other text, or combine two descriptions by using an ampersand (&). For example, entering Tall&do would result in a description of Tall Douglas Fir. Entering b&oa would result in a description of Big Oak Tree. This method also works when spaces are included with the & character. For example, entering b&oa would have the same result as entering b & oa. Note: Remember to check the This File Uses Codes checkbox when opening a description file that contains codes, described next.

Opening a Description File

Once a description file is created and stored in the data collector, it is activated with the following steps: 1. Select

 4- , $099 3 8

from the Main Menu.

2. Select the Files tab and tap the File section of the screen.

74 80

button in the Description

3. All of the files with a .txt extension will be displayed. Select the file that you want to use and tap 503 . 4. If the description file contains codes, check the This File Uses Codes checkbox.

34

Getting Started

Feature Codes
As explained above, a description or descriptor codes can be used to help describe a point prior to storing it, but this can be a limited solution for describing certain points. Survey Pro also allows you to describe any object using feature codes. Feature codes can be used to describe objects quickly and in more detail than a standard text description, particularly when data is collected for several points that fit into the same category. For example, if the locations for all the utility poles in an area were being collected, a single feature code could be used to separately describe the condition of each utility pole. When describing an object using feature codes, a selection is made from any number of main categories called features. Once a particular feature is selected, any number of descriptions can be made from sub-categories to the selected feature called attributes. In general, a feature describes what an object is and attributes are used to describe the details of that object. To take advantage of feature codes, a feature file must first be created using the TDS Survey Attribute Manager, which is included in Version 7.2, or later of the TDS Survey Link software. The TDS Survey Attribute Manager can also be used to view or modify the selected features in a particular job and to export them to any of several different file formats for use in other popular software packages. Note: You can switch between different feature code files in mid-job, but if a collected attribute does not match an attribute in the current feature code file, it can still be viewed, but not edited. For more information on creating a feature file, refer to the Survey Attribute Manager section of the Survey Link manual.

35

Users Manual

Features
The primary part of a feature code is called a feature. Features generally describe what an object is. Two types of features are used in Survey Pro: points and lines, which are described below. When assigning a feature to data that was collected in Survey Pro, only features of the same type are available for selection. For example, if selecting a feature to describe a point in a job, only the point features are displayed. Likewise, if selecting a feature to describe a polyline, only the line features in the feature file are displayed. Point Features A point feature consists of a single independent point. Examples of a point feature would be objects such as a tree, a utility pedestal, or a fire hydrant. Line Features A line feature consists of two or more points that define a linear object, such as a fence or a waterline. In Survey Pro, these are stored as polylines, but line features can also be used to describe alignments.

Attributes
A feature, by itself, would not be useful in describing a point or line with much detail since a feature only helps describe what the stored point is. Attributes are used to help describe the details of the object. Attributes are either typed in from the keyboard or selected from a pull-down menu and fall into the following three categories. String Attributes A string attribute consists of a title and a field where the user can type any characters from the data collectors keypad up to a specified maximum length. An example of a string attribute is an attribute titled Notes where the user would type anything to describe a feature. Value Attributes A value attribute accepts only numbers from the keypad. These attributes are setup to accept numbers that fall in a specified range. Some examples of a numeric attribute would be the height of a tree or a utility poles ID number.

36

Getting Started Menu Attributes A menu attribute is an attribute that is selected from a pull-down menu rather than typed in from the keypad. Menu items can also have submenu items. For example, you could have a feature labeled Utility with a pull-down menu labeled Type containing Pole and Pedestal. There could also be sub-menu items available that could be used to describe the pole or pedestal in more detail. Menus can only be two levels deep, but there is no limit to the number of items that can be listed in a pulldown menu.

Using Feature Codes in Survey Pro

Before you can use features and attributes to describe points in Survey Pro, you must select a valid feature file to use with the current job. To select a feature file, open the 4- , $099 3 8 screen and then select Files Settings. Tap the bottom 74 80 button then locate and select the appropriate *.FEA feature file. Once a feature file is selected for the current job, you can configure Survey Pro to prompt for attributes whenever a point, line, or alignment is stored. There are three screens within the 4- $099 3 8 screen to configure this prompt. There is a Prompt for Attributes checkbox in the Surveying Settings, the Stakeout Settings and the General Settings. The first affects if you are prompted for attributes only when an object is stored from the routines within the Survey menu. Likewise, the second affects only objects stored from the routines in the Stakeout menu. The prompt in the General Settings affects if you are prompted for attributes when an object is stored from any other routines, such as the COGO routines. The features and attributes for existing points, polylines, and alignments can also be edited using the Edit Points and Edit Polylines and Edit Alignments screens, respectively.

37

Users Manual

Layers
Survey Pro uses layers to help manage the data in a job. Any number of layers can exist in a job and any new objects can be assigned to any particular layer. For example, a common set of points can be stored on one layer and another set can be stored on a different layer. The visibility of any layer can be toggled on and off, which gives full control over the data that is displayed in a map view. This is useful to reduce clutter in a job that contains several objects. The objects that are stored on a layer include points, polylines, and alignments. TDS ForeSight can read a JOB file and output an AutoCAD DXF file containing all the original layer information. This conversion can also be performed using TDS Survey Link 7.2, or later via the Survey Attribute Manager, which is included as part of that program.

Layer 0
Layers can be added, deleted and renamed with the exception of Layer 0. Layer 0 is a special layer that must exist in every job. It cannot be deleted or renamed. Layer 0 provides two main functions: compatibility with AutoCAD; and is used as a layer for the storage of objects that are not assigned to any other layer. Since all the objects in a job have to be assigned to a layer, Layer 0 is always there so a situation cannot occur where an object is stored, but does not exist on any layer.

Other Special Layers

Some layers are automatically created, but unlike Layer 0, these layers behave exactly the same as any user-created layer; they can be renamed or deleted. Whenever a control file (Page 30) is selected for a job, a Control layer is automatically created and the points in the control file are stored to that layer. (Any non-point objects in a control file are always ignored.)

38

Getting Started Similarly, whenever a new job is created, a Points layer is automatically created and selected as the active layer. The active layer is the default layer where any new objects will be stored.

Managing Layers
You can configure Survey Pro to prompt for a layer whenever an object is stored. If this prompt is turned off, any new objects that are stored will simply be stored to the active layer. There are three screens within the 4- $099 3 8 screen to configure this prompt. There is a Prompt for Layer checkbox in the Surveying Settings, the Stakeout Settings and the General Settings. The first affects if you are prompted for a layer only when new data is stored from the routines within the Survey menu. Likewise, the second affects only data stored from the routines in the Stakeout menu. The prompt in the General Settings affects if you are prompted for a layer when data is stored from any other routines, such as the COGO routines. Most layer management is performed from the 4- ,3, 0 , 078 screen. This screen allows you to add, delete, rename and change the visibility of the various layers. You can also set the active layer from here. This screen is also available from several different locations, such as the new Map Display Options screen and any of the controls that allow you to select layers. The Ctrl -[K] hotkey can also be used to access the Manage Layers screen.

Changing the Active Layer

To change the active layer, tap the desired layer and then tap the $09 .9 ;0 button. There must always be an active layer and there can only be one active layer at a time. The active layer is marked with the symbol.

39

Users Manual

Creating a New Layer

A new layer can be created by tapping 0 , which opens the New Layer dialog box where a name and if the new layer should be visible is entered.

Changing a Layer Name or Visibility Selecting a layer and then tapping / 9 opens the Edit Layer
dialog box where the name and visibility can be changed for the selected layer. You can also edit a layer by double-tapping on it. (Layer 0 cannot be renamed.)

Deleting a Layer
You can only delete an empty layer. If a layer contains any objects, they must first be moved to a different layer. To delete a layer, select the layer and tap 0 090 . (Layer 0 cannot be deleted.)

Moving Objects from One Layer to Another

The objects on a layer can be moved to a different layer using the objects appropriate edit screen. For example, to move several points from one layer to another, select the desired points in the Edit Points screen and tap / 9 . Select the layer you want to move them to and tap .

2D / 3D Points
Survey Pro allows a job to contain 3D points as well as 2D points. Since a 2D point has no elevation associated with it, care should be taken when working with a job that contains any 2D points, especially if you still want to collect 3D points. If you occupy a point that has no elevation, all the points that are collected from that setup will also have no elevations. Similarly, if you occupy a 2D point and perform stake out, no vertical 40

Getting Started data is provided. You can quickly see if there are any 2D points in the current job by opening the  4- , / 9 !4 398 screen. Any point where the elevation is shown as --- is a 2D point.

Polylines
Lines can be added to your project that can represent anything such as a roadway, a building, or a lot boundary. These lines are referred to as polylines. Polylines can be compared to the point lists used in other TDS data collection software. They can consist of several individual curved and straight sections. A point must be stored in the project for all the locations on the polyline where a new section begins and ends. Polylines can be used to compute information such as the perimeter and area for a lot boundary. They can also make it easier to compute and store offset points for the sides of a roadway when a polyline exists that defines a roadway centerline. Refer to the Reference Manual for information on all the screens that are used to create and edit polylines.

Alignments
Alignments are similar to polylines in that they define specific lines in the current job and typically describe the centerline of a road. An alignment can then be used in the Offset Staking, Offset Points, Offset Lines, and Slope Staking screens. Unlike polylines, alignments do not need points for the locations where the alignment changes (called nodes). Alignments are created by separately defining the horizontal and vertical details of a line. Although no points are required to define an alignment, the starting position must be tied to a specific location in the current job, the POB, which can be defined by an existing point or known coordinates. The horizontal and vertical details of an alignment are defined in sections. The first horizontal and vertical section always begins at 41

Users Manual the specified starting location and each new segment is appended to the previous horizontal or vertical segment. Once all the horizontal and vertical alignment segments are defined, Survey Pro merges the information to create a single 3-dimensional line. The vertical alignment (VAL) must be equal in length or greater than the horizontal alignment. The HAL must not be greater than the VAL.

Creating an Alignment
In this step-by-step example, we will create an alignment that has all the possible horizontal and vertical segment types. 1. Select  4- , / 9  320398 from the Main Menu. If any alignments exist in the current job, they will be listed in this screen. An existing alignment can then be edited or deleted, but for this example, we will create a new alignment. 2. Tap 0 to create a new alignment. This will open the Edit Alignments screen where you can begin adding horizontal and vertical segments.

3. Tap the POB tab and enter North, East and Elev coordinates of 5000, 5000, 100. This will be the starting location of the horizontal and vertical definition. (Alternatively, you could define the starting location by tapping the 4.,9 43 / !4 39 button where !4 39 is displayed and then select an existing point.)

42

Getting Started

Horizontal Alignment
4. Tap the HAL (Horizontal Alignment) tab and then tap the 38079 button. This will open the Edit Segment screen where the first horizontal alignment segment can be defined. 5. Tap the Line tab to insert a straight line segment. Enter a Length of 100 and an  2:9 of 0.

6. Tap at the top of the screen to add the segment to the horizontal alignment. You will return to the Edit Alignment screen where the new segment is displayed. The graphic shows every horizontal segment entered so far with the selected segment in bold. The dot in the picture indicates the beginning of the selected segment (in this case it is the end). This is where the next segment will be placed when using the 38079 button. 7. Tap the 38079 button again and then tap the Arc tab to insert a horizontal curve. 8. Enter a #,/ :8 of 100, a 0 9, of 45 and select a Right turn. Check the Make this segment tangent to previous checkbox so that the curve will be positioned so the entrance to the curve is tangent to the end of the previous segment. 9. Tap to add the segment to the horizontal alignment.

43

Users Manual Note: A new segment can be inserted between two existing segments by selecting the existing segment that is to occur after the new segment and then tapping the 38079 button. 10. Tap the 38079 button again and then tap the Spiral tab to insert a spiral curve. 11. Enter a Radius of 100, a Length of 200, select a Right of turn and a CS to ST direction, and check the Make this segment tangent to previous checkbox. 12. Tap to add the segment to the horizontal alignment.

Note: When creating a new horizontal segment and using the Make this segment tangent to previous option, the new segment will appear in the Edit Alignment screen tagged with a (P) (see picture). This means that if the previous horizontal segment is edited or deleted, thus changing the orientation, all subsequent horizontal segments that have the (P) tag will also be adjusted so they will remain tangent to the previous segments. This does not hold true for vertical alignment segments. Vertical segments do not have the Make this segment tangent to previous option and will always begin with the specified starting grade unless they are manually modified.

44

Getting Started

Vertical Alignment
We have now added all available horizontal segment types. Next, we will define the vertical alignment. Since the horizontal and vertical alignments are defined independently of each other, the first vertical segment that is defined will start at the same POB defined above in Step 3. 13. Tap the VAL (Vertical Alignment) tab and then tap the 38079 button. 14. Tap the V. Grade tab to insert a grade. Enter a Length of 150 and a Grade of 4%. 15. Tap to add the segment to the vertical alignment.

16. Tap the 38079 button again and then tap the V. Curve tab to insert a parabolic vertical curve. Enter a Length of 250 and tap the 09 !70; 4:8 7,/0 button to automatically set the Start Grade to the ending grade of the previous section. Enter an End Grade of -2%. 17. Tap to add the segment to the vertical alignment. 18. Tap the General tab and enter a Description of Roadway.

45

Users Manual

19. Tap from the Edit Alignment screen to return to the Add/Edit Alignments screen where the new alignment is stored and displayed. You have now created a new alignment using all the available types of segments. You can select the new alignment for use in the Offset Staking, Offset Points and Offset Lines routines.

Note: If the horizontal and vertical alignments end at different stations, they can only be processed in the staking routines as far as the end of the shortest alignment.

46

Fieldwork
This section will explain how to get started using Survey Pro to collect data from a total station and perform stake out. It is assumed that you are familiar with the operation of your total station. The first section describes the backsight setup procedures for various scenarios. The next section walks you through the steps involved to setup and perform a simple side shot and traverse shot. The third section walks you through a simple point-staking example. The remainder of the chapter illustrates the procedures to perform the more complex routines in the Survey Pro software in a step-bystep manner. They are intended to explain only how to use a particular routine without the need for you to enter any specific values to read through the example. When beginning any job, the setup is the same; you need to establish an occupy point and a backsight. The occupy point is the point where you will setup the total station. The coordinates for the occupy point must exist in the current job or active control file. They can be assumed coordinates; known coordinates; or computed with the resection routine. (Control files and the resection routine are discussed later.) Any point in the current job can be an occupy point. Once an occupy point is established, the second reference you need is a backsight point or direction. This can be in the form of a point stored in the current job, or an azimuth or bearing. The horizontal angles recorded during data collection are relative to the backsight. If a point is not available in the job to use as a backsight, you can assume a backsight direction or you can use the solar observation routine, described later, to establish a backsight. The scenarios below will describe four different possibilities for defining a backsight.

47

Users Manual

Scenario One
You know the coordinates and locations for two points on your lot and want to occupy one and use the other as a backsight. Solution 1. Create a job using the coordinates for one of the known points as the first point. 2. Use the Edit Points routine to add a second point using the coordinates for the remaining known point. 3. From the Backsight Setup screen, set the Occupy Point field to the point number of one known point and setup the total station over that point. 4. Toggle the $  70.9 43 / $ !4 39 button to $ !4 39 and enter the point name for the second known point in that field. 20. Aim the total station toward the other point, zero the horizontal angle on the instrument, and tap $4 ;0 , then  480 . If the Always Prompt for Backsight Check option is checked in the Job | Settings | General screen, you will be prompted to check your backsight. You are now ready to start your survey.

Scenario Two
You have found two points on your lot and know the azimuth between them, but you do not have coordinates for either.

Solution 1. Create a job using the default coordinates for the first point. 2. From the Backsight Setup screen, set the Occupy Point field to the point that was just created. 3. Setup the total station over the point where the known azimuth is referenced. 48

Fieldwork 4. Toggle the $  70.9 43 / $ !4 39 button to $  70.9 43 and enter the known azimuth to the second point here. 5. Aim the total station toward the second point, zero the horizontal angle on the instrument, and tap $4 ;0 , then  480 . You are now ready to start your survey. You may want to take a side shot from the Traverse Sideshot screen to the backsight point so that you have coordinates for it. The horizontal angle would remain at zero during this shot. If you later find true State Plane coordinates for any of the points in your job, you can use the Translate routine to adjust all the coordinates accordingly.

Scenario Three
You have one point established on your lot and you know the azimuth to an observable reference.

Solution 1. Create a job using the coordinates of the established point for the first point. If the coordinates are unknown, accept the default coordinates. 2. From the Backsight Setup screen, set the Occupy Point field to the point that was just created. 3. Setup the total station over the established point. 4. Toggle the $  70.9 43 / $ !4 39 button to $  70.9 43 and enter the azimuth to the observable reference here. 5. Aim the total station toward the observable reference, zero the horizontal angle on the instrument, and tap $4 ;0 , then  480 . If the Always Prompt for Backsight Check option is checked in the Job | Settings | General screen, you will be prompted to check your backsight. If you later find true State Plane coordinates for any of the points in your job, you can use the Translate routine to adjust all the coordinates accordingly. 49

Users Manual

Scenario Four
You have only one known point on a job. Solution You have two options in this situation. One, you can assume an azimuth for an arbitrary backsight reference and rotate the job later using the Rotate routine once you have determined the actual orientation. Secondly, you can use the Sun Shot routine to determine an azimuth to an arbitrary reference.

Summary
In general, you would follow these steps when you begin working on a job. 1. Create a new job or open an existing job. 2. Setup over the Occupy Point. 3. Aim the total station toward the backsight and zero the horizontal angle on the instrument. 4. Fill in the Backsight Setup screen and tap $4 ;0 , then  480 . If the Always Prompt for Backsight Check option is checked in the Job | Settings | General screen, you will be prompted to check your backsight. 5. Start your survey. Note: You should enter the correct Height of Instrument and Height of Backsight distances in the Backsight Setup screen if you plan to check your backsight using the Check by Distance routine.

50

Fieldwork

Note: If the Backsight Circle displays a non-zero value, the angle displayed is subtracted from all horizontal angles that are read during data collection and the resulting points are adjusted accordingly. This will happen after survey with true azimuths or performing stakeout in a special mode. If you do not want this to happen, you should change this value to zero from the Backsight Circle dialog box by tapping the ,. 8 9  7. 0 button. Most non-staking related data collection is performed from the Traverse / Sideshot screen. When you take a shot using the %7,;0780 button, the routine expects that you will eventually be occupying the foresight that you are shooting and backsighting your current occupy point. When you are ready to setup on the next point, the occupy, foresight and backsight points will automatically be updated accordingly. After taking a shot using the $ /0 $ 49 button, the routine does not expect the total station to be moved before the next shot and will therefore only automatically advance the foresight point.

Data Collection Example

This section illustrates the necessary setup and usage of the Traverse / Side Shot screen, which is the primary screen used during data collection. We will create a new job and manually add another point to the job to use as a backsight. We will run in manual mode so the shot data must be entered manually. This example, and the following stakeout example are the only examples that are designed where the user should follow along and enter the values in their data collector as they are provided in the example.

51

Users Manual

Setup
1. Create a new job. a. From the Main Menu, select 503  0 . b. Tap 0 Job screen

0,

to open the Create a New

c.

Enter any job name that you wish in the Job Name field and tap 0 9  .

d. For this example, simply accept the default job settings and tap 0 9  .

52

Fieldwork

Note: When creating a new job, it is important that the Units for Distances field be set to the correct units. This allows you to seamlessly switch between different units in mid-job. Problems can arise if these units are inadvertently set to the incorrect units prior to entering new data. For example, assume you created a control file by hand-entering a list of coordinates in a new job where the job was set to Feet and the coordinates were in US Survey Feet. Now assume you created another new job and correctly set it to US Survey Feet. If you then selected the previous job as a control file for the new job, the display of all of the coordinates in the control file would be converted from Feet to US Survey Feet. e. Accept the default coordinates for the first job point by tapping  3 8 .

2. Check the Job Settings. a. Tap 4- , $099 3 8 from the Main Menu to open the Settings screen. b. Tap the Instrument tab and make sure both the Brand and Model fields are set to Manual Mode. c. d. Tap For this example, tap the Surveying Settings and un-check all the checkboxes.

to save the job settings.

3. Add a backsight point to the job. a. Select

4- , / 9 !4 398

from the Main Menu.

53

Users Manual b. Tap 38079 and enter a new point using the General and Location cards with the following values, as shown: Point Name: 2 Northing: 5050 Easting: 5050 Elevation: 100 Description: Backsight and then tap .

4. Set up your backsight. In this example, we will set up on Point 1 and backsight Point 2, which was just created. a. Access the

$:7;0

,. 8 9 $09:5

screen.

b. In the Occupy Point field, enter 1 as the point name. Tip: You can also select an existing point from a map view or from a list by using the power button. c. Enter an HI and HR of 5 feet each.

d. Toggle the $  70.9 43 / $ !4 39 button to $ !4 39 and enter 2 as the point name. e. f. 54 Leave the Fixed HR at Backsight field unchecked. Confirm that the Backsight Circle value is zero. If it displays a non-zero value, tap the  7. 0  button and set it to zero.

Fieldwork g. Tap h. Tap

$4 ;0 . The Map screen will open automatically.  480 to continue.

Performing a Side Shot

5. Access the $:7;0 , %7,;0780  $ /08 49 screen and fill in the appropriate fields. The backsight information is displayed at the top of the screen. At this point, it is assumed that your total station is over the occupy point and its horizontal angle was zeroed while aiming toward the backsight. a. In the Traverse / Sideshot screen, enter the following data: Foresight: 3 Description: SS HR: 5 These values will define the point name, description, and rod height for the next point that is stored. b. Assuming that the total station is aiming toward the prism, which is located over the foresight, tap $ /0 $ 49 . This would trigger the total station to take a shot, compute coordinates for the new point and store it. Since we are running in manual mode, we will enter the shot data from the keypad. Enter the following data: Angle Right: 70 Zenith: 90 Slope Dist: 100 and then tap . The new point is computed and stored. The Foresight point will automatically advance to the next available point name and the information from the last shot is displayed on the screen. 55 c.

Users Manual d. You can see a graphical representation of the previous shot, as shown here, by tapping the Map tab. See Page 14 for more information on the Map View.

Performing a Traverse Shot

6. The steps involved in performing a traverse shot are nearly identical to performing a side shot. The difference is you must specify if you plan to move the total station to the current foresight point after the shot is taken. a. Tap the 35:9 tab of the Traverse / Sideshot. The Foresight point should now be updated to 4. b. Assuming that you are now aiming the total station at a prism located over the foresight point, tap %7,;0780 . This would trigger the total station to take a shot, compute coordinates for the new point and store it. Since we are running in manual mode, we will enter the shot data from the keypad. c. Enter the following data: Angle Right: 45 Zenith: 90 Slope Dist: 50 and then tap .

56

Fieldwork d. The new point is computed and stored and the Traverse Now or Later prompt will open, shown here, asking if you want to advance to the new point now or later. For this example, tap the %7,;0780 4  button. The New Occupy Point dialog box will open, shown here, which displays details of the new setup. You can see that the previous foresight point is now the current occupy point and the previous occupy point is now the current backsight point. Since we are running in manual mode and cannot send data to an instrument, tap  480 . You will notice at the top of the Traverse Sideshot screen that the occupy point has been updated to 4, the backsight is updated to 1, and the foresight is updated to 5, which is the next available point name. Note: If you select to traverse later, the traverse point is still stored, but you will then have the opportunity to shoot additional side shots before you advance to the next point. This is useful when you want to shoot the traverse shot first, before any settling occurs to the tripod. In that situation, when you are ready to advance, you would tap %7,;0780 again where you would then answer to a prompt that asks if you are ready to advance or re-shoot the traverse point. (If you select to re-shoot the traverse point, the previous traverse point is stored as a side shot.) When out in the field, you would now move your total station over the new occupy point, aim it toward the previous occupy point (the current backsight), enter the correct instrument height in the Height of Instrument field and tap $03/  7. 0 94 3897:2039 . This would update the Traverse / Side Shot screen and set the total stations 57 e.

Users Manual horizontal angle to zero where you are then ready to collect more data. You have now created a job, checked the settings, setup a backsight and collected data in the form of a side shot and a traverse shot. If at any time you want to view the coordinates of your points, you can do so from the 4- , / 9 !4 398 screen.

Data Collection Summary

1. Open or create a job. 2. Check the job settings. 3. Setup a backsight. 4. Collect data in the form of traverse shots or side shots.

58

Fieldwork

Stakeout Example
When setting up to perform stakeout, the requirements are nearly the same as with data collection. You need an existing occupy point, backsight point or direction, and a foresight. The main difference is existing points are being located during stakeout rather than new points being collected. In the example below, all of the steps required to perform a simple point-staking job are explained from the initial setup to the staking itself. For consistency, this example assumes you are running Survey Pro in manual mode so the shot data will need to be input from the keypad. Since the software behaves differently in manual mode compared to when using a total station, the differences are noted where applicable. For this example we will use the job that was created with the Traverse / Side Shot Example, above. When staking the first point, we will take two shots to the prism to home-in on the design point. When staking the second point, we will only take one shot combined with the Store/Tape routine to store the stake point.

59

Users Manual

Set Up
1. Open the job that was created in the Traverse / Side Shot Example if it is not already open. a. From the Main Menu, select Open / New screen.

 0 , 503  0

to open the

b. Tap the file name that was created earlier listed in the Open Recent Job list and then tap  503 . The coordinates for that job are shown here. 2. Set the job settings. (Only the settings that affect this example are covered here.) a. Select Menu.

4- , $099 3 8

from the Main

b. Select the Instrument Settings screen and set both the Brand and Model fields to Manual Mode. c. Select the Surveying Settings screen and confirm that all of the checkboxes are unchecked.

d. Select the Stakeout Settings screen and make sure the Cut Sheet Offset Stored field (at the bottom of the screen) is set to Actual Offset. Note: When performing stakeout, you have the option of storing cut sheet information. This information is stored in the raw data file, and when using software on a PC, such as Survey Link, it can be extracted in the form of a Cut Sheet Report. e. Tap to save the job settings.

3. Setup your backsight. In this example, we will setup on Point 1 and backsight an object with a known azimuth. When connected to a total station, you would setup over your occupy point, aim toward the backsight and zero the horizontal angle in the total station before continuing. 60

Fieldwork a. Access the $:7;0 , ,. 8 screen from the Main Menu.

9 $09:5

b. In the Occupy Point field, enter 1 as the point name. c. Toggle the $  70.9 43 / $ !4 39 button to $  70.9 43 and enter 0 as the backsight azimuth.

d. Enter an HI and HR of 5 feet. e. unchecked. f. Confirm that the Backsight Circle value is zero. If it displays a non-zero value, tap the ,. 8 9  7. 0 button and set it to zero. Leave the Fixed HR at Backsight field

g. Tap $4 ;0 . A map view will open that shows a graphical representation of the occupy point and backsight direction. Tap  480 to continue.

Staking Points
4. Stake the first design point (Point 2). a. Access the

$9, 04:9 , $9, 0 !4 398

screen. The backsight information is displayed near the bottom of the screen. At this point, it is assumed that your total station is over the occupy point and its horizontal angle was zeroed while aiming toward the backsight.

b. Enter the following data in the Stake Points screen: Design point: 2 Increment: 1 Height of rod: 5 and tap $4 ;0  .

61

Users Manual c. The second Stake Points screen will open that displays all of the information needed to locate the design point. When connected to a total station, you would turn the total station horizontally to 450000, vertically to 900000 and send the rod man out about 70 feet before continuing. Tap the $9, 0  button to continue to the third screen.

d. With a Height of rod of 5, tap the $ 49 button. (See the Reference Manual for an explanation of the other fields.) e. Enter the following shot data: Angle Right: 45 Zenith: 90 Slope Dist: 70 and then tap to continue. The Stake Points screen will show the necessary COME / GO and Go RIGHT / Go LEFT information that the rod man must move in order to be located over the design point. In this example, the Go RIGHT value indicates 0, which means the rod is precisely on the line between the total station and the design point. The BACK value indicates 0.711, which indicates that the rod must move back (away from the total station) 0.711 feet to be over the design point. The Fill value is zero so no dirt needs to be cut or filled at the rod location to match the design elevation.

f.

g. Assuming the rod has been repositioned, take another shot by tapping the $ 49 button and enter the following new shot data: Angle Right: 45 Zenith Angle: 90 Slope Dist: 70.8 and then tap to continue.

62

Fieldwork h. According to the screen, the rod must now move FORWARD by 0.089 feet to be over the design point. We will assume that this is close enough and will store the point from this shot by tapping the $9470 button. i. Enter the following point information: Point Name: 5 Description: Staked and tap $9470 . This will return you to the first Stake Points screen.

5. Stake the next design point. a. We want to stake the next design point in the project. We can do this by entering 3 in the Design Point field and then pressing $4 ;0  , or we can simply tap 0 9 !4 39  , which will automatically advance the current design point by the increment value and solve automatically. Either method will send you to the second Stake Points screen. Note: A negative Increment value results in the point number for the next design point to count down when tapping 0 9 !4 39  . b. The information needed to locate the next design point is displayed. When connected to a total station, you would turn the total station horizontally to 1150000, vertically to 900000 and send the rod man out about 100 feet before continuing. Tap the $9, 0  button to continue to the third screen. c. Tap the $ 49 button and enter the following shot data: Angle Right: 115 Zenith: 90 Slope Dist: 99.8 and then tap to continue. 63

Users Manual d. The rod man needs to move back by 0.2 feet to be over the design point. Rather than take another shot, we will instruct him to use a tape and place a stake at that location. Tap the $9470%,50 button to store the point. e. Enter the following data in the Store Point (Tape Offset) Dialog Box: Point Name: 6 Description: Staked Tape Out/Tape In (+/-): 0.2 and tap $9470 . This will result in coordinates for the stored point that are 0.2 feet further from the total station than the last shot to the prism.

Note: The default value in the Tape Out/Tape In field should put you directly over the design point, assuming you are on line.

Note: Negative Tape Out/Tape In values are toward the total station and positive values are away from the total station.

Point Staking Summary

1. Open a job that contains the design points that you want to stake. 2. Check the job settings. 3. Setup a backsight. 4. Stake the points from the Stake Points screen.

64

Fieldwork

Surveying with True Azimuths

Some people need to collect all of their horizontal angles in the form of azimuths. Survey Pro CE can help automate this process by computing the backsight azimuth after each new setup in a traverse and updating the backsight circle and total stations horizontal angle accordingly. 1. You can setup on any existing point and use any other point in the job as a backsight if the coordinate system is properly aligned with true north. If not, you can occupy any point as long you have a known azimuth to any reference. 2. In the Surveying Settings screen ( 4- | $:7;0 3 | $099 3 8 ), confirm that the Survey with True Azimuths checkbox is checked. 3. Setup the total station over the occupy point and aim it toward your backsight. 4. Access the Backsight Setup screen; enter the Occupy Point, and toggle the $  70.9 43 / $ !4 39 button to $  70.9 43 . Note: When backsighting on a point, selecting $  70.9 43 can still be used, as described next, making it easier to view the azimuth to the backsight. 5. If backsighting a known azimuth, enter it in the BS Direction field. If backsighting a point, use the shortcut method to enter the azimuth from the occupy point to the backsight point in the BS Direction field. For example, if you are occupying Point 1 and backsighting Point 2, enter 1-2 in the BS Direction field. Once the cursor leaves that field, the computed azimuth will replace what you typed. 6. Tap the  7. 0 button, enter the backsight azimuth in the Backsight Circle field and tap $03/ 94 3897:2039 (or $09 when running in Manual Mode). This will set the backsight circle as the horizontal angle in the total station and set the same angle as the Backsight Circle value. This angle will then be subtracted from all horizontal angles sent from the total station. 65

Users Manual 7. Begin your survey. When you traverse to a new point, the New Occupy Point dialog box will open showing you the azimuth computed to the new backsight point from the new occupy point. Once you are setup over the new occupy point, and aiming toward the new backsight point, press the $03/  7. 0 94 3897:2039 button to update the Backsight Circle value and the horizontal angle on the total station. Repeat this step after setting up on each new traverse point.

66

Road Layout
Overview
The Road Menu contains a powerful set of routines that allow you to enter and modify road layout information and then stake the road in the field. The road staking routines allow you to stake any part of the road or slope stake the road. There are four basic components of a road: The Horizontal Alignment; the Vertical Alignment; Templates, and a POB. All of these components are described separately below and each is a required component to a complete road definition.

Horizontal Alignment (HAL)

The horizontal alignment, referred to as the HAL, defines the horizontal features of an alignment. It can contain information on straight, curved, and spiral sections of the alignment. Generally the HAL coincides with the centerline of a road, but it is not required to be the centerline. All stationing for an alignment will come from the HAL.

Vertical Alignment (VAL)

The vertical alignment, referred to as the VAL, defines the vertical components of the alignment including grades and parabolic vertical curves. The VAL is generated in the same way as the HAL. The VAL can be the same length as the HAL, or longer, but it cannot be shorter.

Templates
Templates contain the cross section information for the road. Templates are stored in separate files with a TP5 extension so they can be used with multiple jobs. The templates are broken down into 67

Users Manual sections, called segments. Each segment contains a specified length, and slope or change in elevation. Templates can contain as many segments as needed, but must have at least one segment. Each segment describes one component of the cross section such as the roadbed, curb face, top of curb, ditch, etc. Each road alignment can contain as many templates as required to define the roadway, but all the templates used on one side of the road must have the same number of segments. Templates can be further modified using widenings and super elevations: Widenings are used to widen or to narrow the first segment of a template. The remaining segments of the template are not affected. This feature is intended to be a way of controlling the width of the first segment, typically the roadbed, without having to create and manage additional template files. Widening definitions basically act as two templates that modify the first segment. Super elevations are used to bank curves in the direction of a turn. A super elevation accomplishes this by changing the slope of the first segment of a template the slope of any remaining segments will remain unadjusted. One super elevation defines a begin station and an end station where the slope change begins and where it finishes the transition for one side of a road. Therefore, to bank a two-lane road, four super elevations would be required one at the beginning and one at the end of the curve for each side of the road. A super elevation can either hinge at the outer edge of the first segment, or at the centerline. Hinging at the center results in the elevation of the outer segments to change. Hinging at the edge results in the elevation of the centerline changing. Because of this, Survey Pro will only allow you to hinge on edge for one side of a road. If the other side is also super elevated, you will be forced to hinge that side at the center so that an abrupt change in elevation does not occur at the centerline.

68

Road Layout

POB
The POB designates the location in the current job where the alignment starts. The POB can be defined by an existing point or specified coordinates and can be changed at any time. The VALs start station elevation will be set from the POP.

Road Component Rules

The following section defines how the various components described above work together to form the road. This information is important because how each component reacts to the other component affects the shape of the resulting road.

Alignments
1. The alignment must have both HAL and VAL segments. 2. The VAL must be equal to, or longer than the HAL.

Templates
1. For each side of the road All templates on a particular side of the road must have the same number of segments for. The fist template for each side of the road defines this number. The station for the first template for each side must match the starting station of alignment. All template stations must be within the station range for the alignment. All templates must have at least one segment. A template can contain one zero length segment making it effectively a blank template, but the first segment must be greater than 0. Template segments must have a name. The template editor provides fields to enter the segment name. 69

Users Manual 2. Any two templates without intervening Widening or Super Elevations will transition. This means that each template segment will transition at a linear rate from its existing offset from the centerline to the new offset from the centerline as defined by the new template.

3. A templates first segment slope and/or width will be modified when: A template is located within a Super Elevation or Widening definition including starting and ending stations and inside Widening or Super Elevation transition areas. Templates will acquire first segment slope value from the Super Elevation definition, and/or acquire its first segment width value from the Widening definition.

4. Only one template may occupy any station. As little as 0.001 units can be used to separate templates.

Widenings and Super Elevations.

1. Super Elevation and Widening stations must be within the station range of the alignment. 2. Super Elevations and Widenings follow the same rules except that the start and end stations of a Super Elevation are defined by: Super Elevations will start their transitions at a point equal to the user defined starting station minus of the starting parabolic transition length if parabolic transitions are used. Super Elevations will start their transitions at a point equal the user defined ending station plus of the ending parabolic transition length if parabolic transitions are used.

3. Super Elevation start slope value and Widening start width value must match the first segment value defined by: A previous Super Elevation or Widening. (Priority) A previous Template.

70

Road Layout 4. Super Elevation ending slope value and Widening ending width value must match the first segment value defined by: A following Super Elevation or Widening. (Priority) A following Template. Exception: if the Widening or Super Elevation is the last element in the road, its end transition value does not have to match anything.

5. Super Elevation and Widening ending stations must be greater than their beginning stations. 6. Widenings cannot adjust the first segment horizontal distance to or from 0. 7. Super Elevations and a Widenings may overlap, are independent, and do not affect each other. 8. Super Elevations may not overlap other Super Elevations. A Super Elevations ending station may be equal to a following Super Elevations beginning station. A Super Elevations beginning station may be equal to a previous Super Elevations ending station.

9. Widenings may not overlap Widenings. A Widenings ending station may be equal to a following Widenings beginning station. A Widenings beginning station may be equal to a previous Widenings ending station.

10. Super Elevations may hinge on edge. Hinge on edge can only be used for one side of the road for any given Super Elevation station range. If hinge on edge is used for one side of the road, Super Elevations must hinge from center on the opposite side of the road over the same station range. Hinge on edge will modify the elevation of the Center Line.

71

Users Manual

Road Rules Examples

Figure 1 Overhead view of a template-to-template linear transition

Figure 2 Template to Widening Transition

72

Road Layout

Figure 3 Widening to Template Transition

Figure 4 Widening to Widening Transition

73

Users Manual

Figure 5 Template Inserted Into A Widening Area

Figure Descriptions
Figure 1 shows an overhead view of a simple transition from one template to another. Notice the linear transition of one template segment end node to the next. Figure 2 shows an overhead view of a basic template to widening transition. The widenings first segment width for the start station must match the first segment width of the previous template. Figure 3 shows a transition from a widening to a template. This example shows that a widening basically defines a new template that has a modified first segment. The modified template (widening) will transition to the next template down the road. Figure 4 shows the same concept as Figure 3 except another widening is used instead of a template. Figure 5 depicts how a template can be inserted inside a widening definition. The widening will take precedence over the first segment so the first segment will maintain the length as defined in the widening definition. However, the segments outside of the first segment now take on the shape of the inserted template. The figure shows a widening where the start width is the same as the end width but having the widening use the same start and end width is not required. The first segment of the template will be adjusted to match 74

Road Layout whatever the widening says the width of the first segment should be at the station where the template is inserted. Also notice in Figure 5 that we have defined a widening with the start width the same as the end width. This can be a handy tool to use if you need to widen the road for a relatively long distance but also need to change the template segments outside the first segment. Using a widening as shown enables you to use any template to modify the outside segments while retaining the same roadbed (first segment) width.

Super Elevations
The examples above show how widenings interact with templates. Super elevations work with templates in the same way, except instead of the width of the first segment being modified, the cross slope for the first segment is modified.

Creating Templates
The information for a single template is stored in a separate file with a TP5 extension. Template names are limited to eight characters plus the extension so that they can be used in DOS-based data collectors. Each template stores information on the cross section for one side of the road. A road can have as many templates as necessary, but each side of the road must only use templates with the same number of segments. Once the first template is selected, Survey Pro will only let you select from additional templates that have the same number of segments as the first template. A template can be used on either side of the road. They are not right or left specific. A road could contain only one template, which would be used for both the right and left sides, but can also contain as many templates as necessary. In this example, we will create a single template that contains a roadbed, a curb, and a ditch. Each segment will be defined in order, starting from the centerline and working toward the edge.

75

Users Manual 1. Tap #4,/8 , screen.

/ 9 %025 ,908 to open the Add/Edit Templates

2. Tap 0 to open the New Template screen. The Cut Slope and Fill Slope values are the slopes to compute the location of catch points with the Road Slope Staking routine. These values can also be easily changed from that routine. 3. Tap 38079 . This will open the Edit Segment dialog box. Enter the following information to define the first segment, which will be a 20-foot wide roadbed with a -2% slope. Segment Name: Roadbed Horizontal Distance: 20 Slope: -2 4. Tap to return to the New Template screen where the new roadbed segment will appear. A list of segments is displayed. At this point, only the roadbed and <End> will be displayed in the list. Whenever a new template it inserted, it is inserted above the template that is selected in this list. Therefore, to add a new segment to the end of the last segment, <End> should be selected prior to tapping 38079 . 5. With <End> selected, tap 38079 and enter the following data to add a new segment that will describe the face of a curb. Notice for the last field, you need to toggle the $ 450 button to ' 11809 and select the U radio button to specify that the curb extends upward.

Segment Name: Curb Horizontal Distance: 0 Vert Dist: U 0.5

76

Road Layout 6. Tap to return to the New Template screen where the new curb segment will appear. 7. With <End> selected, tap 38079 and enter the following data to add a sidewalk and then tap Segment Name: Sidewalk Horizontal Dist: 4 Slope: 0 8. With <End> selected, tap 38079 and enter the following data to add a ditch and then tap . Segment Name: Ditch H. Offset: 2 Slope: -40 9. Tap from the New Template screen and the Save As dialog box will open. Enter T1 in the Name field and tap . This completes the creation of a template. .

Building an Alignment
The Edit Alignments routine is used to create an alignment and is explained in detail starting on Page 41. If you do not currently have any alignments stored on the data collector, either create a simple alignment now that is at least 300 feet long, or follow the instructions that start on Page 41 to create a new alignment that contains each possible type of horizontal and vertical section.

77

Users Manual

Putting the Road Together

The final step in creating a road that can be point staked or slope staked is to use the Add/Edit Roads routine to combine the template(s) with the alignment and define any widenings and super elevations. In this example, we will use only one template for the entire road. We will use a widening to add a second lane to the right side of the road and we will add four super elevation definitions to bank the left and right side of a curve.

Add Templates to the Alignment 1. Tap #4,/8 / 9 #4,/8 to open the Add/Edit Roads screen. 2. Since we are creating a new road, tap 0
to open the New Road screen. 3. With the #4,/ tab selected, enter a name for the road in the Road Name field. In this example, we used Example. 4. Tap the  4480  32039 button and select an alignment. In this example, we selected the Roadway alignment created on Page 41. Tap to continue. 5. Tap the $09 !  to open the Road Alignment Properties screen to define where the road begins in the job.

78

Road Layout 6. Enter the following data then tap North: 5000 East: 5000 Elev: 100 Start Station: 0+00 7. The next step is to add the templates. We will use the template created earlier to define both sides of the road. Tap the %025 ,908 tab. 8. With <End> selected in the Left column, tap the // button. This opens the Add Left Template screen, which allows you to add a template to the left side of the road. 9. All the available templates will be displayed in the Template column. Select the T1 template, created earlier. 10. Since we will use this template for both sides of the road, check the Mirror to . We now Right checkbox and tap have the minimum number of components to completely define a road: an alignment, and a left and right template. 11. Tap  0. to confirm that the road is okay. You should get a message stating success. Note: once templates have been added, you can return to the Road card and tap the ' 0 !741 08 button to view the cross-sectional profile of the road at any station. :

79

Users Manual

Add Widenings 12. Tap the /03 3 8 tab.

We will define a widening where a new lane will begin in the right side of the road.

13. Tap <End> in the Right column and then tap the // button. This opens the Add Right Widening screen, which allows you to add a widening to the right side of the road 14. In the Start Station field, enter 0+25. This is where the widening will begin. 15. The length of the widening is 100 feet so toggle the 3/ $9,9 43 button to 03 and enter 100.

16. The starting width of a widening must equal the width of the first segment of the template that leads into the widening, or if a previous widening leads into it, it must equal the width of the previous widening. Leave the Starting Width field set to its default value of 20. 17. Since we are adding a lane with this widening, enter 40 in the Ending Width field. This widening will now begin at 0+25 and over a 100-foot span; the first segment of the template will increase in width from 20 feet to 40 feet. Bold lines in the map view illustrate the beginning and ending widths of the widening. 18. Tap to continue.

Add Super Elevations 19. Tap the $:507  0;,9 438 tab where we will insert a super
elevation at the beginning and end of a curve for the left and right sides of the road. 20. With <End> selected in the Left column, tap the // button. This opens the Add Left Super Elevation screen, which allows you to add a super elevation to the left side of the road.

80

Road Layout 21. We will start the super elevation 100 feet from the beginning of the road so enter 1+00 in the Start Station field. 22. The super elevation will be at the final slope after 25 feet so enter 1+25 in the 3/ $9,9 43 field.

23. The start slope must be the same as the slope of the first segment of the template that leads into the super elevation, so leave the Slope 1 field set to -2. 24. We want the ending slope to be 8% so in the Slope 2 field, enter 8 for simplicity, we will not use parabolic transitions so leave those fields set to 0. 25. Most super elevations hinge at center so be sure the Hinge on field is toggled to 03907 and then tap to continue. This will complete the super elevation for the beginning of the curve on the left side of the road.

26. We now need to add a super elevation at the end of the curve on the left side of the road to change the slope back to -2%. 27. With <End> selected in the Left column, tap the again.

//

button

28. From the Add Left Super Elevation screen we will start the transition out of the super elevation 200 feet from the beginning of the road so enter 2+00 in the Start Station field. 29. The super elevation will return to the original slope after 25 feet so enter 2+25 in the 3/ $9,9 43 field.

30. The start slope must be the same as the slope of the road where it leads into the super elevation, so leave the Slope 1 field set to 8. 31. We want the ending slope to be -2% so in the Slope 2 field, enter -2. Leave the parabolic transition fields set to 0. 32. Be sure the Hinge on field is toggled to 03907 and then tap to continue. This will complete the super elevation entries for the left side of the road.

81

Users Manual 33. We now need to repeat the above steps for the right side of the road. Tap <End> in the Right column to select that side of the road and then tap the // button to open the Add Right Super Elevation screen. 34. Enter the following data just as you did for the left side of the road and then tap . Start Station: 1+0 End Station: 1+25 Slope 1: -2 Slope 2: -8 (notice this is a negative value) Parabolic Transition 1: 0.0 Parabolic Transition 2: 0.0 Hinge on: 03907

35. With <End> selected in the Right column, tap the again to add the final super elevation.

//

button

36. Enter the following data to describe the second super elevation on the right side of the road and then tap . Start Station: 2+0 End Station: 2+25 Slope 1: -8 Slope 2: -2 Parabolic Transition 1: 0.0 Parabolic Transition 2: 0.0 Hinge on: 03907

37. This completes the definition for an entire road including templates, widenings and super elevations. To make sure there are no errors, tap  0. . You should get a message stating success. 38. Tap to save the road.

You are now ready to stake the road in the field. Close any open windows to return to the Main Menu.

82

Road Layout

Staking the Road

With your road fully designed, you are now ready to stake the road. Staking a road is a simple and intuitive process. If you are familiar with point staking, you should be able to easily stake a road. This section explains how to get started using the Stake Road routine and then refers you to the point staking example when the screens become identical. 1. Tap 2.

#4,/8 #4,/ $9, 04:9 to open the Stake Road screen. Tap the %,5 #4,/ button to open the Tap on a Road screen. All
of the roads that exist in the current job will be displayed. . When button to

3. Tap on the road that you want to stake and then tap the road is selected, it will be drawn with a bold line. 4. If the backsight is not yet defined, tap the set up your backsight.

,. 8 9

5. With the road selected and the backsight set up, tap 0 9  to continue. The next screen that opens shows the profile of the road at the starting station. 6. In the Station to Stake field, enter the station that you want to stake and in the Station Interval field, enter the distance that you want the Station to Stake to advance when you are ready to stake the next station. 7. Use the and  buttons to select the node (the segment end point) on the template shown in the graphic area of the screen that you want to stake at the current station. Each press of either of these buttons will advance the selection to the next node and display the name of the selected segment in the middle of the screen. The selected node is show in the graphic portion of the screen as a circle. 8. Once the correct station to stake is entered and the desired node is selected, tap the 0 9  button to continue. 83

Users Manual 9. The next screen that opens is identical to the screens used in point staking, since that is essentially what is occurring at this point. If you are not familiar with Point Staking, refer to Page 61. 10. Once the point is staked and stored, you will return to the screen described above where a new node can be selected and staked or the station to stake can be advanced by the station interval by tapping the 0 9 $9,9 43 button.

Slope Staking the Road

The road slope staking procedure is nearly identical to the non-road layout slope staking routine described on Page 118. The main difference is the road layout templates can contain more segments, which slightly modifies the options of where the hinge point should be located in a situation where a fill is required. Like with the road stakeout example above, this example describes how to set up road slope staking and then refers you to the non-road layout example where the screens are identical. 1. Tap 2.

#4,/8 $ 450 $9, 3 to open the Road Slope Staking screen. Tap the %,5 #4,/ button to open the Tap on a Road screen. All
of the roads that exist in the current job will be displayed. . When button to

3. Tap on the road that you want to stake and then tap the road is selected, it will be drawn with a bold line. 4. If the backsight is not yet defined, tap the set up your backsight. 5. With the road selected, tap

,. 8 9

0 9  to continue.

6. In the Station field, enter the station that you want to slope stake and in the Station Interval field, enter the distance that you want the Station to advance when you are ready to slope stake the next station. 84

Road Layout 7. The  ,5 and ' ,5 tabs are used to view information about the horizontal and vertical details of the road at the current station. Tap the $ 4508 tab to set up your slopes. 8. Four separate slopes can be defined for situations requiring a cut or situations requiring a fill, and can be different on the right and left sides of the road. Fill in the slopes that apply to your particular job. (The fill slopes do not need to be entered as negative values since Survey Pro knows that these are negative slopes.) 9. Tap the  3 0 !4 398 tab to define where the hinge point will be computed in areas that require a fill. Some people prefer to compute this point somewhere other than the end of the last segment to simplify the situation where a ditch meets an area requiring a fill, which would otherwise result in an area with two similar or identical negative slopes. 10. Use the and  buttons to select the segment where you want to compute the hinge point in situations requiring a fill for each side of the road. (The hinge point will be computed at the end of the segment listed here.) 11. Tap the $9, 0 !  button to continue to the next screen where the catch points at the current station can be located. This screen is identical to the screens used in the non-road layout slope staking routine. If you are not familiar with these screens, refer to Page 122. 12. Once the catch point is staked and stored, you will return to the screen described above where the station to stake can be advanced by the station interval by tapping the 0 9 $9,9 43 button and the process can be repeated to stake the next catch points.

85

DTM Stakeout
The Stake DTM routine allows you to stake an area and get cut, fill, and volume information between the surface being staked and a reference DTM surface. You can also obtain volume information between the surface being staked and a specified reference elevation.

Create a DTM or DXF File

DTM Stakeout requires either a DXF file that contains a triangulated irregular network (TIN), or a digital terrain model (DTM) file for the area that you plan to stake, which is typically created from a previous topo job. Either of these files allows Survey Pro to compute the elevation information at every location within the boundary of the original topo. TDS ForeSight can be used to create a DXF file containing the correct information from a JOB file. It provides several options for the information that is written to the DXF file, but all the options will include the required 3-D Face, or TIN information when exporting to a DXF file. Both TDS ForeSight and Survey Link will export a DTM file from a DXF file. Note: The speed performance of the Stake DTM routine is enhanced when using a DTM file as opposed to a DXF file.

87

Users Manual

Set Up the Job

Once you have created the necessary DTM or DXF file and loaded it in the data collector, you are ready to set up your job. 1. From the Main Menu, tap $9, 04:9 , $9, 0 % to open the Stake DTM screen. 2. Tap 74 80 and select the DXF or DTM file for the area that you want to stake.

Warning: If importing a DXF or DTM file where the distance units in the source file are different than the distance units for the current job, the imported coordinates will be converted to the current jobs distance units when they are imported. This is normally the desired result, but it can cause a problem if the distance units for the imported data or the current job were set incorrectly. This situation can most commonly occur when working with Feet and US Survey Feet, where the conversion from one to the other is not always obvious. Usually the difference between Feet and US Survey Feet is negligible (2 parts per million), but when dealing with State Plane or UTM mapping plane coordinates, which are often very large in magnitude, the difference can be substantial if the coordinates are converted from one format to the other. If importing coordinates from a source where you are not sure if the units are in Feet or US Survey Feet into a job that is set to Feet or US Survey Feet, you will usually just want to import them without any conversion being performed. To do this, be sure to select the same distance units for the source file as those set for the current job.

88

DTM Stakeout 3. Enter the rod height in the HR field and the name for the first point that is stored in the Store Point field. Future points are stored with the next available point names. 4. You have the option of selecting a centerline and get offset and stationing information for the staked points. Checking the With C.L. checkbox and then tapping the 03907 30 button will open the Select Line screen where you can select an existing polyline or alignment that defines a centerline. This information will also be displayed graphically in the DTM Shot screen. 5. When the Generate TIN w\Staked Points box is checked, a TIN will be generated from the points that have been staked. This is necessary if you want to view the surface from the points staked in the 3D View screen. This must also be checked if you want to get live cut / fill and volume values for the points staked. When unchecked, the 3D View is unavailable, no volumes will be computed, and cut / fill values cannot be viewed, but are still stored to the raw data file. When you check the Generate TIN w\Staked Points box, the Setup DTM 3D screen will automatically open, which is primarily used to set up your layers and a boundary.

89

Users Manual

Select Your Layers

6. Tap

, 078

to open the Layers for Staking DTM screen.

a. Select the layer that you want to use for the points that are valid for TIN generation from the first dropdown list. b. Check the Select Auxiliary Layer checkbox to automatically store any points or break-lines that cannot be used for TIN generation to a specific layer and then select the layer from the lower dropdown list. Examples of invalid objects would include a polyline that extends outside the boundary or a point with identical coordinates to another point, but with a different elevation. Leaving this box unchecked will result in a prompt to select a layer when an invalid object is to be stored. c. Tap to return to the Setup DTM 3D screen.

Select a Boundary (optional)

You can optionally define a boundary using a closed polyline for the points that are staked, which will limit the computation of the TIN surface within the selected boundary. A valid polyline must be closed, and the line must not cross over itself, such as in a figure eight. 7. To select a boundary, tap the 4:3/,7 open the Choose Polyline screen. button, which will

90

DTM Stakeout a. All the polylines in the current job are displayed. Select the appropriate polyline and tap to return to the Setup DTM 3D screen.

8. If a boundary is used, you must also select one of the two radio buttons in the Setup DTM 3D screen: Exclude points: will move any objects that occur outside the selected boundary to the Auxiliary layer. Discard the boundary: will initially move any points that exist outside the boundary to the Auxiliary layer. If a point is later stored outside the boundary, the selected boundary is automatically unselected.

Select any Break-lines (optional)

Break-lines are used to define any linear surface that has an abrupt elevation change, such as a trench, or the face of a cliff. Break-lines are necessary for an accurate TIN to be created for these surfaces. Polylines or alignments are used to define any number of break-lines, but if a boundary is used, the entire break-line must fall inside the boundary if any part of a break-line touches the boundary, the break-line is invalid.

91

Users Manual 9. To select a break-line, tap the 70, 308 button to open the Add/Edit Break-lines screen. If any break-lines have already been selected, they will be listed in this screen. a. To add an existing break-line, tap the //  89 3 button. This will display all the polylines in the current job. Select the desired polyline and tap . This will move the selected polyline to the DTM layer. b. When finished adding break-lines, tap Setup DTM 3D screen.

 480 to return to the

10. When you return to the Setup DTM 3D screen, the !4 398 button will open the Points on DTM Layer screen where the points on the DTM layer can be viewed, new points can be imported, and existing points can be deleted (moved to the Auxiliary layer). The  ' 0 button will open the 3D View screen where the DTM surface for the points on the DTM layer can be viewed from any angle. 11. This completes the Stake DTM set up procedure. Tap  480 from the Setup DTM 3D screen to return to the Stake DTM screen.

92

DTM Stakeout

Stake the DTM

12. With the information correctly entered in the Stake DTM screen, tap $4 ;0 to continue. 13. The DTM Shoot screen will open with a graphic that shows the DTM boundary, the reference DTM surface, the centerline if used, the occupy point, and backsight direction. Tap the %, 0 $ 49 button to take a shot.

14. If a shot is taken when the prism is located within the boundary (if selected earlier) the graphic will change and the Data and Result cards will be filled in. The graphic will show the current triangle in the reference DTM surface where the rod is located and a centerline and offset, if selected earlier.

15. At anytime, you can view the current DTM surface computed from the points staked so far by tapping the  ' 0 button. The $9470 button will store the last point staked. The #08: 9 card displays additional information about the

93

Users Manual last stake point and the   card displays information related to the last stake point in relation to the centerline, if selected earlier.

View the DTM

16. Tap  ' 0 to access the 3D View screen. While staking points, you should periodically tap this button to view what the current DTM surface looks like. This is a useful quality assurance technique to determine where additional points are needed. Note: The  ' 0 button is only available when Generate TIN w\Staked Points is checked in the Stake DTM screen and at least three stake points have been stored.

When the button is activated (pressed in), dragging within the 3D View will result in the image being rotated to any angle. When the button is not activated, dragging within the 3D View will move the image to any location. The '4 :20 button will display the total cut and fill volume between the area that has been staked and a reference datum, whose elevation is displayed in the Datum field and is set in the 3D View Settings screen; or the total cut and fill between the area that has been staked and the selected DTM. Note: The cut and fill values accessed from the '4 :20 button are volumes, where the cut and fill values represented in the Result card of the DTM Shot screen are vertical distances.

The button toggles to display or hide the point names and descriptions in the 3D view. 94

DTM Stakeout Datum: displays the datum elevation set in the 3D View Settings screen. 17. Tap the $099 3 button at the top of the screen to access the 3D View Setting screen to configure the information displayed in the 3D View screen. When Height Exaggerated to the Maximum is checked, the height exaggeration is automatically set to a high value. When unchecked, the height exaggeration can be set manually in the next field. Height Exaggeration Ratio: is the value that the height is multiplied by in the 3D view. The higher this value, the more exaggeration, where 1.0 would result in no exaggeration.

When Hidden-line Removal is checked, all the lines that occur behind other surfaces in the 3D View screen will be hidden. The image shown here is identical to the image shown in the screen above except the hidden lines are not removed. When Display the Difference is checked, the elevations in the 3D View screen will be distorted so the reference DTM becomes a flat surface. This will result in any staked points that occur above or below the reference DTM to clearly stand out as hills and valleys and the volume information provided in the 3D View screen will be between the staked points and the reference DTM. When the Display the Difference checkbox is unchecked, the Datum field can be set to a reference elevation. Cut and fill volumes in the 3D View screen will then be based on the difference of a horizontal plane at the elevation specified here and the staked points. The View Direction (from view point to the center) settings allow you to specify the exact horizontal and vertical angle in which to view the DTM surface.

95

Users Manual 18. Tap from the 3D View Setting screen to return to the 3D View screen. 19. Tap  480 from the 3D View screen to return to the DTM Shot screen. From there you can continue taking DTM stake shots.

96

Screen Examples
This section describes how to use several of the routines in Survey Pro. Each example outlines the procedure to use a particular screen. The examples are written in a general way so the user can use their own data to become familiar with the routine.

Import / Export Coordinates

The Import Coordinates routine allows you to add the coordinates from any job to the current job. The Export Coordinates routine allows you to export any coordinates from the current job to a new job. These routines provide full compatibility between older TDS file formats. Warning: Importing coordinates from any source other than a JOB file requires that the distance units used in the source file be specified. It is not necessary to specify the distance units when importing coordinates from a JOB file since those units are written within the file. If importing coordinates where the distance units in the source file are different than the distance units for the current job, the imported coordinates will be converted to the current jobs distance units when they are imported. This is normally the desired result, but it can cause a problem if any distance units were set incorrectly. This situation can most commonly occur when working with Feet and US Survey Feet where the conversion from one to the other is not always obvious. Usually the difference between Feet and US Survey Feet is negligible (2 parts per million), but when dealing with State Plane or UTM mapping plane coordinates, which are often very large in magnitude, the difference can be substantial if the coordinates are converted from one format to the other. If importing coordinates from a source, such as an HP 48, where you 97

Users Manual are not sure if the units are in Feet or US Survey Feet into a job that is set to Feet or US Survey Feet, you will usually just want to import them without any conversion being performed. To do this, be sure to select the same distance units for the source file as those set for the current job.

Importing *.JOB Coordinates

The steps below will add the coordinates from any existing job (CR5 or JOB) to the current job. 1. With the job open that you want to add points to, select  0 , 25479 447/ 3,908 from the Main Menu. 2. In the Type field of the Import Coordinates screen, select Job Files (*.job). 3. Tap the desired JOB file that you want to import and then tap .

Importing *.CR5 Coordinates

The steps below will add the coordinates from any existing job (CR5 or JOB) to the current job. 1. With the job open that you want to add points to, select  0 , 25479 447/ 3,908 from the Main Menu. 2. In the Type field of the Import Coordinates screen, select Coordinate Files (*.cr5). 3. Tap the desired CR5 file that you want to import and then tap . 4. The Import CR5 dialog box will open where you must specify the distance used in the file being imported. Select the correct distance and then tap . (See warning above.)

98

Screen Examples If any of the point names in the source file match a point name already in the current job, the Confirm Point Replace dialog box, shown here, will open asking you what you want to do. Make the desired choice to continue. If a duplicate point is encountered (duplicate name and coordinates), it will be ignored.

Exporting Coordinates
The steps below will copy selected points from the current job to a new job in a specified file format. 1. Select  0 ,  5479 447/ 3,908 from the Main Menu to open the Export Coordinates screen. 2. You can select the desired points to export using any of the following buttons:

%,5 !4 398 allows you to select points by tapping them from a map view. %4742 allows you to specify a range of points to export.

select points by their description.

 allows you to select all points; select all control points; or

 5479 .
99

3. Select the radio button that corresponds with the file format that you want to export. If a JOB format file was selected, tap

If a CR5 format file was selected, tap You must then specify if you want to create a Sequential or Non-Sequential file.

Users Manual Note: The HP-48 platform can only open sequential CR5 files. If a TXT format file was selected, tap 0 9 . This will lead to two additional screens where the desired format of the text file is configured. For an explanation of the available options, refer to the Reference manual.

4. The Save As dialog box will open. Specify a file name for the new file in the Name field and tap $,;0 . (The file extension is automatically added for you.)

Repetition Shots
A repetition shot consists of one or more sets. A set consists of four individual shots; direct and reverse shots to a backsight and a foresight. The result of a repetition shot is to store the foresight point using average coordinate values that are computed from all the shots taken. Repetition shots can be performed with a variety of options. This section explains how to perform a repetition shot and the different options available.

Repetition Settings Screen

The Repetition Settings screen is used to define the method that you will use when performing repetition shots. It includes acceptable tolerance values between the direct and reverse shots for each set and the desired shot sequence. The Repetition Settings must be set before you start taking shots. 1. Select  4- , $099 3 8 from the Main Menu. (You can also tap the $099 3 8 button from the Repetition Shots screen.) 100

Screen Examples 2. Tap the button to drop down the list of available screens and then tap Repetition. 3. Set the Horizontal, Zenith, and Distance Tolerances in the appropriate fields. The direct shots for each set are compared to the corresponding reverse shots. If any of the angles or distances exceeds the specified tolerances, the Repetition Error dialog box, shown here, will open that asks what you want to do. You have the following choices:

#097 : Re-shoot only the last set. 439 3:0 : Continue and use the shot
anyway.

,3.0
over.

: Throw out all sets and start

4. If the Shoot Distance To Backsight checkbox is selected, distances will also be measured with each shot to the backsight and compared against the specified Distance Tolerance. This option, of course, would require a prism to be setup over the backsight point. 5. The Do Not Shoot Reverse Distances checkbox is available for people that use total stations that cannot measure distances when in the inverted, face two, position. Check this if you use this type of total station. 6. The Enable Automatic Repetition checkbox is for users with motorized total stations. When this is checked, the first shot to the backsight and foresight is performed normally, but when those shots are complete the total station will perform all the remaining shots for each set automatically unless the user interrupts the sequence. 7. The Shooting Sequence defines the order that the forward and reverse shots are performed for each set. The notation used should be read where the > symbol indicates to aim the telescope to the next point and the ^ symbol indicates that the total station should be flopped from face one to face two or vice versa. Each option is explained below.

101

Users Manual BS > FS ^ FS > BS: Shoot backsight, shoot foresight, reverse scope, shoot foresight, shoot backsight BS > FS ^> BS > FS: Shoot backsight, shoot foresight, reverse scope, shoot backsight, shoot foresight BS ^ BS > FS ^ FS: Shoot backsight, reverse scope, shoot backsight, shoot foresight, reverse scope, shoot foresight FS ^ FS > BS ^ BS: Shoot foresight, reverse scope, shoot foresight, shoot backsight, reverse scope, shoot backsight FS > BS ^ BS > FS: Shoot foresight, shoot backsight, reverse scope, shoot backsight, shoot foresight FS > BS ^> FS > BS: Shoot foresight, shoot backsight, reverse scope, shoot foresight, shoot backsight

Repetition Shots Screen

After the repetition settings are configured for your particular situation, the Repetition Shots screen is accessed where the actual shots are performed. 1. Select $:7;0 , #0509 9 43 $ 498 from the Main Menu. If you have not already defined your backsight, you will need to do so before you can access the Repetition Shots screen. 2. Enter the Foresight point name, Number of Sets and HR (rod height) in the appropriate fields. 3. Tap the  button to start the process of shooting all of the sets using the sequence selected in the Repetition Settings screen. 4. Prompts will open after every shot that instruct you on which point to shoot next and when you when you need to flop the scope. If at least three sets were performed, the Average (of) and Worst Residual fields will be filled in after the final shot is taken. The Average (of) values are simply average measurements for all of the shots taken. The Worst Residual is the angle or distance 102

Screen Examples measurement that varied the most from the average from all the shots taken. 5. Optional The particular measurement with the worst residual can be removed and consequently not used when computing the coordinates for the foresight point by tapping the corresponding %488 button. After tossing a measurement, the Average (of) and Worst Residual values are recomputed (assuming there is still data from at least three shots remaining). 6. Optional You can re-shoot the specified number of sets, and only collect the horizontal angle, zenith angle, or slope distance from all the shots by tapping the  ,  , or $ button, respectively. This will replace all of the current shot data only for the selected data type with new data. You can even change the number of sets before shooting the new data. 7. Once you are satisfied with your shot data, tap $ /0 $ 49 to store the new foresight point as a side shot, or tap %7,;0780 to store it as a traverse shot.

103

Users Manual

Shoot From Two Ends

The Shoot From Two Ends screen is used to provide more accurate vertical closure to a traverse. The routine requires that after the foresight is shot, its location is not computed until after the foresight point is occupied and a second shot is taken to the previous occupy point. Once the second shot is complete, the coordinates for the original foresight are computed from an average of both shots. 1. From the Main Menu, select $:7;0 , $ 449 742  3/8 . If you have not already setup your backsight, you will need to do so before the Shoot From Two Ends screen will open. 2. Fill in the screen, including the number of sets that you want to shoot from each point in the Number of Sets field. 3. Tap
BS

Shot 1

Shot 2

%7,;0780 , aim toward the backsight and tap %, 0 $ 49 .

4. Shoot the specified number of sets to the backsight and foresight. When finished, the Move To Other End dialog box will open, shown here. At this point you need to move the total station over the current foresight point, place a prism over the current occupy point, fill in the dialog and tap . A new screen will open. 5. Aim at the prism located over the previous occupy point and tap %, 0 $ 49 . You will then need to shoot the specified number of sets to the previous occupy point. When the final set is complete, a screen will inform you of your new occupy and backsight point and the new point will be computed and stored.

104

Screen Examples

Offset Shots
Three individual screens are used to perform offset shots. These include the Distance Offset screen, Horizontal Angle Offset screen, and Vertical Angle Offset screen. Offset shots are generally performed to compute coordinates for points that cannot easily be occupied by the rod. The offset routine that you choose will depend on your situation. Each routine is explained below.

Distance Offset Screen

The Distance Offset screen will result in the storage of a point that is located at a specified horizontal and/or vertical distance away from the current rod location. The routine requires independent horizontal and vertical distances (offsets) that are applied to a shot from the rod location. In the example below, a point is stored that is 3 feet to the right of the prism and 1 foot behind the prism from the point of view of the total station. 1. From the Main Menu, tap $:7;0 ,  89,3.0 11809 ., or use the Ctrl -[O] hotkey. If you have not already setup your backsight, you will need to do so before the Distance Offset Shot screen 3_ft right will open. 2. The rod person should measure the horizontal and / or vertical distance to the new point from the rod position. Horizontal measurements should be taken parallel and / or perpendicular to the line between the total station and the rod. 3. If the new point is to the left or right of the rod location, enter the perpendicular offset distance in the Offset field and select L if the new point is on the left side, or R to if the new point in on the right side (from the total stations 105

1_ft back

Users Manual point of view). 4. Enter a positive offset distance in the Horz Dist Offset field if the offset to the new point is behind the rod location (from the total stations point of view), or enter a negative offset distance if the new point is in front of the rod location. 5. If the new point is at a different elevation than the rod location, enter the a positive vertical offset in the Elevation Offset field, or a negative vertical offset if the new point is below the rod location. 6. After all the appropriate fields are filled in correctly, aim the total station at the prism and tap the $ 449 button. The offset distance(s) entered will be applied when computing the coordinates for the new point and the new point will be stored as a side shot.

Horizontal Angle Offset Screen

The Horizontal Angle Offset screen is used to store a new point that lies on a line tangent to the rod and perpendicular to the line formed between the total station and the rod. (See illustration.) The routine requires two shots by the total station; one at the prism, located to the side of the new point; and one in the direction of the new point. This example explains how to store a point at the center of an obstacle such as a big tree. 1. From the Main Menu, tap $:7;0 , 47 3 0 11809 or use the Ctrl -[P] hotkey. If you have not already setup your backsight, you will need to do so before the Horizontal Angle Offset Shot screen will open. 2. The rod person should position the prism to the side of the location of the new point so that the angle formed by the new point, the prism, and total station form 90. (See illustration.) 3. With the total station aimed toward the new point, tap the  2 03907 button. Only the horizontal angle is measure during this shot so a prism does not need to be used. 106

Screen Examples 4. Aim the total station toward the prism located at the side of the new point and tap $ 449 !7 82 . The new point will be stored as a side shot. Note: The center shot and the prism shot can be taken in either order.

Vertical Angle Offset Screen

The Vertical Angle Offset screen is used to store a new point that is located directly above, or directly below the rod location. The routine requires two shots by the total station, one at the prism, and one in the direction of the new point. This example explains how to store a point that is located above the rod such as at the top of a utility pole. 1. From the Main Menu, tap $:7;0 , '079 3 0 11809 or use the Ctrl -[Q] hotkey. If you have not already setup your backsight, you will need to do so before the Horizontal Angle Offset Shot screen will open. 2. With the prism positioned directly below the location of the new point, aim the total station at the prism and tap $ 449 !7 82 . tap 3. Aim the total station at the new point and . (Only a zenith angle is measured during this shot so a prism is not necessary.) A new point will be stored with the same northing and easting as the rod location, but with a different elevation.

 2 03 9

107

Users Manual

Resection
The Resection screen allows you to occupy an unknown point and compute its coordinates by shooting two to seven known points. The accuracy of the computed occupy point depends on the following factors: The number of known points that are shot The accuracy of the known points coordinates The position of the known points relative to the total station

To better explain this last statement, when planning the location of the total station and the known points that you will shoot, try to avoid a situation where the horizontal angle turned between two known points is either near 0 or near 180. Both of these scenarios create large errors in the computed point when a small error is made in measuring the horizontal angle. This is particularly true when performing a two-point resection.

Performing a Resection
Setup the total station over the location where you want to compute coordinates. Be sure that at least two known points are in view from this location. (The known points must already be stored in the current job.) 1. Tap

$:7;0

#080.9 43 .

2. Enter the occupy point name that you want to compute in the Store Pt field. 3. Enter the number of known points that are in view that you will shoot in the Total Resect Points to Shoot field. You must shoot at least two and no more than seven. 4. Enter the number of shots (forward and reverse) that you want to take to each known point in the Shots per Resect Point field. 108

Screen Examples 5. In the Sequence field, specify if you want to perform Direct Only shots to each known point or Direct and Reverse shots. 6. Tap $4 ;0 after each field is correctly filled in. A new screen will open where you can shoot a resection point. 7. Enter the name of the point that you plan to shoot in the Resect Point field. 8. If you are shooting more than two resection points, you have the option of taking Distance and Angle measurements with each shot or Angle Only measurements by making the appropriate selection from the Option pull-down menu. Note: The Angle Only option allows you to perform all shots without the use of a prism, but the resulting occupy point that is computed will not have an elevation associated with it. 9. With this screen filled in correctly, aim toward the next resection point and tap the %, 0 $ 49 button to shoot the specified resection point. 10. Repeat Steps 7 through 10 until every resection point is shot. After the final shot is completed, the Save Point screen will open where you can specify a description for the new point. 11. Tap to return to the Resection screen. You can tap the Results tab to view information about the stored point or the Map tap to see a graphical representation of the resection.

109

Users Manual

Solar Observations
The Solar Observation screen is used to compute the azimuth to an arbitrary backsight based on the position of a celestial body, typically the sun. You can either use the time set in the system clock on the data collector or an external timepiece. Whichever you choose, you should calibrate it against Coordinated Universal Time shortly before performing the solar observation. An accurate timepiece is critical when performing solar observations. Two solar observation methods are available. One method requires data taken from an ephemeris and the other method does not. The example below illustrates performing a sun shot using ephemeris data since that method requires additional steps.

WARNING! Direct viewing of the sun without a proper

filter will cause serious eye damage. Pointing a total station directly toward the sun without a solar filter can also damage the EDM components.

Performing a Sun Shot

1. Setup over a point with known or assumed coordinates and aim the total station at the backsight point to where you want to determine the azimuth. 2. From the Main Menu, select $4 ,7 -807;,9 43 .

$:7;0

3. A dialog will open asking you to select an observation method. For this example, select the Find Azimuth Using Ephemeris Data option and tap .

110

Screen Examples 4. Enter the latitude and longitude for your occupy point in the Lat. and Long. fields, respectively. Note: Your latitude and longitude should have enough accuracy if it is scaled from a topographic map or measured using a handheld GPS unit. 5. In the Aim field, select the area of the celestial body where you plan to take your measurements. For sun shots, the trailing edge is usually used. (The left edge when in the northern hemisphere.) 6. Tap the 4770.9 438 button if the correction settings displayed to the right of the button need to be changed. If performing a sun shot, check the Non-Linear Declination Correction checkbox. (Leave it unchecked for star shots.) Check the Correct to State Grid checkbox if you want the computed azimuth corrected to align with the local state plane coordinate system.

Note: The Central Meridian and Zone Constant values for the United States are provided in Appendix A of the Reference Manual. 7. Refer to a current ephemeris and fill in the remaining five values. When the screen is correctly filled in, tap the Shots tab. Note: The GHA0 and Decl0 values are read from the ephemeris for the current date. The GHA24 and Decl24 values are listed in the ephemeris for the following day. The semi-diameter is in minutes and seconds so your value will look something like 0.16084. 8. Tap the

$ 449 button to open the Enter Shot Data screen.

111

Users Manual 9. Enter the correct hours to GMT in the Hrs To GMT field, aim toward the backsight and tap %, 0 $ 49 to record the horizontal angle to the backsight. (The azimuth to this point will be computed at the end of the routine.) Note: The hours to GMT will be between -5 and 8 when in the continental United States. 10. WITH A SOLAR FILTER INSTALLED, aim ahead of the path of the sun so that the trailing edge has not yet contacted the vertical crosshair in the scope and tap %, 0 $ 49 to record the current horizontal angle. 11. Watch the movement of the sun in the scope. As soon as the trailing edge of the sun contacts the vertical crosshair, either tap the 09 4., % 20 button or use an external timepiece and note the precise time. (When using an external timepiece, manually key in the noted time in the HH, MM, SS, sss fields.)
Get local time now!

12. Tap to continue. You will return to the Solar Observation screen and the computed azimuth for each shot taken is displayed with other shot information. Note: You can delete and re-shoot the last shot taken by selecting it and tapping the 0 button. This is useful if the last shot was in error. 13. If additional shots are remaining, the next required shot will be selected. Tap $ 449 to access the Enter Shot Data screen to take the next shot. 14. Repeat Steps 10 through 12 until all forward and reverse shots have been performed. 15. After completing all shots, you can scan down the list and view the computed azimuth for each one. If any of the azimuths appear incorrect, you can have those shots excluded from the 112

Screen Examples computed average azimuth from all shots. To exclude a particular shot, select the shot and then either tap the checkbox next to the shot or the %488 button. (You can include the shot again by selecting it and re-checking the checkbox or tapping the 3. button. 16. Tap the #08: 98 tab to view the average computed azimuth to the selected backsight.

What to Do Next
With the azimuth to the backsight known, you can now perform the following steps to begin your survey. 1. Without moving from the occupy point used while performing the solar observation, note the computed average azimuth from the Solar Observation Results screen. 2. Access the Menu.

$:7;0

,. 8 9 $09:5

screen from the Main

3. Toggle the $ !4 39 / $  70.9 43 button to the computed azimuth in that field.

$  70.9 43 and enter

power button and select the Past results Tip: You can use the option to select and automatically enter the azimuth computed from the sun shot earlier. You can also access Past Results from the Ctrl [J] hotkey.

113

Users Manual 4. Fill in the remaining fields with your current information and tap $4 ;0 . 5. Access the $:7;0 , %7,;0780  $ /08 49 screen from the Main Menu (or use the Ctrl -[R] hotkey), aim toward the backsight used during the solar observation, zero your horizontal angle on the total station and tap either $ /0 $ 49 or %7,;0780 . The data collected should be aligned correctly with true north or your local state plane coordinate system.

114

Screen Examples

Remote Control
Remote control mode is a special mode that makes it possible for users to control a fully robotic total station from a remote data collector. Remote control mode contains additional screens that are used exclusively with robotic instruments that perform tracking and aiming functions. The behavior of the software differs slightly in remote mode when a shot is taken and when performing stake out. The remote control functions are available only after the robotic module is purchased, and a supported robotic total station is selected and enabled in the Settings screen.

The Remote Control Screen

The Remote Control screen is used to operate a fully robotic total station. It is used to control the total station to have a view of the prism and to activate search and tracking functions. The Remote Control screen can be accessed in the following ways: Tap the #02490 button from any screen that includes it. Use the
Ctrl

-[Y] hotkey.

Select $:7;0 , the Main Menu.

#02490 43974

from

Once the Remote Control screen is open, you can perform the following functions: You can turn the total station in any direction using the arrow keys on the keypad. As you face the total station, pressing an arrow key will start moving the total station in that direction. The total station will continue moving until the button is released. These keys are typically used to get the total station to aim in the general vicinity of the prism. 115

Users Manual Once the total station is aiming near the prism, the $0,7. button is used to start the total station in a search pattern. The search pattern continues until it finds the prism. The 4. button puts the total station in track mode where it will track the movements of the prism and $945 will stop the total station from tracking the prism.

Taking a Shot in Remote Mode

When running in a non-remote mode, tapping the %7,;0780 or $ /0 $ 49 button will simply trigger the total station to take a shot. When running in remote mode, tapping these buttons will open the Remote Shot screen, shown here. The Remote Shot screen is identical to the Remote Control screen except it has an additional button that allows you to trigger the total station to take a shot. The screen is used to properly align the total station with the prism prior to taking a shot. Once the total station is aligned, a shot is taken by tapping the %, 0 $ 49 button. If the Remote Shot screen was accessed by performing a side shot, you will return to the Remote Shot screen after the shot is completed. If the Remote Shot screen was accessed by performing a traverse shot, you will return to the Traverse / Sideshot screen after the shot is completed.

116

Screen Examples

Stake Out in Remote Mode

Performing stake out in remote mode is different from running in a non-remote mode because the feedback is continuous and provided in the rods point of view instead of the total stations. Stakeout data is presented in the Remote Staking screen. All of the information is displayed as if the rod person were facing the total station. The graphic portion of the screen will change depending on how close the rod is to the stake point. When the prism is located more than 10 feet, or 3 meters from the stake point, the first screen shown above is displayed. In this situation, the prism is shown at the center of the screen and an arrow indicates the necessary direction of travel, as you face the total station. Once the prism moves to within 10 feet of the total station, the second screen, shown here, is displayed. The prism location is now at the center of the screen and the current prism location is displayed away from the center. Red lights are also displayed in the corners of the graphic. When the prism is within 3 feet, or 0.3 meters of the stake point, the lights change to green and locating the stake point is simply a matter of moving the round prism icon directly over the square stake point icon. When you are satisfied with the location of the prism, tap the 430 button. This will open the Stake Point screen (see Page 62) where the stake point can be stored.
Remote Staking Within 1 Foot From Target

Remote Staking Beyond 10 Feet From Target

Remote Staking Between 1 and 10 Feet

117

Users Manual

Slope Staking in Remote Mode

Slope staking in remote control mode functions in nearly the same way as with a non-remote total station (see Page 119). The one difference is when using the final Slope Staking screen, where the catch point is being located, the graphic portion of the Horizontal Map and Vertical Map is updated continuously. This allows the user at the rod position to watch the movement of the prism in relation to the slope and easily position the rod over the catch point. Note: You can tap in the graphic portion of the screen to open the graphic in a larger window. Although the graphic portion of the screen is continuously updated, the numeric values are not updated until the $ 49 button is tapped. This is because accurately locating the catch point depends on measuring an accurate elevation at the rod position. When the rod is moving, there is no way to estimate how far the rod is lifted off the ground. Therefore, the correct procedure for slope staking in remote mode is to use the graphic portion of the screen to locate the catch point as closely as possible, position the rod on the ground and press $ 49 . Once the values are updated, you can determine if the rod needs to be moved again.

118

Screen Examples

Slope Staking
The ultimate purpose of the slope staking routine is to locate where the outer slopes of a predefined roadway intersects with the surface of the terrain at various stations so the point where a cut or a fill begins can be determined. This intersecting point is called the catch point. Before a road can be slope staked, it must first be designed. The first step to designing a road is to define the path of the roads centerline. This line can be in the form of a polyline or an alignment. Creating these lines is explained in detail, starting on Page 41. Once the centerline is defined, the cross-sectional profile of the road must be defined. This profile is then superimposed onto the centerline at a specified station interval. The final step is to go out in the field and stake the catch points at each of these stations. A roads cross sectional profile always consists of left and right road surfaces, which are tangent at the centerline. An optional curb or ditch can also be included in the road profile. The final segment of a roads profile has either a specified positive slope or a specified negative slope, which ends at the catch point. This final segment attaches to the edge of the road at what is called the hinge point since this segment can hinge between a positive and negative slope around this point.

Hinge Points C L

Fill Area
Terrain Catch Points

A road requiring a fill on both sides.

Catch Points

Cut Area
C L Hinge Points

Terrain

The Slope Stake routine can automatically determine if the outer slope of the road profile should have a positive or a negative slope based on the location of the hinge point. If the A road requiring a cut on hinge point is located below the surface of the terrain, a both sides. positive slope is selected and a cut will be required, starting at the catch point. If the hinge point is located above the Cut Area Fill Area C L surface of the terrain, a negative slope is selected where a fill will be required, starting at the catch point.
Terrain

The illustrations here show examples of a road that requires a fill on both sides; a road that requires a cut on both sides; and a road that requires a fill on one side and A road requiring a fill on one side and a cut on the other side. cut on the other side.

Hinge Points Catch Points

119

Users Manual It is important to remember that when slope staking a road, the road profile always remains the same and the slope of the final segment can only equal the specified positive (cut) slope, or the specified negative (fill) slope, but the length of this final segment can vary as much as necessary until it ends at the surface of the terrain (the catch point).

Defining the Road Cross-Section

1. From the Main Menu select $9, 04:9 , $ 450 $9, 3 . You will need to select a line that defines the centerline of your road. If one is not already created, refer to Page 41 for details on creating polylines and alignments. 2. Tap the %,5 30 button and then tap the polyline or alignment that describes the centerline of the road you want to slope stake and then tap to continue. 3. Enter the station that you want to assign to the starting point of your alignment or polyline in the Begin Station field. 4. If the backsight is not yet set up, tap the ,. set up the backsight. Tap 0 9 to continue. 5. Enter the horizontal width of the left and right sides of the road in the 1/2 Road Width fields. These widths do not have to be the same. 6. Enter the cross-slopes of each side of the road in the X-Slope (%) fields. Note: A negative X-Slope value will result in a slope where water runs from the centerline of the road toward the edge. 7. If the road profile also includes a curb or a ditch, check the Stake Curb / Ditch checkbox and define the curb or ditch as follows. 120

8 9

button and

Screen Examples 8. If defining a ditch enter the depth of the ditch as a negative value in the Height field. If defining a curb, enter the height of the curb as a positive value in the Height field. 9. Enter the horizontal width of the curb or ditch in the Offset From Edge of Road field. Note: You can tap in the graphic portion of the screen to open the graphic in a larger window. 10. Tap

0 9 

to continue to the next screen. 11. Enter the first station that you want to stake in the Station to Stake field. This station will be referenced from the Begin Station, assigned to the starting point of the centerline earlier. 12. Enter the distance between each station that you want to stake in the Station Interval field. 13. Enter the Fill Slope and Cut Slope in the respective fields. These slopes will be used to compute the location of the catch point for either cut or fill situations.

121

Users Manual 14. The Segment # (Fill HP) field is used to select which segment to compute the slope from in a fill situation. This is useful when your road profile includes a ditch and you are staking an area that requires a fill. In this situation, the ditch would not be necessary so you have the option to compute the slope from Segment 1. (See illustration.) 15. Tap
Fill Slope Ditch C L

Terrain
Catch Point Hinge Point (Segment 2)

$9, 0 ! 

to begin locating the catch points.

A road with a ditch requiring a fill and the hinge point is at Segment #2.
Fill Slope C L

Terrain
Catch Point Hinge Point (Segment 1)

Staking the Catch Point

16. If the first button is set to :942,9 . $ 450 (recommended), a cut slope will automatically be selected if the hinge point is located below the surface of the terrain and a fill slope will be selected if the hinge point is above the terrain. You can also force the computed values to be based on a cut slope or fill slope by tapping the button until it reads 47.0 &% $ 450 or 47.0  $ 450 respectively.

A road with a ditch requiring a fill and the hinge point is at Segment #1. (The ditch is ignored.)

17. The second button is used to toggle which information is displayed in the lower corner of the screen. You can select '079 ., ,5 , 47 439, ,5 , or $ 49 ,9, . Note: You can tap in the graphic portion of the screen to open it in a larger window. 18. With the rod in the general location of the first catch point that you want to stake, aim toward the prism and tap $ 49 . The 122

Screen Examples distance and direction information will be computed and displayed along with other information pertaining to the shot. The routine automatically determines if you are staking the left or right catch point by the proximity of the rod. Des. Slope is the design slope of the nearest cut or fill slope when :942,9 . $ 450 is selected, otherwise it is the design slope of the selected slope. Obs. Slope is the observed slope of the terrain at the current rod location computed from the last shot and the corresponding hinge point. Cut / Fill is the amount of cut or fill necessary for the rod to be on the design slope from the current rod location. If this value is zero, you have located the catch point, provided you are on the correct station. Away (CL) indicates that the rod must move the specified horizontal distance away from the centerline (perpendicular to the centerline and parallel to the current station) to locate the catch point. Likewise, Toward CL indicates that the rod must move toward the centerline by the specified distance. On Station indicates you are properly aligned on the current station. Back Sta indicates that the rod must move back toward the start of the alignment (parallel to the centerline) by the specified distance to be properly aligned over the current station. Likewise, Ahead Sta indicates that the rod must move away from the start of the alignment to be positioned over the current station. The remaining information displays the horizontal and vertical distances to the hinge point and centerline from the current rod location. Note: All previous shots taken while locating a specific catch point are shown in the map view as large Xs. These can be useful in determining a situation where there is no catch point. (The slope never intersects with the surface of the terrain.) 19. Once the catch point is satisfactorily located and staked, tap $9470  .

123

Users Manual 20. Enter a Point Name and Description in the corresponding fields and tap $9470 ! . You can optionally stake a location at a specified horizontal offset from the catch point (away from the centerline) by entering the offset distance in the Offset from CP field and tapping $4 ;0  . This will open a new screen where the offset point can be staked like any other stake point. 21. Tap 0 9 !  . You will be prompted if you are done staking points for the current station. If you tap 08 , you will return to the third slope staking screen where you can then tap the 0 9 $9,9 43 button and advance the Station to Stake by the Station Inteval and begin locating your next catch point.

124

Screen Examples

Intersection
The Intersection screen computes and optionally stores the coordinates for the intersection of two lines that are tangent to existing points. Each line is independently defined by a known direction or a known length. In the situation where there is more than one possible solution, each solution is provided and optionally stored. 1. From the Main Menu, select 390780.9 43 .

4 4 ,

2. In the Point 1 field, enter the point name that is tangent to the first line that intersects with the other line. 3. Toggle the first button to  89,3.0 or  2 47 7 , depending on if the first line intersects at a known distance from Point 1, or at a known direction from Point 1, respectively. 4. In the same way that you defined the first line, define the second line tangent to Point 2 in the Second Point section of the screen. 5. If you want to store the intersecting point(s) that are computed from the routine, check the Store Points checkbox and specify a point name in the same field. If there is more than one solution, the additional points will be stored with the next sequential point name. 6. Tap $4 ;0 to compute the intersecting points. You can view the points coordinates by tapping the #08: 98 tab and see a graphical representation of the intersections by tapping the ,5 tab. The map shown here illustrates a situation where two intersections were computed from a line with a known length tangent to Point 1 and a line with a known direction tangent to Point 2. 125

Users Manual

Map Check
The Map Check screen is used to enter distance and direction information from a map for straight and curved sections to compute closure, and other information from the entered boundary.

Entering Boundary Data

Each straight and curved section of the boundary is entered using the // 30 and // 7. buttons in the order that the sections occur on the map. 1. Tap 4 Menu.

4 , ,5  0.

from the Main

2. To add a straight section, tap the // 30 button to open the Add/Edit Line screen. 3. Toggle the  2:9 / 0,7 3 button to the desired setting and then enter the direction in that field. 4. Enter the length of the straight section in the Length field and tap . When you return to the Map Check screen, the straight section is displayed in a map view in the right-hand portion of the screen, along with any previously entered sections. 1. To add a horizontal curve to the boundary, tap the button 2. Describe the curve in the Add/Edit Curve screen. 3. Tap when finished.

// 7.

Each section is added to the end of the previous section until all the sections are entered. When you are finished, you can view the details of the entered boundary by tapping the #08: 98 tab. You can also merge the entered data with the current project, described later.

126

Screen Examples

Editing Boundary Data

Any entered section can be modified if an error is discovered. To edit a particular section, select the section from the left-hand portion of the screen and tap the / 9 button. The details of the selected section will open in the same editor that was used to create it. Simply make the necessary changes and tap .

Adding Boundary Data to the Current Project

You can add the boundary data that was entered to your current project. Points will then be created for the ends of each section that was entered and the line for the boundary is stored as a polyline. The polyline can be used in any routine that supports them such as Inverse Point to Polyline, Edit Lines, Computer Area, etc. 1. To add the boundary data to the current project, tap the // 94 2,5 button. 2. In the Description field, enter the desired name for the polyline that will be stored. 3. Define the location of the beginning of the first section that defines your boundary. To specify a new location, tap the &80 4.,9 43 button and enter the appropriate northing, easting and elevation. To specify an existing location, tap the &80 !4 39 button, and enter the point name in the same field. (Alternatively, you can tap the button and then tap on a point from the map view.)

4. Enter a name for the initial stored point in the Store points field. Each new point that follows will automatically be stored with the next available consecutive point name.

127

Users Manual

Predetermined Area
The Predetermined Area routine will take a boundary with one open side and compute the location of a line that will enclose a boundary with a specified area. Two methods are available for computing a predetermined area, the Hinge Method and the Parallel Method. Each method is explained below.

Hinge Method
The Hinge Method computes the location of a side of a boundary that has one fixed point. The fixed point acts as a hinge where the computed side can pivot. For example, assume you have four points that define an open boundary and you want to use the Hinge Method to compute the location of the final side of the boundary so that the entire boundary encloses a 1/3-acre lot and the fixed point (the location of the hinge) is point 4, as shown here. The computed boundary line will fall somewhere in the gray area when the lot is equal to 1/3 acre. 1. Select 4 4 , Main Menu.
4 (hinge) 1 ?

!70/09072 30/ 70,

from the

2. In the upper-left corner, enter the desired area (0.333-acres in this example) and select the Hinge radio button. 3. Tap the %,5 !4 398 button and then tap the points in the map view in the order that they occur in the boundary. (You would tap 2, 3, 4 in this example to define the two fixed boundary sides.) Note: The boundary can have as many points as you desire, but the selected points must begin with the starting point of the fixed line that the hinge line intersect with and end with the hinge point.

128

Screen Examples 4. Check the Store Pt 1 checkbox and specify a point number in the same field if you want the endpoint of the computed line to be stored. 5. Enter the direction of the left side of the boundary in the last field. In this example, you should use the power button, and select Choose from map and then tap points 2 and 1. The direction from point 2 to point 1 will then be automatically entered in the last field. 6. Tap $4 ;0 . The final boundary side will be computed and the data can be viewed by using the Results and Map tabs. If you selected to store a point in Step 4, the computed point will also be stored (Point 8 in the illustration shown here).

Parallel Method
4 1

The Parallel Method computes the location of one side of a four-sided boundary where the computed side is parallel to a stationary side of the boundary. Using the same lot as we used above, we will compute the location of a line in a 1/3-acre boundary that is parallel to line 2-3 and intersects with line 2-1 and 3-4 as shown here. 1. Tap

? 2 3

4 4 , !70/09072 30/ 70, from the Main Menu.

2. In the upper-left corner, enter the desired area (1/3 acre in this example) and select the Parallel radio button. 3. Enter the first point that defines the fixed side of your four-sided boundary in the Point 1 field and the second point in the Point 2 field. (The computed side will be parallel to the line between these points.)

4. Define the directions of the two sides of the boundary that will intersect with the endpoints of the computed line. For this example, you would tap the power button, associated with each direction, select Choose From Map and then tap points 2 and 1 for the first direction, and 3 and 4 for the second direction. 129

Users Manual 5. If you want to store points where the computed line intersects with the two sides, check each Store Pt box and specify point names in the corresponding fields. 6. Tap $4 ;0 . The final boundary side will be computed and the data can be viewed by using the Results and Map tabs. If you selected to store points, the computed points will also be stored.

130

Screen Examples

Horizontal Curve Layout

The Horizontal Curve Layout screen is useful to compute the locations of any station along a horizontal curve using one of four different methods. The values computed can be written down and used to later stake those stations in the field. 1. Tap

:7;0 , :7;0 , 4:9

from the Main Menu.

2. Select the method that you want to use to compute your curve layout data in the Method field. Each method is described below.
PT

PC Deflection
Current Station RP
Cho rd

PI

The PC Deflection method computes a chord length from the PC to the current station and a deflection angle between the PC-PI line and the chord.

PC

Deflection

PT

PI Deflection
Current P I to Station S RP

tat

ion
PI

Deflection

The PI Deflection method computes the distance from the PI to the current station and the deflection angle between the PI-PC line and the PI to Station line.

PC

131

Users Manual

PT

Tangent Offset
The Tangent Offset method computes a perpendicular offset length (Tangent Offset) from the PC-PI line to the current station and the distance on the PC-PI line from the PC to the Tangent Offset (Tangent Distance).
Current Station RP
n Ta O

PI

Tan - TD

nt ge n Ta

PC

PT

Chord Offset
The Chord Offset method computes a perpendicular offset length from the PC-PT line to the current station (Chord Offset), the distance on the PC-PT line from the PC to the chord offset (Chord Distance), the distance from the PC to the current station (Chord Length) and the deflection angle from the PC-PT line to the PC-Station line.
Chord Offset RP
Cho rd Le ngth

Ta n

is

t.

ffs et

Current Station

Chord Dist.

PI

PC Deflection PC

3. Define your horizontal curve by making the appropriate selections from the first two buttons and filling in the corresponding values. 4. Enter the station to be assigned to the PC in the PC Station field. 5. Check the Interval box if you want to compute data for stations at fixed intervals on the curve and enter the distance between them in the same field. 132

Screen Examples 6. Enter the station that you want to compute in the Current Station field and tap $4 ;0 . 7. Tap the #08: 98 tab to view the numerical information for the location of the current station. Tap the ,5 tab to view a graphic of the current station on the curve. 8. Tap $9, to advance the current station by the specified station interval or tap $9,
to subtract the station interval from the current station.

Parabolic Curve Layout

The Parabolic Curve Layout screen is useful to compute the locations of any station along a vertical curve when two parts of the curve are already known. The values computed can be written down and used to later stake those stations in the field. 1. Tap :7;0 , Main Menu.

!,7,-4 . :7;0

from the

2. In the Known field, select if the station and elevation for the PVC or the PVI are known by selecting the appropriate radio button. Also specify if the Curve Length, Point on Curve, or High/Lo Elevation is known from the dropdown list. (The remaining information that must be entered will vary depending on the choice made here.) 3. Fill in each field with the remaining information that pertains to your parabolic curve and tap $4 ;0 . Note: The length of a parabolic curve is the horizontal distance from the PVC to the PVT. Note: The horizontal distance from the PVI to the PVC always equals the horizontal distance from the PVI to the PVT 133

Users Manual

Spiral Layout
A spiral curve is a special curve that has a specified radius at one end, which gradually changes to an infinite radius at the other end. It is commonly used as a transition between a straight section and a circular curve. The Spiral Layout screen is used to calculate the pertinent parts of a circular curve after specifying the spiral curves radius and length. 1. Tap :7;0 , Menu.

$5 7,

from the Main

2. Enter the radius of the spiral curve in the Curve field. 3. Enter the length of the spiral curve in the Length field. 4. Tap $4 ;0 . The details of the specified spiral curve can be viewed by tapping the Results and Map tabs.

134

Screen Examples

Curve and Offset

The Curve and Offset screen allows you to design a curve and stake it in the field. You can stake the curves centerline or an offset to the curve at any specified station interval.

Define Your Curve

1. Tap $9, 04:9 , Main Menu.

:7;0 ,3/ 11809

from the

2. If you have not yet setup your backsight, tap the ,. 8 9 button and set it up. 3. Specify the point that you will use for the PC of your curve in the PC Point field. Tip: You can use the power button, a point from your map. to select

4. Define the direction of the tangent azimuth at the PC of your curve by selecting ! %,3 039  2 or ! %,3 039 7 and enter the appropriate value in this field.

5. Define the size of the curve by selecting #,/ :8 , 0 700 7. , or 0 700  47/ and enter the appropriate value in this field.

Note: Since the length of the curve is not required, you can potentially stake a 360 curve. 6. Select the radio button that defines if the curve turns toward the Left or Right as you view the curve from the PC. 7. Enter the station that you want to assign to the PC in the Begin Station field. (This value is typically zero.) 8. Tap

0 9 to continue.
135

Users Manual

Setup Your Staking Options

9. Enter the first station that you want to stake in the Station to Stake field. 10. Enter the desired spacing between the staked stations in the Station Interval field. 11. In the Offset field, select L if you wish to stake an offset on the left side of the curve, or select R if you wish to stake an offset on the right side and enter the desired offset here. (If you are not staking an offset, enter an offset of zero.) 12. Tap the ' 11809 / 7,/0 button if you want to account for a vertical offset or percent grade for the staked points and enter the appropriate valued in the same field. When specifying a vertical offset, you must also select the D or U radio button to indicate if the specified offset is downward or upward from the design point, respectively. 13. Enter the current rod height in the Height of Rod field and tap $4 ;0 .

Aim the Total Station

14. Using the information displayed on the screen, aim the total station toward the design point and tap $9, 0  . The graphic portion of the screen shows the curve, backsight direction and design point location relative to the total station.

136

Screen Examples

Stake the Point

15. The final screen allows you to stake the current station. With the rod positioned where you want it, tap the $ 49 button to take a shot. If necessary, move the rod and take another shot until it is over the design point. 16. Tap the $9470 button to save the stake point. You will automatically be returned to the second screen (Step 9) where you can then tap the 0 9 $9,9 43 button to advance the current station by the station interval and stake the next point.

137

Users Manual

Scale Adjustment
The Scale routine will adjust the coordinates of selected points by a specified scale factor relative to a base point. This is useful to repair data that was collected where an incorrect scale factor was applied. 1. Tap 2.

/ :89 , $., 0 Use the %,5 !4 398

from the Main Menu.

or %4742 button to specify the points that you want to adjust.

3. Enter the name of the base point in the Base Point field. 4. Specify the scale factor to apply in the Scale Factor field. 5. If you also want to adjust the elevations of the selected points, check the Include Elevation in Adjustment checkbox. 6. Tap $4 ;0 . The coordinates for the selected points will be adjusted. Note: If you choose to also scale elevations, the scale factor will be applied to the difference in elevation between the base point and each selected point. For example, if the base point elevation was 100 and the elevation for a selected point was 150, applying a scale factor of 0.5 would result in an elevation of 125 for the selected point.

138

Screen Examples

Translate Adjustment
The Translate routine will move points horizontally and/or vertically a specified distance and direction. This routine is often used after a survey was performed in an assumed coordinate system. If the actual coordinates for at least one of the points is found later, the Translate routine can be used to shift all of the affected points to the correct coordinate system and/or elevation. 1. Tap / :89 , Menu.

%7,38 ,90

from the Main

2. Use the %,5 !4 398 or %4742 button to select the points that need to be adjusted. 3. Define the direction and distance for the adjustment using either of the following two methods:

Translate by Distance and Direction

The Translate by Distance and Direction method simply requires that you enter the distance and direction to adjust the selected points. Leave the Translate by Coordinates checkbox unchecked. Toggle the  2:9 / 0,7 3 button to the desired format and enter the direction to adjust the selected points.

Enter the horizontal distance to adjust the selected points in the Distance field. Enter the elevation to adjust the selected points in the Elevation field.

139

Users Manual Tap $4 ;0 . The selected points will be adjusted by the direction and distance entered.

Translate by Coordinates
The Translate by Coordinates method requires that you define a starting location and an ending location. The adjustment will then move all of the selected points in the direction and distance as defined between the starting and ending locations. Check the Translate by Coordinates checkbox. Tap the From tab and enter the starting location by tapping the !4 39 / 4.,9 43 button and either specify an existing point name or enter coordinates.

Tap the To tab and define the ending location in the same way as you did above. Tap $4 ;0 . The selected points will be adjusted in the same direction and distance as between the starting and ending location.

140

Screen Examples

Rotate Adjustment
The Rotate Adjustment routine will rotate selected points around a specified rotation point. 1. Tap 2.

/ :89 , #49,90 from the Main Menu. Use the %,5 !4 398 or %4742 button to
select the points that need to be rotated.

3. Enter the point that the selected points will rotate around in the Rotation Point field. 4. Select a radio button for one of the following rotation methods: field. If you select Old and New Azimuths, enter an Old Azimuth and New Azimuth in the appropriate fields. (The rotation angle used is the computed angle from the old azimuth to the new azimuth.) If you select Simple Angle, simply enter the rotation angle in the appropriate

5. Tap $4 ;0 . The selected points will be rotated around the rotation point by the specified angle.

141

Users Manual

Traverse Adjust
The Traverse Adjust wizard will perform an angle adjustment, a compass rule adjustment, or both.

Angle Adjust
The Angle Adjust routine will compute the angular error in a closed traverse from a known closing angle. It will then distribute that error equally among all of the internal angles so that the resulting sum of the angles will equal (N2)180 because the sum of the internal angles of any closed polygon can be computed using this formula, where N is the number of sides of the polygon. After performing an angle adjustment, all of the points except for the first two points will be adjusted. (The azimuth of the first leg will remain constant.) The closing angle provided is used to compute the angular error. It is the angle as you occupy the closing point, aim toward the second point and turn an angle-right to the second-to-the-last traverse point (see illustration).
1 5 2

3 4

Note: An angle adjustment does not always adjust the closing point to a location that is closer to the starting point.

6 Closing Angle

Compass Rule
The Compass Rule Adjustment will adjust either a closed or an open traverse. When adjusting a closed traverse, the error between the closing point and the initial point is computed and distributed among each traverse point, except the initial point resulting in a perfect closure. When adjusting an open traverse, the error between the final points actual location and specified theoretical location is 142

Screen Examples computed and distributed among the traverse points in the same way as with a closed traverse. Typically the Angle Adjust option should also be selected to remove the angular when performing a compass rule adjustment.

Adjust Elevations
The Adjust Elevations option only applies when performing a Compass Rule adjustment. If this option is selected, the elevations for the adjusted points will also be adjusted along with the horizontal coordinates resulting in perfect closure vertically as well as horizontally. If this is unchecked, the traverse will only be adjusted horizontally.

Adjust Sideshots
The Adjust Sideshots option allows you to also adjust any side shots that were stored while occupying any of the traverse points in the selected traverse. The side shots that will be adjusted are determined by the information stored in the raw data. Because of this, the end user cannot explicitly define which side shots to include or exclude from the adjustment. The side shots are adjusted by first computing the new locations of the traverse points, which are the occupy and backsight points for the side shots. The routine will then read the original angles and distances recorded for each side shot and apply those measurements to the adjusted locations of the appropriate traverse points.

143

Users Manual

Performing a Traverse Adjustment

1. Tap 2.

/ :89 , %7,;0780 / :89 from the Main Menu. Use the %,5 !4 308 or %4742 button
to select the polyline or points that define your traverse, which should be in the same order that the traverse points were collected.

3. Select the appropriate checkboxes to define the type of adjustment(s) to perform and what will be adjusted. 4. Tap 0 9  to continue to the next screen. The screen that opens will depend on the selections made from the main screen. 5. If an angle adjustment is being performed, the screen shown here will open. Enter the closing angle for the traverse in the form of an angle-right. 6. Tap 0 9  to open the next screen of the adjustment wizard.

7. If a Compass Rule adjustment is being performed, the screen shown here will open. Select Closed Traverse if you are adjusting a closed traverse or select Close to Known Location if you are adjusting an open traverse and closing to a known point or location. A closing location can be defined by an existing point or known coordinates by toggling the !4 39 / 4.,9 43 button accordingly.

144

Screen Examples

Note: if closing to a known location and a closing location is not specified, it is automatically assumed that the first point of the traverse will be the closing location. 8. Tap 0 9  to open the final screen of the adjustment wizard, which displays the changes that will be made by the adjustment where they can be previewed before the actual adjustment is applied. The screen lists the adjustment details in three main sections: the angle adjustment details; the compass rule adjustment details, and the point details where the beforeand-after coordinates for each point are listed. An example of the information provided in this screen is shown here. 9. If you are satisfied with the changes that will be made by the adjustment routine, tap / :89 to perform the adjustment.

145

Trimble SURVEY PRO

for Windows CE Reference Manual

2002 Tripod Data Systems, Inc. All Rights Reserved

TRIPOD DATA SYSTEMS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT IMPORTANT: BY OPENING THE SEALED MEDIA PACKAGE, YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE LICENSE AGREEMENT AND LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY ("Agreement"). THIS AGREEMENT CONSTITUTES THE COMPLETE AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AND TRIPOD DATA SYSTEMS, INC. ("Licensor"). CAREFULLY READ THE AGREEMENT AND IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS, RETURN THE UNOPENED MEDIA PACKAGE AND THE ACCOMPANYING ITEMS (including written materials and binders or other containers) TO THE PLACE WHERE YOU OBTAINED THEM FOR A FULL REFUND. LICENSE. LICENSOR grants to you a limited, non-exclusive license to (i) install and operate the copy of the computer program contained in this package ("Program") on a single computer (one central processing unit and associated monitor and keyboard) and (ii) make one archival copy of the Program for use with the same computer. LICENSOR retains all rights to the Program not expressly granted in this Agreement. OWNERSHIP OF PROGRAMS AND COPIES. This license is not a sale of the original Program or any copies. LICENSOR retains the ownership of the Program and all subsequent copies of the Program made by you, regardless of the form in which the copies may exist. The Program and accompanying manuals ("Documentation") are copyrighted works of authorship and contain valuable trade secrets and confidential information proprietary to LICENSOR. You agree to exercise reasonable efforts to protect LICENSOR'S proprietary interest in the Program and Documentation and maintain them in strict confidence. USER RESTRICTIONS. You may physically transfer some Programs from one computer to another provided that the Program is operated only on one computer. Other Programs will operate only with the computer that has the same security code and cannot be physically transferred to another computer. You may not electronically transfer the Program or operate it in a time-sharing or service bureau operation. You agree not to translate, modify, adapt, disassemble, de-compile, or reverse engineer the Program, or create derivative works based on the Program or Documentation or any portions thereof. TRANSFER. The Program is provided for use in your internal commercial business operations and must remain at all times upon a single computer owned or leased by you. You may not rent, lease, sublicense, sell, assign, pledge, transfer or otherwise dispose of the Program or Documentation, on a temporary or permanent basis, without the prior written consent of LICENSOR. TERMINATION. This License is effective until terminated. This License will terminate automatically without notice from LICENSOR if you fail to comply with any provision of this License. Upon termination you must cease all use of the Program and Documentation and return them, and any copies thereof, to LICENSOR. GENERAL. This License shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Oregon, United States of America. LIMITED WARRANTIES AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY LICENSOR grants solely to you a limited warranty that (i) the media on which the Program is distributed shall be substantially free from material defects for a period of NINETY (90) DAYS, and (ii) the Program will perform substantially in accordance with the material descriptions in the Documentation for a period of NINETY (90) DAYS. These warranties commence on the day you first obtain the Program and extend only to you, the original customer. These limited warranties give you specific legal rights, and you may have other rights, which vary from state to state. Except as specified above, LICENSOR MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE PROGRAM, MEDIA OR DOCUMENTATION AND HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. LICENSOR does not warrant the Program will meet your requirements or that its operations will be uninterrupted or error-free. If the media, Program or Documentation are not as warranted above, LICENSOR will, at its option, repair or replace the nonconforming item at no cost to you, or refund your money, provided you return the item, with proof of the date you obtained it, to LICENSOR within TEN (10) DAYS after the expiration of the applicable warranty period. If LICENSOR determines that the particular item has been damaged by accident, abuse, misuse or misapplication, has been modified without the written permission of LICENSOR, or if any LICENSOR label or serial number has been removed or defaced, the limited warranties set forth above do not apply and you accept full responsibility for the product. The warranties and remedies set forth above are exclusive and in lieu of all others, oral or written, express or implied. Statements or representations which add to, extend or modify these warranties are unauthorized by LICENSOR and should not be relied upon by you. LICENSOR or anyone involved in the creation or delivery of the Program or Documentation to you shall have no liability to you or any third party for special, incidental, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, loss of profits or savings, downtime, damage to or replacement of equipment and property, or recovery or replacement of programs or data) arising from claims based in warranty, contract, tort (including negligence), strict liability, or otherwise even if LICENSOR has been advised of the possibility of such claim or damage. LICENSOR'S liability for direct damages shall not exceed the actual amount paid for this copy of the Program. Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of implied warranties or liability for incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. U.S. GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS If the Program is acquired for use by or on behalf of a unit or agency of the United States Government, the Program and Documentation are provided with "Restricted Rights". Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013, and to all other regulations, restrictions and limitations applicable to Government use of Commercial Software. Contractor/manufacturer is Tripod Data Systems, Inc., PO Box 947, Corvallis, Oregon, 97339, United States of America. Should you have questions concerning the License Agreement or the Limited Warranties and Limitation of Liability, please contact in writing: Tripod Data Systems, Inc., PO Box 947, Corvallis, Oregon, 97339, United States of America. TRADEMARKS Survey Pro is a registered trademark of Tripod Data Systems, Inc. Windows and Windows CE are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

.MAN-TMBSURVPRO

05102002

ii

Table of Contents
Reference
Main Menu............................................................................. R-1 File Menu................................................................................ R-3 Open / New........................................................................... R-4 New Job .................................................................................. R-5 Save As ................................................................................... R-9 Import Coordinates............................................................. R-10 Export Coordinates............................................................. R-15 Backup / Restore Job.......................................................... R-18 Transfer................................................................................. R-22 Register Modules ................................................................ R-23 About Survey Pro................................................................ R-24 Exit......................................................................................... R-24 Job Menu .............................................................................. R-25 Settings ................................................................................. R-26 Edit Points ............................................................................ R-39 Edit Polylines....................................................................... R-44 Edit Alignments .................................................................. R-48 Auto Linework .................................................................... R-55 View Raw Data File ............................................................ R-58 View DTM ............................................................................ R-59 Manage Layers .................................................................... R-66 Job Information.................................................................... R-67 Calculator ............................................................................. R-68 Survey Menu........................................................................ R-71 Backsight Setup ................................................................... R-72 Traverse / Sideshot............................................................. R-75 Repetition Shots................................................................... R-80 Multiple Sideshots .............................................................. R-82 Distance Offset Shot............................................................ R-83 Horizontal Angle Offset..................................................... R-84
iii

Vertical Angle Offset .......................................................... R-85 Auto Collect ......................................................................... R-85 Corner & 2 Lines ................................................................. R-88 Corner & Angle ................................................................... R-89 Corner & Offset ................................................................... R-90 Corner & Plane .................................................................... R-92 Shoot From Two Ends ........................................................ R-93 Record Mode........................................................................ R-94 Resection............................................................................... R-95 Remote Elevation ................................................................ R-97 Solar Observation................................................................ R-98 Remote Control ................................................................. R-103 Stakeout Menu................................................................... R-105 Stake Points........................................................................ R-106 Stake List of Points Screen ............................................... R-111 Stake to Line....................................................................... R-113 Offset Staking .................................................................... R-117 Slope Staking ..................................................................... R-122 Stake Line and Offset........................................................ R-128 Stake Curve and Offset .................................................... R-131 Stake Spiral and Offset ..................................................... R-135 Show Station and Offset................................................... R-139 Store Offset Points............................................................. R-141 Stake DTM.......................................................................... R-144 Define a Location .............................................................. R-149 Where is Next Point.......................................................... R-151 Inverse Menu ..................................................................... R-153 Inverse Point to Point ....................................................... R-154 Inverse Point to Line......................................................... R-155 Inverse Point to Polyline .................................................. R-156 Inverse Point to Multiple Points ..................................... R-158 Inverse Point to Location / Point ................................... R-159 Cogo Menu......................................................................... R-161 Point in Direction .............................................................. R-162
iv

Intersection......................................................................... R-163 Offset Line .......................................................................... R-164 Offset Points....................................................................... R-165 Corner Angle ..................................................................... R-167 Compute Area ................................................................... R-168 Triangle Solutions ............................................................. R-169 Map Check ......................................................................... R-170 Predetermined Area ......................................................... R-173 HD/VD to SD/ZA............................................................ R-175 SD/ZA to HD/VD............................................................ R-176 Curve Menu ....................................................................... R-177 Curve Solution................................................................... R-178 Known PI and Tangents................................................... R-180 Three Point Curve............................................................. R-181 Compute Radius Point ..................................................... R-183 Line Tangent to Circle ...................................................... R-185 Horizontal Curve Layout................................................. R-185 Traverse on Curve............................................................. R-190 Parabolic Curve ................................................................. R-192 Parabolic Layout ............................................................... R-194 Straight Grade.................................................................... R-196 Spiral ................................................................................... R-197 Spiral Layout...................................................................... R-198 Traverse on Spiral ............................................................. R-199 Roads Menu ....................................................................... R-201 Add/Edit Templates ........................................................ R-202 Edit Alignments ................................................................ R-205 Add/Edit Roads................................................................ R-205 Road Stakeout.................................................................... R-217 Road Slope Staking ........................................................... R-221 Road Station and Offset ................................................... R-224 Adjust Menu ...................................................................... R-227 Scale..................................................................................... R-228 Translate ............................................................................. R-229
v

Rotate .................................................................................. R-231 Traverse Adjust ................................................................. R-232 Miscelaneous Screens ....................................................... R-237 Past Results ........................................................................ R-237 Create Points Screen ......................................................... R-238 Map Display Options ....................................................... R-239 Map View ........................................................................... R-240

Appendix A
Transverse Mercator Zones .................................................A-1 Lambert Zones.......................................................................A-2

vi

Main Menu

R-1

Survey Pro Reference Manual The Main Menu is the starting point where all the other screens described in this manual are accessed. Other than accessing various screens, the following controls in the Main Menu let you change your data collection mode and view a map of the current job.

Operating Mode
The button at the top of the screen will open a dialog or box that allows Survey Pro CE with GPS users to select between surveying in Conventional Mode or GPS Mode. icon is displayed When Conventional Mode is selected, the icon is displayed. and when GPS Mode is selected, the For more information on surveying in GPS mode, refer to the separate Survey Pro CE GPS Manual. Note: To order the GPS module, please contact TDS or your dealer.

Battery Level
The battery icon indicates the condition of the data collectors rechargeable battery. The icon has five variations depending on the 100%, 75% 50%, level of charge that is remaining: 25% and 5%. Note: Tapping the battery icon is a shortcut to the Microsoft Power Properties screen, which is normally accessed from the Windows CE Control Panel. Tap the button in the title bar of this screen to view the online help.

Map View
A map view of the current job can be displayed by tapping the button. This screen is described on Page R-240. R-2

File Menu
The File Menu contains routines to transfer files between the data collector and another device. A: Open / New B: Save As C: Import Coordinates D: Export Coordinates E: Backup / Restore Job F: Transfer G: Register Modules H: About Survey Pro I: Exit

R-3

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Open / New
 0 503  0 

The Open / New screen is used to open an existing job or create a new one. This screen also appears when Survey Pro for Windows CE is first started.
503 : will open the job selected in the Open a Recent Job list. 74 80 : will open the Open screen (Page R-8) where an existing job to open can be selected. 0 : will open the New screen (Page R-5) where a new job can be created.

R-4

File Menu

New Job
 0 503  0 0 

The New Job screen is used to create a new project.

Create a New Job

Directory: displays the directory where the current job will be stored. Job Name: is where the name of the new job is entered. The default name is the current date.
74 80 : allows you to select a different directory where to store the new job. 0 9  : accesses the second screen where job details are defined.

Create a New Job Screen Two

Azimuth Type: specifies if you are surveying with a North Azimuth or South Azimuth. Units for Distances: specifies if your distances will be entered in Feet, U.S. Feet, or Meters.

R-5

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Note: You can enter a distance in any distance field in units other than what is set for the job by appending the distance value with the following characters:

O f or ft O usf or usft O i or in Om O cm O mm O c or ch

Feet US Survey Feet Inches Meters Centimeters Millimeters Chains

Once the cursor leaves that field, the distance will be converted automatically. (A space between the value and the unit abbreviation is optional.) Units for Angles: specifies if angles will be entered in Degrees or Grads. Adjust for Earth Curvature / Refraction: When checked, the elevations recorded from all shots will be adjusted to compensate for earth curvature and refraction. User Scale Factor: When checked, all horizontal distances when taking shots will be adjusted by the scale factor entered here. : accesses the third screen where coordinates for the first point are defined and the job is saved.
0 9 

R-6

File Menu

Create a New Job Screen Three

Point Name: is the name of the initial point. Northing: is the Y-coordinate of the initial point. Easting: is the X-coordinate of the initial point. Elevation: is the elevation of the initial point. Description: is the description of the initial point.
,.

: returns you to the first screen.

 3 8 : stores a new job file and raw data file using the specified information.

Note: The values entered for the first point of a new job are saved and used as the default values for the next new job that is created.

R-7

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Open
 0 503  0  74 80 

The Open screen is used to open an existing job. A list of all the jobs in the current directory is displayed. Simply tap on the job name that you want to open and then tap . Note: TDS CR5 files can be opened just like any Survey Pro JOB file. When a CR5 file is opened, it is automatically converted and stored to a JOB file with the same name. If a matching RW5 raw data file exists, it too will be converted and saved to a Survey Pro RAW file with a note inserted indicating that the conversion took place. When a job is being opened, the Loading JOB file screen will open and display the status of the loading process.

R-8

File Menu

Save As
 0 $,;0 8

The Save As screen allows you to save a copy of the current job under a new name. The copy that is created will then become the current job. The Save As dialog box is identical to that found in the Windows CE operating system. Simply enter a new name for the current job and then tap the $,;0 button. Note: It is not necessary to include the .JOB extension since it will automatically be added for you.

R-9

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Import Coordinates
 0 25479 447/ 3,908

The Import Coordinates screen is used to add the points from another source into the current job. Warning: Coordinate values can change when they are imported! Importing coordinates from any source other than a JOB file requires that the distance units used in the source file be specified. It is not necessary to specify the distance units when importing coordinates from a JOB file since those units are written within the file. If importing coordinates where the distance units in the source file are different than the distance units for the current job, the imported coordinates will be converted to the current jobs distance units when they are imported. This is normally the desired result, but it can cause a problem if any distance units were set incorrectly. This situation can most commonly occur when working with Feet and US Survey Feet where the conversion from one to the other is not always obvious. Usually the difference between Feet and US Survey Feet is negligible (2 parts per million), but when dealing with State Plane or UTM mapping plane coordinates, which are often very large in magnitude, the difference can be substantial if the coordinates are converted from one format to the other. If importing coordinates from a source, such as an HP 48, where you are not sure if the units are in Feet or US Survey Feet into a job that is set to Feet or US Survey Feet, you will usually just want to import them without any conversion being performed. To do this, be sure to select the same distance units for the source file as those set for the current job.

R-10

File Menu Coordinates from a variety of file types can be imported into the current job. The first Import Coordinates screen is used to select from the file types listed below. The next screen that opens depends on the selection made here. Job Files (*.JOB): import coordinates from another Job file. Coordinate Files (*.CR5): import coordinates from a TDS CR5 coordinate file. GPS Files (*.GPS): import coordinates from a TDS GPS coordinate file. Text Files (*.TXT): text files can contain coordinates in several different possible formats. The Import ASCII Wizard is used to define the format of the text file being imported.

Import *.JOB Coordinates

When importing coordinates from another *.JOB file, the Import Coordinates screen is used, described above. A list of all the jobs available in the current directory is displayed. Simply tap on the job name that you want to import and then tap the button. The points in the selected job will be added to the points in the current job.

Import *.CR5 Coordinates

The Import CR5 dialog box will open when importing coordinates from a TDS CR5 coordinate file. Simply select the distance units that the coordinates were stored in and tap .

R-11

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Import *.GPS Coordinates

The Import CR5 dialog box will open when importing coordinates from a TDS GPS coordinate file. Simply select the distance units that the coordinates were stored in and tap . When importing coordinates from both a TDS CR5 and GPS file from the same job, the GPS coordinate will be linked to the coordinates in the CR5 file. For more information on this, refer to the GPS Users Guide.

Import *.TXT Coordinates

Since the coordinates in an ASCII *.TXT file can be stored in a variety of formats, two screens are used to define the format of the file that is being imported. The source *.TXT file can contain either plane coordinates or geodetic coordinates. Delimiters: is the character that separates each column of text in the ASCII file. Units: are the units that the distances in the file were stored in. Coordinates: is used to specify if the coordinates are plane coordinates, geodetic coordinates in degrees-minutes-seconds format, or geodetic coordinates in decimal format. Skip the first row: should be checked if the first line in the ASCII file contains noncoordinate information, such as a heading.
0 9 

: opens the second screen.

R-12

File Menu

Import *.TXT Coordinates Screen Two

,20 4 :23 4 / $9,79 !4 39 ,20 : When the first option is selected here, the column number used for the name field in the *.TXT file is specified here. When the second option is selected, it is assumed that the *.TXT file does not contain point names and will assign the first point the name specified here and increment to the next available point name for the remaining points.

Columns: is where the column number for each specified coordinate exists in the source *.TXT file. The coordinates types displayed here can either be for plane coordinates or geodetic coordinates depending on the selections made in the previous screen. If a coordinate has a checkbox, which is unchecked, it is assumed that the source *.TXT file does not contain columns for that type of coordinate. Specify Missing Elevation Threshold: if the source file was created from coordinates with no elevations, but the file contains an elevation column with values, such as 0, check this box and indicate the value in the field that will appear to the right.
!70; 0 : opens the ASCII Import Preview window containing all the point data that will be imported. This is useful to check for errors before actually importing new data. ,. 38

: returns to the previous screen. : imports the new point data into the current project.

Confirm Point Replace Dialog Box

If a point being imported has the same name and the same coordinates as a point that is already in the current job, it is ignored and a message will be displayed after the remaining points are imported to indicate this. R-13

Survey Pro Reference Manual If an imported point is encountered with the same name, but with different coordinates as a point in the current job, the Confirm Point Replace dialog box will open.
08 : will replace the point in the current job with the point being imported. 08 94  : will replace the point in the current job with the point being imported and perform the same action for any remaining duplicate points. 4 : will not import the duplicate point, keeping the coordinates for the existing point unchanged. 4 94  : will not import the duplicate point, keeping the coordinates for the existing point unchanged and perform the same action for any remaining duplicate points. #03:2-07 : will store the new point in the current job under the name specified in the Starting At field. #03:2  : will store the new point in the current job under the name specified in the Starting At field and perform the same action for any remaining duplicate points, storing them with the next available point name.

Start At: is the point name assigned to the imported point when using the #03:2-07 or #03:2-07  functions.
425,70 .447/ 3,908 : will open a dialog box showing the coordinates for the duplicate points to assist in making a decision of how to handle the new point. $945 25479 3 : will not import the current duplicate point and will stop importing any remaining points. All previous points will still be imported into the current job.

R-14

File Menu

Export Coordinates
 0  5479 447/ 3,908

The Export Coordinates screen allows you to export selected points from the current job to a new job or to a coordinate file in another format.
%,5 !4 398 : allows you to select the points to export by tapping them from a map view. %4742 : allows you to specify a range of points to export.

: The power button provides additional point selection options, which include selecting all control points, all non-control points and selection by description. Job (.JOB) File: when selected, the points are exported to a TDS JOB file. Old Job (.JOB) File: when selected, the points are exported to a TDS JOB file that is compatible with versions of Survey Pro for Windows CE earlier than 3.0. Coordinate (.CR5) File: when selected, the points are exported to a TDS CR5 coordinate file format. Text (.TXT) File: when selected, the points are exported to an ASCII text file. : opens the next screen, which is determined by the selected file type.
0 9 

R-15

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Export *.JOB Coordinates

When exporting to another *.JOB file, the Save As screen is opened where the file name and location is entered for the new *.JOB file.

Export *.CR5 Coordinates

The Export CR5 dialog box will open when exporting coordinates to a TDS CR5 coordinate file. CR5 File Options: specifies if the resulting file should be Sequential or Non-Sequential.
,.

: returns to the previous screen.

 5479 : exports the selected coordinates to the new CR5 file.

Export *.TXT Coordinates

Since the coordinates in an ASCII *.TXT file can be stored in a variety of formats, two screens are used to define the format of the resulting file. Delimiters: is the character that separates each column of text in the ASCII file. Coordinates: is used to select if the resulting coordinates should be plane coordinates, geodetic coordinates in degrees-minutes-seconds format, or geodetic coordinates in decimal format.

R-16

File Menu Units: are the distance units that will be written to the resulting TXT file. These units are automatically set to the same units that are set for the current job. Headers in the first row: When checked, a heading describing each column is inserted in the first row. For example, the following header could be inserted: Name,Northing,Easting,Elevation,Description
,. 0 9 

: returns to the previous screen. : opens the second screen.

Export *.TXT Coordinates Screen Two

Select the desired order and format for the resulting TXT file from the list of options.
38

: exports the selected points to the TXT

file.

R-17

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Backup / Restore Job

 0 ,. :5  #089470

The Backup / Restore wizard is a series of screens that are used to backup or restore all the files associated with the current job. The routine also gives you the option of storing a snapshot of a customized map view to the archive. This can then be used to visually identify an archive. Any number of backups can be created for a particular job. All the existing backups for the current job are listed in the main Backup / Restore screen, along with other information including the date the backup was created, the number of files stored in the archive and if the archive includes a snapshot. Archives that include a snapshot are shown with a icon, while those without a snapshot have a icon. All of the backups for a particular job are physically stored to a single compressed file located in the \Jobs directory on the data collector. This file will have the same filename as the current job, only the *.Backup extension is appended to the name. For example, the backups for a job with a filename of Smith.Job will be stored in a file called Smith.Job.Backup.
0 7. ;0 : opens the New Archive dialog box where a name is entered for the new backup archive being created. Once created, an empty archive will be listed in the main Backup / Restore screen, which can then be selected to backup the current job. 0 090 7. ;0 : opens a prompt asking if you are sure. If you select Yes at the prompt, the archive selected from the main Backup / Restore screen will be deleted. !745079 08

: opens the Archive Properties screen.

R-18

File Menu Backup: when selected, tapping 0 9 will begin the backup routine where the data for the current job will be stored to the selected archive. Restore: when selected, tapping 0 9 will begin the restore routine where the data from the selected archive will be restored, overwriting the current job.
0 9

: accesses the next screen.

Backup / Restore - Archive Properties

 0 ,. :5  #089470 !745079 08 

The Archive Properties screen lists the files stored within the selected archive along with other information. The file sizes listed in this screen are in bytes. Since all backup archives are compressed, the file sizes displayed represent the compressed files, or the amount of space actually being used by the file(s) on the data collector.

'0 $3,58 49 : will display the snapshot from the selected archive if one was included when the archive was originally created.

R-19

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Backup / Restore Backup

When performing a backup, all the files associated with the current job are listed and will be included in the archive. Create Snapshot: When checked, the next screen will prompt you to create a snapshot of the current jobs map view, which will then be included in the archive.
,. ,. :5

: returns to the previous screen. : accesses the next screen.

Backup / Restore - Create a Snapshot

The Create a Snapshot screen is a map view that is used to configure the map as desired and the resulting image will be saved in the archive as a snapshot along with the job files. : will create the archive along with a snapshot of the map as it is configured on the screen.
,3.0 : will create the backup archive without a snapshot.

R-20

File Menu

Backup / Restore Restore

When restoring the job files from an archive, the archived files will replace the existing files of the current job. Warning: If you do not want to lose any new data that was collected after the archive being restored was created, you should first backup the current job to a new archive before restoring an older archive.
,.

: will return to the previous screen.

#089470 : will restore the backed up job from the selected archive. The current job is then deleted and replaced by the backup job.

R-21

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Transfer
 0 %7,38107

The Transfer screen allows you to transfer files between the data collector and another device running TDS software. Connecting to: specifies which device you are communicating with from the following options: HP48: if you are connecting to a Hewlett Packard HP48 calculator. Husky (DOS): if you are connecting to a Husky FS-series data collector. Ranger (Windows CE): if you are connecting to another Ranger data collector. Windows PC: if you are connecting to a personal computer that is running Windows CE Services. Geodimeter 600: if you are connecting to a Geodimeter 600series total station running TDS onboard software.

COM Port: specifies which COM port you are using on the local machine. (COM 1 is the only available serial port on a Ranger.) Baud Rate: specifies the communications speed. The baud rate must match in both units for successful communications. Parity: specifies the parity. The parity must match in both units. When in doubt, select None here. All transfers are controlled from the PC when in this special mode.
3907 $07;07 4/0 : places the data collector in server mode where all file transfers are controlled from a PC running either TDS Survey Link or TDS ForeSight. Tapping ,3.0 will disconnect server mode.

: will open the Open dialog box where the file that you want to send can be selected. Once selected, the file is sent from the data collector to the specified device. A progress bar will be displayed
$03/  0

R-22

File Menu that indicates how much of the file has been transferred. Tapping ,3.0 will stop the file transfer. Note: The Send routine should be initiated shortly after issuing the receive command on the other device. : allows you to receive a file from another device. This should be tapped prior to issuing the Send command on the other device. Tapping ,3.0 will stop the file transfer.
#0.0 ;0  0

Register Modules
 0 #0 8907 4/: 08

The Register Modules screen is used to upgrade the Survey Pro software. Refer to the Users Manual for more information on registering additional modules. If no modules have been registered, Survey Pro will run in Demo Mode. When running in Demo Mode, users are able to test and use every routine available in the software, as if the Survey Pro Max module was purchased. Although, Demo Mode limits all jobs to no more than 25 points. If a job exists on the data collector that contains more than 25 points, it cannot be opened while running in Demo Mode. Registered: Indicates that the corresponding module has been added.
#0 8907 : Opens the Register dialog box, shown, where the registration number for a particular module can be entered.

R-23

Survey Pro Reference Manual

About Survey Pro

 0 -4:9 $:7;0 !74

The About screen displays the version of the Survey Pro CE software and the versions of several of the Survey Pro software files, which can be updated from the TDS Website.
#,3 07 31472,9 43 : (button not shown) is a shortcut to the Microsoft System Properties screen, which is normally accessed from the Windows CE Control Panel. Tap the button in the title bar of this screen to view the online help.

Exit
 0  9

This will close the Survey Pro CE software and return you to the operating system installed on your data collector.

R-24

Job Menu
A: Settings B: Edit Points C: Edit Polylines D: Edit Alignments E: Auto Linework F: View Raw Data File G: View DTM H: Manage Layers I: Job Information

J: Calculator

R-25

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Settings
4$099 3 8

The Settings screen actually consists of several separate screens where each individual screen contains different types of settings. There are two ways to navigate to the various screens. The first method is to tap the button to drop down the list of available screens and then tap on the desired screen from the list to open it. The second method is to tap the buttons to the side of the screen title, which will open the previous or next screen respectively. Repeatedly tapping either of these buttons will cycle through all the available screens.

Instrument Settings
The Instrument Settings are used to define the type of total station or laser range finder that is being used so it can communicate with the data collector. The information on this screen will vary depending on the total station model selected. Brand: is where you specify the manufacturer of the instrument that you are using from a dropdown list. When set to Manual Mode, all data collection input must be manually entered from the keypad. Model: is where you specify the model of the instrument that you are using from a dropdown list.

R-26

Job Menu : accesses the settings that are specific for the selected total station. This screen can also be accessed with the Ctrl [W] hotkey. (See the notice below.)
3897:2039 $099 3 8 $03/ 94 3897:2039 : (applicable only to specific total stations) will send the selected instrument settings to the total station. This is particularly useful with robotic total stations after the total station has been reset.

Serial Port: is the serial port on the data collector used for communications with the total station. Baud Rate: is the speed at which communication occurs with the total station. This must match the baud rate configured within the total station. Parity: is the parity used for communication with the instrument. This must match the parity setting configured within the total station. : will set the Serial Port, Baud Rate and Parity to their default values based on the selected total station.
01,: 98

R-27

Survey Pro Reference Manual

NOTICE:
The settings that are available after tapping the 3897:2039 $099 3 8 button directly control the settings that are built into the selected total station. Since total station manufactures release new models every year, TDS cannot maintain the necessary set up documentation for every existing model and the models that are not yet available. The set up procedure for your particular total station is better handled by the total station manufacturer, or your instruments dealer. If you have specific questions on the set up of your total station you should refer to the documentation that was included with your total station. The numbers listed below are provided for your convenience:

Trimble: Zeiss:

800-538-7800 800-538-7800

Geodimeter: 800-538-7800 Leica: Nikon: Pentax: Topcon: 800-327-4773 516-547-8500 800-729-1419 800-223-1130

R-28

Job Menu

Units Settings
The Units Settings card defines the units that are used within the software, sent from the total station, entered from the keypad and displayed on the screen. You can select the following settings for your project from the following dropdown lists. Units for Distances: defines the units used for length as Meters, Feet, or US Survey Feet. Note: You can enter a distance in any distance field in units other than what is set for the job by appending the distance value with the following characters:

O f or ft O usf or usft O i or in Om O cm O mm O c or ch

Feet US Survey Feet Inches Meters Centimeters Millimeters Chains

Once the cursor leaves that field, the distance will be converted automatically. (A space between the value and the unit abbreviation is optional.)

Warning: When creating a new job, it is important that the Units for Distances field be set to the correct units. This allows you to seamlessly switch between different units in mid-job. Problems can arise if these units are inadvertently set to the incorrect units when entering new data. For example, assume you created a control file by hand-entering a list of coordinates in a new job where the job was set to Feet and the coordinates being entered were in US Survey Feet. Now assume you created another new job and correctly set it to US Survey Feet. If you then selected the previous job as a control file for the new job, the display of all of the coordinates in the control file would be converted from Feet to US Survey Feet. R-29

Survey Pro Reference Manual Units for Angles: defines the units used for angles as Degrees or Grads (gons). Display Directions as: will display directions as a Bearing or Azimuth. Azimuth type: defines if you are using a North Azimuth or a South Azimuth.

Format Settings
The Format Settings card defines the number of places beyond the decimal point that are displayed for various values in all screens, and how stations are defined. (All internal calculations are performed using full precision.) Northings / Eastings: will allow you to display from zero to six places passed the decimal point for northing and easting values. Elevations: allows you to display from zero to six places passed the decimal point for elevations. Sq feet / meters: allows you to display from zero to four places passed the decimal point for square feet or square meter values. Acres / Hectares: allows you to display from zero to four places passed the decimal point for acre or hectare values. Distances: allows you to display from zero to six places passed the decimal point for distances. Angles: allows you to include from zero to four fractional seconds with angle values. Stations: allows you to display stations in any of the following formats: R-30 12+34.123: displays stations where the number to the left of the + advances after traveling 100 feet or meters. 1+234.123: displays stations where the number to the left of the + advances after traveling 1,000 feet or meters. 1,234.123: displays standard distances rather than stations.

Job Menu

Files Settings
Control File: allows you to select a control file to use with the current job. Control files are explained in more detail in the Users Manual. Note: A control file will not load if any point name in the control file matches a point name in the current job.

Note: When a control file is open, a note is written to the raw data file to indicate this.

Note: See the warning under Units Settings, above, pertaining to distance units when using a control file. Description File: allows you to select a description file to use with the current job. This file uses codes: check this box if the description file contains codes and associated descriptions. Leave the box unchecked if the description only contains descriptions (no codes). Feature Code File: displays the selected feature code file to use with the current job. See the Users Manual for more information on feature codes. : Allows you to select a file to use with the current job. Simply tap on the filename and then tap 503 .
74 80  0,7 : closes the currently selected file so that it is no longer used with the current job.

R-31

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Surveying Settings
The Surveying Settings card allows you to select various options that affect how data collection is performed. Prompt for Description: When checked, a prompt for a description will appear before any new point is stored from only the routines under the Survey menu (Page R-71). Note: Descriptions can be no longer than 16 characters. Prompt for Height of Rod: When checked, a prompt for the rod height will appear before any new point is stored. Survey with True Azimuths: automates the process of adjusting the circle on the total station when traversing so that you can survey with azimuths rather than horizontal angles (see Page R-77). Adjust for Earth Curvature / Refraction: when checked, the elevations for new points are adjusted to compensate for the curvature of the earth and refraction. Prompt for Layer: When checked, a prompt to select a layer will appear before any new point is stored from only the routines under the Survey menu (Page R-71). Prompt for Attributes: When checked, a prompt to select feature information will appear before any new point is stored from only the routines under the Survey menu (Page R-71). This also requires that a feature file be selected from the Files Settings card, described above. Use Scale Factor: when checked, horizontal distances to all new points will be scaled by the factor entered here. (Elevations are not affected.) This defaults to unchecked when a new job is created.
, . $., 0 : allows you to automatically compute the scale factor from a selected map projection. If a mapping plane is not already selected, you will first be prompted to select one. R-32

Job Menu Prompt to Reset Scale on New Setups: if checked when a map projection is selected and you set up over a new location, the specified scale factor is compared to the scale factor defined for your current location in the mapping plane. If the scale factor is different, you will be prompted to use the new scale factor.

Stakeout Settings
The Stakeout Settings card contains the setting that control how stakeout is performed. Stake Corners, Not Just Even Intervals: when staking by stations, locations where a line segment changes, such as from a straight section to a curve, will also be staked when this is checked. Always Start Stakeout With Coarse Mode: When checked, the Coarse EDM (fast shot) checkbox found in all stakeout screens will initially be checked. This instructs the total station to measure distances faster, but with slightly less accuracy. Use Manual Updating (Remote Control): When this is checked, a $ 49 button in the stakeout screens must be pressed to take a shot. When this not checked, shots are continuously taken in the stakeout screens. (This is only valid when running in remote mode, using a robotic total station.) Design Elevation from Offset Segment: When checked during offset or road stakeout, cut and fill information will be computed from the design elevation at the node furthest from the centerline of the current segment. When unchecked, cut and fill information will be computed from the design elevation of the segment at the current rod location. Note: If staking extends beyond the end of the cross section, the cut / fill information will always be computed from the design elevation at the node furthest from the centerline of the current segment.

R-33

Survey Pro Reference Manual Write Cut Sheet Data Only (No Store Point): When checked, asbuilt points are not stored to the JOB file when staking points; only the raw data is written to the RAW file. Display Left / Right From Rod (non-remote): When checked, the move left or right information will be presented from the rod persons point of view. When unchecked it will be presented from the total stations point of view. (This option only applies when a robotic total station is selected in the Instrument Settings.) Display Left / Right From Rod (remote): When checked, the move left or right information will be presented from the rod persons point of view. When unchecked it will be presented from the total stations point of view. (This option only applies when a non-robot total station is selected in the Instrument Settings.) Prompt for Layer: When checked, a prompt to select a layer will appear before any new point is stored from only the routines under the Stakeout menu. Prompt for Attributes: When checked, a prompt to select feature information will appear before any new point is stored from only the routines under the Stakeout menu. This also requires that a feature file be selected from the Files Settings card, described earlier. Note: There is no Prompt for Description checkbox as in the Surveying Settings card because you are always prompted for a description when storing a point from a stakeout routine. Horizontal Distance Tolerance: this setting affects the Remote Staking and Stake to Line routines (Page R-113). When staking to a line and the prism is located at a perpendicular distance to the specified line that is within the range set here, a message will state that you are on the line. When performing Remote Stakeout, the final graphic screen that is displayed when you are near the stake point will occur when you are within the distance to the stake point specified here. Turn gun to design point: only applies to motorized total stations. The following options are available:

R-34

Job Menu 2D (HA only): A motorized total station will turn horizontally toward the design point after tapping the %:73 :3 button in the particular stakeout screen. 3D (HA and ZA): A motorized total station will turn horizontally and vertically toward the design point after tapping the %:73 :3 button in the particular stakeout screen. Automatic 2D (HA only): A motorized total station will automatically turn horizontally toward the design point when the stakeout screen opens. Automatic 3D (HA and ZA): A motorized total station will automatically turn horizontally and vertically toward the design point when the stakeout screen opens.

Cut Sheet Offset stored: The cut sheet offset information can be stored to the raw data file in either of the following formats when performing any offset staking routine: Design Offset: when selected, a cut sheet report will list the design-offset values. Actual Offset: when selected, a cut sheet report will list the measured-offset values.

Repetition Settings
The Repetition Settings card contains the settings that control how repetition shots are performed and acceptable tolerances. Horizontal Tolerance: a warning message will be displayed if a horizontal angle exceeds the tolerance entered here during a repetition shot. Zenith Tolerance: a warning message will be displayed if a vertical angle exceeds the tolerance entered here during a repetition shot. Distance Tolerance: a warning message will be displayed if a distance exceeds the tolerance entered here during a repetition shot. R-35

Survey Pro Reference Manual Shoot Distance To Backsight: When checked, a distance will be measured to each shot to the backsight. When unchecked, only the angles are measured. Do Not Shoot Reverse Distances: When checked, distances are not measured during reverse shots. Enable Automatic Repetition: When checked, all remaining shots after the first shot to the backsight and foresight will occur automatically when using a motorized instrument. Shooting Sequence: specifies the order that the shots are taken from the following options: BS > FS ^ FS > BS: Backsight, Foresight, flop Foresight Backsight BS > FS ^> BS > FS: Backsight, Foresight, flop Backsight, Foresight BS ^ BS > FS ^ FS: Backsight, flop Backsight, Foresight, flop Foresight FS ^ FS > BS ^ BS: Foresight, flop Foresight, Backsight, flop Backsight FS > BS ^ BS > FS: Foresight, Backsight, flop Backsight, Foresight FS > BS ^> FS > BS: Foresight, Backsight, flop Foresight, Backsight BS ^ BS ^ > FS ^ FS ^: Backsight, flop, Backsight, flop, Foresight, flop, Foresight, flop

Date/Time Settings
The Date/Time Settings card is used to set the date and time in the data collector. Date: displays the current date. Time: displays the current time. Format: Select Local to display your local time, or UTC to display Coordinated Universal Time. R-36

Job Menu Note: The date, time and UTC are computed using Windows CEs Date/Time properties.
$09 ,90 $09 % 20

: will set the system date with the date that is entered. : will set the system time with the time entered.

DUT Correction: is the polar wandering correction factor, in seconds, used to convert UTC to UT1. (UT1=UTC+DUT) : when pressed, will zero the fractional portion of the current time and advance to the nearest second so that the time can be set more accurately.
$ 3. 743 0

General Settings
The General Settings card contains the following miscellaneous settings: Use Enter Key to Move Between Fields: When checked, the [Enter] key will move the cursor to the next field in all screens. When unchecked, the [Enter] key will perform a different function depending on the field selected. Note: The arrow keys and the [Tab] key can also be used to move the cursor between fields. Allow Alphanumeric Point Names: When checked, you can assign either numeric or alphanumeric names to new points. When unchecked, all point names must be numeric. Always Prompt for Backsight Check: When checked, if you exit the Backsight Setup (Page R-72) screen without performing the Check Backsight routine (Page R-73), a prompt will first ask if you are sure. R-37

Survey Pro Reference Manual Beep When Storing Points: When checked, an audible beep occurs when a point is stored. Beep On Control Activation: when checked, a sound occurs when an active area of the screen is tapped, such as a button or checkbox. Prompt for Description: When checked, a prompt for a description will appear before any new point is stored from any routine other than those included in the Survey and Stakeout menus. Note: Descriptions can be no longer than 16 characters. Prompt for Layer: When checked, a prompt to select a layer will appear before any new point is stored from any routine other than those included in the Survey and Stakeout menus. Prompt for Attributes: When checked, a prompt to select feature information will appear before any new point is stored from any routine other than those included in the Survey and Stakeout menus. This also requires that a feature file be selected from the Files Settings card, described earlier. Prompt to Backup When Closing Job: When checked, a reminder will open to backup the current job prior to closing it. Write Point Attributes to Raw Data: When checked, point feature and attribute information will be written to the raw data file. Auto time stamp every ___ min: When checked, will store a note record to the raw data file containing the current date and time each time the specified number of minutes passes. This is useful for tracking down when specific raw data records were written to the file. Remind to backup job every ___ hrs: When checked, will open a reminder to backup the current job after every specified number of hours passes.

R-38

Job Menu

Edit Points
4/ 9 !4 398

The Edit Points screen allows you to add, edit, and delete any points in the current job.
/ 9 : if only a single point is selected, this will open the point in the Edit Point - General screen (Page R-40) where the details of the point can be modified. If more than one point is selected, the next Edit Points screen will open where the description and layer for the selected points can be modified simultaneously.

Note: as with most Windows applications, a series of points can be selected by holding down the shift key while selecting the first and last point within a range of points. Multiple random points can be selected/unselected by holding down the control key while tapping them.

Note: Double tapping on a point will also open the point in the editor.

Note: The current occupy and backsight points cannot be edited.

38079 : opens a dialog box where a new point can be added to the current job. 0 090  3/

: will delete the selected point. : will search for a point by its description.

: will find the next point that contains the description entered when using the  3/ button (above).
 3/ 0 9 4 %4 : opens a dialog box where any point can be quickly located by the entered point name.

R-39

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Edit Points (multiple point editing)

4/ 9 !4 398 / 9 

This screen is accessed after pressing / 9 when more than one point is selected. The change made in this screen will be applied to all the selected points. Change Descriptions: When checked, allows you to change all the selected points descriptions to the Description entered in the next field. Description: is the new description that will replace the existing descriptions for the selected points. Change Layers: When checked, allows you to move the selected points to the layer selected in the next field. Layer: is the layer where the selected points will be moved.

Edit Point General

4/ 9 !4 398 / 9 0307, 

The General card of the Edit Point screen is used to modify the description, layer and feature information for the selected point. Point Name: displays the selected points name. Description: is the description for the selected point. Layer: is the layer for the selected point. Feature: displays the feature assigned to the selected point, which can be modified using the 997 -:908 button.
997 -:908 : accesses the Point Feature Attributes screen (Page R-43) where the feature attributes for the point can be modified.

R-40

Job Menu

Edit Point Location

4/ 9 !4 398 / 9 4.,9 43

The Location card is used to modify the northing, easting and elevation of the selected point.

Edit Point Geodetic

4/ 9 !4 398 / 9 04/09 .

The Geodetic card applies primarily to Survey Pro with GPS users. Refer to the GPS Reference Manual for more information on this card. Has Geodetic Data: when checked, this allows you to edit the geodetic coordinates for a point.
/;,3.0/ : will open the Edit GPS Point Flags screen to select the advanced settings for the selected point.

R-41

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Edit GPS Point Flags Screen

$:7;0 43974 !4 398 / 9 !4 39 $09  , 8

The Edit GPS Point Flags screen is used to select the advanced settings for the selected point. Set Up Group: is the set up group of the point. (See the Users Manual for more information on set up groups.) GPS Control Point: When checked, will include the selected point in the list of localization control points. Use for Horizontal Localization: When checked, will use the point for horizontal control in the localization solution. Use for Vertical Localization: When checked, will use the point for vertical control in the localization solution. Use as localization calculator grid origin: When checked, identifies the selected point as the local grid origin for computing rotation in localization calculator solutions. (See the GPS Users Manual for more information on localization calculator.).
..059

: accepts the screen selections and returns to the previous

screen.

R-42

Job Menu

Point Feature Attributes

4/ 9 !4 398 / 9 0307, 997 -:908 

The Point Feature Attributes screen is available from the above path or whenever a point is stored when Prompt for Attributes is checked in the Surveying Settings screen (Page R-32). Recently Used: when checked will arrange the order of the available features so the most recently used features are listed first. Any feature in the current feature file can be selected from the corresponding drop-down list. The content displayed in the main portion of the window fully depends on the attribute information associated with the selected feature. Note: Feature files are created using the Survey Attribute Manager included with TDS Survey Link, Version 7.2 or later.

R-43

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Edit Polylines
4/ 9 !4 308

The Edit Polylines screen is used to add, edit, and delete polylines in the current job. The first screen will display a list of all the polylines that are stored in the current job. Selecting any of the polylines listed will display a horizontal (overhead) and vertical (side) view of that polyline.
/ 9 : will open the selected polyline in the New Polyline screen, described below. 0 090

: will delete the selected polyline.

0 : will open the Polyline Editor where a new polyline can be created.

Screen Two New Polyline

The second screen is used to define all of the points that are used in the polyline. Any curve information will be entered later, but the end points must still be selected at this point. The current polyline is shown on color displays with bold red lines and all other polylines are shown using thin black lines. Only the current polyline data can be edited. : opens a map view where the points in your polyline can be tapped. They must be tapped in the order that they occur in the polyline.
%,5 !4 398 %4742

: Allows you to define a range of points to define a

polyline. R-44

Job Menu
/ 9 : Accesses the third screen, described next, where the current polyline can be modified.  0,7

: removes the current polyline.

Screen Three Polyline Editor

Once the initial points are selected for the current polyline, the third screen allows you to modify the polyline and define any curve and grade information for the polyline sections. Selecting any point in the left column of the screen will select that point and the line segment that follows it up to the next point. The selected section is then highlighted in the map portion of the screen. Any edits will occur on the selected section.
#024;0 : will remove the selected point and the line segment that follows it. The previous line segment will be automatically joined to the following point. The change will only be saved if you then tap . Tapping ,3.0 will return to the previous screen without saving the changes.

: will completely remove the current polyline. The change will only be saved if you then tap . Tapping ,3.0 will return to the previous screen without saving the changes.
 0,7  :7;08 : Accesses the fourth screen, described below, where a horizontal, vertical, or spiral curve can be added to the selected polyline segment.

Horizontal / Vertical: toggles between showing the map in a Horizontal (overhead) view or a Vertical (side) view. : allows you to insert a point, or a group of points in front of the selected point. The change will only be saved if you then tap . Tapping ,3.0 will return to the previous screen without saving the changes.

38079

R-45

Survey Pro Reference Manual Note, if <End> is selected in the list, the
38079 button will change to an
5503/ button to indicate that additional points will be appended to the end of the list.

Screen Four Add/Edit Curve

The fourth screen is used to modify a selected polyline segment that occurs between two points. A horizontal, vertical, and/or spiral curve can be applied to the polyline segment.

Adding a Horizontal Curve

Tap the
7.  $5 7,

tab.

Curve: must be set to Arc to enter a horizontal curve.

#,/ :8 | 0 9, | 0 700 7. | 0 700 specify the radius of the curve using a variety of methods.

 47/

: allows you to

Turn: specifies if the curve turns toward the Right or Left as you occupy the initial point and face the end point. Arc: specifies if the arc of the curve is Small (less than 180) or Large (greater than 180).

R-46

Job Menu

Adding a Spiral
Tap the
7.  $5 7,

tab.

Curve: must be set to Spiral to enter a spiral curve. Radius: is the radius of the spiral curve. (The same radius of the circular curve adjacent to the spiral.) Length: is the length of the spiral, measured along the curve from the TS to the SC. Turn: specifies if the spiral curve turns to the Right or Left as you occupy the initial point and face the end point. Direction: specifies if the curve runs from where the tangent intersects with the spiral toward where the spiral intersects with the curve (TS->SC) or if the curve runs from where the curve intersects with the spiral toward where the spiral intersects with the tangent (CS->ST).

Adding a Vertical Curve

Tap the
!,7,-4 . :7;0

tab.

Apply Curve: must be checked to enter a vertical at curve. Grade at EVC / BVC is the known grade at either the end of vertical curve or beginning of vertical curve. The grade entered here is determined by the selection made in the AutoCompute field. Auto-Compute: will automatically compute the grade at the selected point and display it at the bottom of the screen. The grade at the point that is not checked here must be specified in the field defined above.

R-47

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Edit Alignments
The Edit Alignments screen is used to create and edit alignments, which can then be used with routines such as Offset Staking, Offset Points, Offset Lines and Road Layout. Alignments are used to describe all of the horizontal and vertical details of a roads centerline. An alignment does not use existing points to define any particular locations on the alignment, although a point can be used to anchor the starting location, which is the same location for both the horizontal and vertical parts of the alignment. Any location on an alignment where a change occurs is called a node. An alignment can contain straight sections, grades, horizontal, vertical, and spiral curves. The horizontal and vertical portions of an alignment are defined separately and independently, but they are both combined within the software to create a single alignment with horizontal and vertical characteristics.

Add / Edit Alignments

4/ 9  320398

or

#4,/8

/ 9 

320398

The Add / Edit Alignments screen displays a list of all the existing alignments in the current job. The right portion of the screen shows a graphic of the horizontal and vertical portion of the selected alignment.
0 : opens the Edit Alignment screen where a new alignment can be created from scratch. / 9 : opens the Edit Alignment screen where the details of the selected alignment can be edited. 0 090

: is used to delete the selected alignment.

: The power button accesses the following routines: Create Points: opens the Create Points screen (Page R-238) where points can be stored that coincide with the selected alignment.

R-48

Job Menu Import .RD5 File: opens the Open screen and lists all the *.RD5 alignment files in the Jobs directory. Select the desired file and tap . Export .RD5 File: opens the Save As screen where the current alignment can be saved to a *.RD5 file.

Edit Alignment
44/ 9  / 9  320398 320398 / 9 0  

or

The Edit Alignment screen is used to edit an existing alignment or create a new one.

Edit Alignment Screen HAL Tab

The HAL (Horizontal ALignment) tab in the Edit Alignment screen is used to enter or modify only the horizontal details of an alignment.
38079 : opens the Edit Segment screen where a new horizontal alignment segment can be inserted prior to the selected segment. / 9 : opens the Edit Segment screen where the selected horizontal segment can be modified. #024;0 : removes the selected segment and automatically joins the next segment with the previous segment.

Note: The station and azimuth at the beginning of the selected horizontal segment are displayed at the bottom of the screen.

R-49

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Edit Alignment Screen VAL Tab

The VAL (Vertical ALignment) tab in the Edit Alignment screen is used to enter or modify only the vertical details of an alignment. Note: The total horizontal length of the VAL must be equal to or greater than the total horizontal length of the HAL when the alignment is used for road layout. : opens the Edit Segment screen where a new vertical segment can be inserted prior to the selected segment.
38079

: opens the Edit Segment screen where the selected vertical segment can be modified.
/ 9 #024;0 : removes the selected segment and automatically joins the next segment with the previous segment.

Note: The station and elevation at the beginning of the selected vertical segment are displayed at the bottom of the screen.

Edit Alignment Screen POB Tab

The POB (Point Of Beginning) tab in the Edit Alignment screen is used to define the starting location of the alignment. The first horizontal and vertical segment will always begin at this location.
4.,9 43 : the starting location for the horizontal and vertical alignments will be at the specified North, East and Elev coordinates. !4 39 : the starting location for the horizontal and vertical alignments will be at the specified Point.

 

R-50

Job Menu Start Station: is the station on the alignment that corresponds with the starting location or point.

Edit Alignment Screen General Tab

The General tab in the Edit Alignment screen is used to describe the alignment and select the layer where it is located. Description: is the description of the alignment. Layer: is the layer where the alignment will be located.
997 -:908 : accesses the Point Feature Attributes screen (Page R-43) where the feature attributes for the alignment can be selected.

Edit Segment
The Edit Segment screen is accessed anytime an existing horizontal or vertical segment is added or edited. A variety of segment editing screens are possible depending on the type of segment being edited or created. Each segment editor is discussed below.

Edit Segment Line Card

The Line card is used to add a straight horizontal line segment in the alignment. Length: is the horizontal length of the line. Make this segment tangent to previous: When checked, the specified line will be tangent to the ending tangent of the previous segment.

R-51

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Note: When making a new horizontal segment tangent to the previous segment, the new segment will appear in the Edit Alignment screen tagged with a (P). This means that if the previous horizontal segment is edited or deleted, where the orientation changes, all subsequent horizontal segments that have the (P) tag will also be adjusted so they will remain tangent to the previous segments. This does not hold true for vertical alignment segments. Vertical segments will always begin with the specified starting grade unless they are manually modified.

of the line.

 2:9

0,7 3

: is used to enter a known azimuth or bearing

: adds the line to the current horizontal alignment.

Edit Segment Arc (Horizontal Curve) Card

The Arc card is used to add a horizontal curve to the alignment. The curve can be defined by two of the following:
#,/ :8 : The distance from the radius point to the curve 0 9, : The internal angle from center to tangent points. 0 700 7. : The internal angle equivalent to a 100-ft arc length. 0 700  47/ : The internal angle equivalent to a 100-ft chord length. 03 9  47/

: The arc length. : The chord length. : The distance from the PC or PT to the PI.

%,3 039

R-52

Job Menu
/ 7/ : The distance between the curve and the chord at the center of the curves length.  9073,

: The minimum distance between the PI and the Left or Right as you face

curve. Turn: specifies if the curve turns to the the curve from the beginning.

Make this segment tangent to previous: When checked, the start of the specified curve will be tangent to the ending tangent of the previous segment.
 2:9 / 0,7 3 : is used to enter a known azimuth or bearing at the start of the curve.

: adds the curve to the current horizontal alignment.

Edit Segment Spiral Card

The Spiral card is used to add a spiral curve to the alignment. Radius: is the radius of the spiral. (This equals the radius of the horizontal curve tangent to the spiral.) Length: is the length of the spiral. Turn: specifies if the curve turns to the Left or Right as you face the curve from the beginning. Dir: specifies if the curve runs from TS to SC (Tangent to Spiral, to Spiral to Curve) or CS to ST (Curve to Spiral, to Spiral to Tangent).

R-53

Survey Pro Reference Manual Make this segment tangent to previous: When checked, will automatically turn the spiral so the beginning is tangent to the end of the previous segment.
 2:9 / 0,7 3 : is used to specify a known azimuth or bearing of the start of the spiral.

Edit Segment Vertical Line Card (Grade)

The Vertical Line card is used to enter a segment with any grade. Length: is the horizontal length of the segment. Grade: is the grade (slope) of the segment.
09 !70; 4:8 7,/0 : will automatically enter a grade equal to the grade at the end of the previous segment.

Edit Segment Vertical Curve

The Vertical Curve card is used to enter a parabolic vertical curve to the alignment. Length: is the horizontal length of the vertical curve. Start Grade: is the starting grade of the vertical curve. End Grade: is the ending grade of the vertical curve.
09 !70; 4:8 7,/0 : will automatically enter a Start Grade equal to the grade at the end of the previous segment.

R-54

Job Menu

Auto Linework
4:94 30 47

or

Ctrl

-[L]

The Auto Linework screen is used to set up custom descriptors that can be used to generate various polylines between points as they are shot. These features can than be exported and used in the TDS ForeSight software. Note: The auto linework information described below is not written to the raw data file. If using a conversion routine that only uses a raw data file, all linework commands must be manually entered into the raw data file in the form of a note by using the Ctrl-[B] hotkey. Description: lists the descriptions defined from using the // button, which when used during data collection, will generate the specified polyline segment (linework). The following two wildcards can be appended to a description where each one performs a special function. Asterisk (*): when a description entry ends with an asterisk, any description entered during data collection that begins with the same characters before the asterisk will be joined to the previous linework entry. For example, if CURB* were used as in the screen shown here, and a description for a point was called CURB5 or CURBSIDE, the line segment associated with CURB* would be appended to the previous line segment. Pound sign (#): when a description entry ends with a pound sign, any description entered during data collection that begins with the same characters before the pound sign will generate the associated line segment type, but if the next description is at all different from the previous use, a new independent line segment will be drawn. For example, if R-55

Survey Pro Reference Manual LOT# were used as in the screen shown above, all entries of LOT10 would be connected. If LOT15 were also used as a description during data collection, any future use of LOT15 would connect to the previous LOT15 entry. Note: Linework descriptions are case sensitive. Cmd: lists the current type of line segment (linework) that will be created after shooting the required points and storing them with the associated Description. The following linework command options are selected by repeatedly tapping the appropriate button: : creates a straight line between the next two points stored with a description associated with Line.
30

  

: creates a curve through the next 3 points stored with a description associated with P-Crv.
!
7; #
7; : creates a curve between the next two points that are stored with a description associated with R-Crv. After the second R-Crv point is shot, the prompt shown will open and is used to define the details of the curve.

%
7; : creates a curve with a specified incoming tangent from the next two points that are stored with a description associated with T-Crv. When the second point is stored, the prompt shown here appears where the incoming azimuth or bearing is specified.

R-56

Job Menu
#0.9 : will compute and store the fourth and final point that forms a rectangle or parallelogram after three points are stored with a description associated with Rect.

Note: At any time, the line type for any linework command can be changed while collecting linework for a particular feature. For example, a feature called FENCE might primarily use the Line linework command, but might also contain a curved section. To add a curve to the fence, you would use the Ctrl-L hotkey to open the Auto Linework screen and toggle Line to R-Crv prior to storing the first point of the curve. Once the second point of the curve is stored, the curve is defined and appended to the FENCE polyline. This routine is enhanced with the Props command, described below. On: When checked, activates the associated linework command. If a particular polyline is created and then this is unchecked for that linework command, future points stored with the same description would not result in any change to that polyline. But if this is then activated again later, all future points collected using the same linework command will be appended to the original polyline. End: toggles between the following two functions, giving you control in collecting data for two or more separate features that use the same linework command: When the map icon is displayed for this button, a polyline has been created for the associated linework command. Tapping the button will then allow you to detach future points using this linework command from the current polyline, resulting in future points being added to a new polyline. If the button is blank and the current job contains at least one polyline, you will be prompted to select an existing polyline. Once selected, future points stored with this linework command will be appended to the selected polyline. Props: A single polyline can contain different line types. The Props command will open the Auto Linework Properties dialog box, shown here, where when the checkbox is checked, the linework command will always switch back to R-57

Survey Pro Reference Manual the specified default linework command after changing and storing a different line type for a particular feature.
//

: allows you to create a new linework command. : removes the selected linework command. : removes all the existing linework commands.

#024;0 #024;0 

Note: All linework shots require at least two points with a particular linework command before a polyline segment is created. If only the initial point has been stored, no polyline segment is yet created.

View Raw Data File

4'0 #, ,9,

The View Raw Data File screen displays the raw data file of the current job and allows you to append a note or current time entry. Tapping any line in the raw data file will toggle a bookmark in front of that line. The active bookmark is shown as a green (or light-gray) circle. An inactive bookmark is shown in red (or dark gray). See illustration.
 789 ,89

: jumps to the first line of the file. : jumps to the last line of the file.

: jumps to bookmark above the active bookmark.

!70; 0 9

: jumps to the bookmark below the active bookmark. : clears all bookmarks.

 0,7  % 20

: appends the current date and time in the form of a note to the end of the raw data file. : opens the Raw Data Note screen where any note, up to 127 characters, can be appended to the raw data file. R-58
490

Job Menu

Raw Data Note

Enter any note to append to the raw data file. You can use the buttons to insert common line work commands. When finished, tap 7 90 4  to append the note to the end of the raw data file.

View DTM
4'0 %

Before viewing a DTM, the Setup DTM 3D screen will open where the DTM layers must be defined. This screen is also used to define other parameters for the DTM.
, 078 : opens the Layers for Staking DTM screen where the DTM layers are selected. 4:3/,7 : opens the Choose Polyline screen where a polyline can be selected that defines the boundary of the DTM.

Exclude points: will move any points that exist outside the selected boundary to the Auxiliary layer. If a point is later stored outside the boundary, they will also be moved to the Auxiliary layer. Discard the boundary: will initially move any points that exist outside the boundary to the Auxiliary layer. If a point is later stored outside the boundary, the selected boundary is automatically unselected.

R-59

Survey Pro Reference Manual

 0,7 : will unselect the selected boundary and move it to the Auxiliary layer. 70, 308 : will open the Add/Edit Break-lines screen where DTM break-lines can be added or edited. !4 398 : will open the Points on DTM Layer screen where the points on the DTM layer can be viewed, new points can be imported, and existing points can be deleted (moved to the Auxiliary layer).  ' 0 : will open the 3D View screen where the DTM can be viewed from any angle.

Layers for Staking DTM

4'0 % , 078 

The Layers for Staking DTM screen is used to select the DTM layer and an optional layer where non-DTM points will be stored. Layer (DTM): is the layer that contains the points that you want to use for the DTM. Select Auxiliary Layer: if this is checked and a point is stored that is located outside the selected DTM boundary, the point is automatically stored on the Auxiliary layer. If left unchecked, a prompt will appear when storing a point outside the boundary where you must specify the layer to store the new point. Layer (Auxiliary): is the layer that all points will be stored to if they cannot be stored to the DTM layer.

R-60

Job Menu

Choose Polyline
4'0 % 4:3/,7 

The Choose Polyline screen is used to select an existing polyline. All the polylines in the current job are displayed. Select the appropriate polyline and tap .

Add/Edit Break-lines
4'0 % 70,
308 

The Add/Edit Break-lines screen is used to select, edit, create, or delete the break-lines that will be used when computing the DTM. The break-lines that will be used when computing the DTM are listed in this screen.
/ 9 : opens the Edit Polyline screen where the selected polyline can be modified or a new polyline can be created. 0 090 : will move the selected polyline to the Auxiliary layer. //  89 3 : will display all the polylines in the current job. Selecting a polyline and tapping will move the selected polyline to the DTM layer.

Note: If a boundary is defined, only polylines that fall within the boundary can be added. R-61

Survey Pro Reference Manual

0 : opens the New Polyline screen, which is identical to the Edit Polyline screen and is used to create a new polyline.

Edit Polyline
44'0 '0 % % 70,
308 70,
308 / 9 0 

or

The Edit Polyline screen is used to perform some preliminary editing to a polyline prior to accessing the polyline editor with the / 9 key.
%,5 !4 398 : allows you to tap points to define a new polyline. If a polyline was already selected prior to accessing this screen, it will be replaced by the polyline being created. %4  742 : allows you to define a range of points that define a polyline. If a polyline was already selected prior to accessing this screen, it will be replaced by the polyline being created. / 9 : accesses the Polyline Editor, described on Page R-45, where the polyline can be further edited.  0,7

: will permanently remove the selected polyline from the job.

!745079 08 : opens the New Line dialog box where the description, layer and feature attributes can be modified.

: opens the Map Display Options screen (Page R-239) to select what is displayed on the screen.

R-62

Job Menu

Points on DTM Layer

4'0 % !4 398 

The Points on DTM Layer screen displays all the points on the DTM layer and allows you to add points from another layer or delete (move) points to a different layer.
0 090 : will move the selected point(s) to the Auxiliary layer. If the Auxiliary layer is not specified, you will be prompted to select the layer to move the points to.

Note: Points on a boundary or break-line cannot be deleted.

4%4

: will quickly find and select the specified

point.
// 742 %4 : opens the Select Point(s) screen where a point range can be entered. The points will then be moved to the DTM layer. 0 742 %4 : opens the Select Point(s) screen where a point range can be entered. The points will then be moved to the Auxiliary layer.

R-63

Survey Pro Reference Manual

3D View
4'0 %  ' 0 

The 3D View screen is used to view the DTM from any angle. : opens the 3D View Settings screen, described below, where the information displayed in the 3D view can be configured.
$099 3

: displays the total cut and fill volume between the area that has been staked and a reference datum, whose elevation is specified in the 3D View Settings screen; or the total cut and fill between the area that has been staked and the selected DTM.
'4 :20

Datum: displays the datum elevation set in the 3D View Settings screen. : Toggles to display or hide the point names and descriptions. : When this button is activated (pressed in), dragging within the 3D View will result in the image being rotated to any angle. When the button is not activated, dragging within the 3D View will move the image to any location.

R-64

Job Menu

3D View Settings
4'0 %  ' 0 $099 3 

The 3D View Settings screen is used to configure the information displayed in the 3D View screen. Height Exaggerated to the Maximum: When checked, the height exaggeration is automatically set to a high value. When unchecked, the height exaggeration can be set manually in the next field. Height Exaggeration Ratio: is the value that the height is multiplied by in the 3D view. The higher this value, the more exaggeration, where 1.0 would result in no exaggeration. Hidden-line Removal: When checked, will hide all the lines that occur behind other surfaces in the 3D View. The image shown here is identical to the image shown on Page R-64 except the hidden lines are not removed. Display the Difference: This applies only to DTM stakeout. When checked, the elevations in the 3D View screen will be distorted so the reference DTM will become a flat surface. This will result in any staked point that occurs above or below the reference DTM to stand out as hills and valleys. Datum: When the Display the Difference checkbox is unchecked, cut and fill volumes will be computed in the 3D View screen based on the difference of a horizontal plane at the elevation specified here and the staked points. View Direction (from view point to the center): allows you to specify the exact horizontal and vertical angle in which to view the DTM.

R-65

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Manage Layers
4,3, 0 , 078

or

Ctrl

- [K]

The Manage Layers screen is used to manage the layers for the current job. All existing layers are displayed along with which layers are visible and how many objects are on each layer.
$09 .9 ;0 : will set the selected layer as the active layer. The active layer is marked with a symbol. 0 : opens the New Layer dialog box where a new layer can be added. You are prompted for a name and if the new layer should be visible. / 9 : opens the Edit Layer dialog box where the selected layer can be edited. The layer name and visibility can be changed. 0 090

: will delete the selected layer.

Note: Only layers that contain no objects can be deleted. Layer 0 is required and cannot be deleted or renamed.

Tip: To move several points from one layer to another, select the desired points in the Edit Points screen (Page R-38) and tap / 9 . Select the layer you want to move them to and tap .

R-66

Job Menu

Job Information
44314

The Job Information screen displays details of the current job and allows you to remove wasted space in the current job file. Filename: displays the current job file name. Control file: displays the control filename used in the current job. Feature Code File: displays the feature code filename used in the current job. Folder: displays the directory where the current job file is located. Size: displays the size of the current job. Created: displays the date that the current job was created. Points: displays the first and last point names and if alphanumeric point names are being used. Lines: displays the number of polylines and alignments that are in the current job. Roads: displays the number of roads in the current job and the filenames associated with them. Attributes Collected: displays the number of point and line attributes used in the current project. Total Storage: displays the total amount of memory that is installed on the data collector. Available Storage: displays the amount of free memory that is available to use for jobs. Wasted Space: displays the amount of empty space that is being used by the current job. This space can be recovered as described below. : As you add and remove points and lines in a job, empty gaps can result within the job file. These gaps use
#0.4;07 ,890/ $5,.0 4

R-67

Survey Pro Reference Manual storage space. This button will remove any gaps in the job file, thus recovering the wasted space. Note: Survey Pro checks for low memory situations every minute. When the available system memory falls below 256K of RAM, a warning is displayed.

Calculator
4Ctrl

, .: ,947

or

- [A] or , Calculator (where applicable)

The Calculator screen behaves exactly like any other RPN-format calculator. It consists of a stack that can contain any number of values and buttons that perform various operations. When a value is being entered from the keypad, it is displayed in a special area called the active area. This value is then place in Level 1 of the stack after tapping the Enter key. Tapping a button on the display performs the corresponding operation on either the last value in the display, or the last two values, depending on the operation. Each button is explained below where the value in Level 1 is x and the value in Level 2 is y. +: Adds x and y. : Multiplies x and y.
$ 5:

Swaps positions of x and y in the stack.

: Subtracts y from x. : Divides y by x.

75:

Drops (removes) x from the stack.

R-68

Job Menu : Moves the active value to Level 1 of the stack, or duplicates Level 1 if there is no active value. : Changes the sign of x.
 7:

Clears the stack.

/ 9:

Moves the value in Level 1 to the active area where it can be edited. : Enters 3.141592654 to the stack.


: Squares x.

: Square root of x.
3

: Raises y to the power of x. : Inverse of x. Sine of x. Cosine of x. Tangent of x.

$ 3: 48:

%,3:  0

: Raises 10 to the power of x.

: Raises 2.718281828 to the power of x.

$3

: Arc sine of x. : Arc cosine of x. : Arc tangent of x.

48

%,3 4 3:

: Common logarithm (base 10) of x. Natural logarithm (base e) of x. Converts the rectangular coordinates (y,x) to polar coordinates. Converts the polar coordinates (y,x) to rectangular coordinates.

#!: !#:

#: Converts x, in decimal degrees to radians.

#: #:

Converts x, in radians to decimal degrees. Converts x, in Grads to radians. Converts x, in degrees.minutes-seconds to decimal degrees.

/28:

/28: Converts x in decimal degrees to degrees.minutes-seconds. R-69

Survey Pro Reference Manual

/28 : Subtracts x in degrees.minutes-seconds from y in degrees.minutes-seconds.

+: Adds x in degrees.minutes-seconds and y in degrees.minutesseconds.

/28 #

: Converts x, in radians to Grads.

R-70

Survey Menu
The Survey Menu contains the routines used for collecting data. A: Backsight Setup B: Traverse / Sideshot C: Repetition Shots D: Multiple Sideshots E: Distance Offset F: Horizontal Angle Offset G: Vertical Angle Offset H: Auto Collect I: Corner & 2 Lines

J: Corner & Angle K: Corner & Offset L: Corner & Plane M: Shoot From Two Ends N: Record Mode O: Resection P: Remote Elevation Q: Solar Observation R: Remote Control

R-71

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Backsight Setup
$:7;0 ,. 8 9 $09:5

The Backsight Setup screen allows you to define your backsight prior to performing data collection or stakeout. The screen is also accessible from any screen that requires a backsight. Note: all the information in the Backsight Setup screen is saved so it will automatically be recalled if the job is reopened at a later time. Although the information is saved, the screen must still be re-solved before you can survey. Occupy Point: is the name of the point from the current job that the total station is occupying. HI: is the height that the total station is above the ground. HR: is the distance that the backsight prism is above the ground.
$ !4 39 / $  70.9 43 : is the point or direction of the backsight where the total station is facing.

Fixed HR at Backsight: is selected when a second prism is set up over the backsight. The rod height entered here is then used independently of the other rod height when checking the backsight by distance and when shooting the backsight during repetition shots. Backsight Circle: displays the backsight circle value, which is set using the ,. 8 9  7. 0 button, described below. Note: The backsight circle angle is subtracted from all horizontal angles that are read during data collection and the resulting points are adjusted accordingly. If you do not want this to happen, you should change the value to zero by using the ,. 8 9  7. 0 button. R-72

Survey Menu Current BS Direction: displays the azimuth of the current backsight.
 0. : accesses the Check Backsight dialog box (Page R-73), which is used to help confirm that the total station is facing the correct backsight.  7. 0 : accesses the Backsight Circle dialog box (Page R-74) where the backsight circle can be changed, or the circle reading on the total station can be set remotely. $4 ;0 : solves the screen based on the information entered and automatically displays the map view showing the location and direction of the current backsight.

Check Backsight Dialog Box

The Check Backsight screen is used to help confirm that the total station is facing the correct backsight by comparing the known distance or circular angle to the backsight with the measured value.
  89,3.0 : will take a shot to a prism located over the backsight point and compare the measured distance with the computed distance between the occupy and backsight points stored in the current job.

Note: The Check by Distance method does not apply if the backsight is defined by a direction.
 3 0 : when the backsight is defined by a direction, this routine will read the current horizontal angle from the total station and compare that to the backsight direction.  7. 0

: accesses the Backsight Circle dialog box, described below.

R-73

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Check by Distance Results

Occupy: is the current occupy point. Backsight: is the current backsight point. Zenith: is the zenith angle measured by the total station. Slope Dist: is the slope distance measured by the total station. HD Error: is the horizontal distance between the backsight point that was shot and the backsight point stored in the job. A negative value indicates that the point shot is closer to the total station than the point in the job. VD Error: is the vertical distance between the backsight point that was shot and the backsight point stored in the job.

Check by Angle Results

Circle: is the horizontal angle that was measured by the total station. Azimuth: is the known azimuth to the current backsight. Error: is the difference between the two above angles.

Backsight Circle Dialog Box

The Backsight Circle dialog box is used to modify the horizontal angle read from a total station so that the resulting angle is an azimuth. Backsight Circle: is the angle that will be subtracted from all horizontal angles read from the total station or entered manually when data collecting in manual mode.
$09 : Sets the value entered in the Backsight Circle field as the backsight circle and returns to the previous screen.

Note: Closing this dialog box without tapping the $09 button will result in no changes made to the original backsight circle.

R-74

Survey Menu
#0,/ 1742 3897:2039 : Reads the current horizontal angle from the total station and puts that value in the Backsight Circle field where it can then be $09 as the backsight circle. This is typically performed when it is known that the total station is facing a direction with a zero azimuth.

Traverse / Sideshot
$:7;0 %7,;0780  $ /08 49

or

Ctrl

-[R]

The Traverse / Sideshot screen is the main screen used for data collection.
$099 3 8 : located at the top of the screen, is a shortcut to the Surveying Settings screen (Page R-32).

Foresight: is the point name that will be used for the next stored point. Description: is the description for the next stored point. HR: is the height of the rod.
$ /0 $ 49 : will trigger the total station to take a shot to the prism. The new point is stored as a side shot in the data collector and the foresight point will automatically advance to the next available point. %7,;0780 : will trigger the total station to take a shot to the prism. The new point is stored as a traverse shot in the data collector and a The Traverse Now or Later dialog box will open, described on Page R77. If you choose to traverse now, the occupy point will automatically change to the previous foresight point and the backsight point will automatically change to the previous occupy point.

R-75

Survey Pro Reference Manual Note: prior to storing a point, you may then be prompted for description, rod height, layer, and/or feature information depending on the selections made in the Surveying Settings screen.
,. 8 9 : accesses the Backsight Setup screen (Page R-72) where the current backsight can be modified.

Note: The current backsight information is displayed across the top of the Traverse / Sideshot screen.

Results
Angle Right: is the horizontal angle right around the Occupy Point from the Backsight to the Foresight Point. Azimuth: is the azimuth from the Occupy Point to the Foresight Point. Zenith: is the zenith angle measured by the total station to the prism. Slope Dist: is the slope distance measured by the total station to the prism. Horz Dist: is the horizontal distance from the Occupy Point to the Foresight Point. Vert Dist: is the vertical distance from the Occupy Point to the Foresight Point. Point: is the name of the stored point. Desc: is the description of the stored point. Location N: is the Y-coordinate of the stored point. Location E: is the X-coordinate of the stored point. Location Z: is the elevation of the stored point.

R-76

Survey Menu

Traverse Now or Later? Dialog Box

After taking a shot with the %7,;0780 button, the Traverse Now or Later? dialog box will open where you can specify if you want to traverse now or later .
%7,;0780 4 : expects you to move your total station to the next occupy point before any additional shots are taken. The occupy, foresight, and backsight points will be updated accordingly. %7,;0780 ,907 : allows you to take additional side shots before moving the total station to the next traverse point. This is useful is you want to take side shots from the current occupy point, but perform the traverse shot as the first shot of the current set up to ensure the highest accuracy.

When you have finished taking side shots, tap the %7,;0780 button again. You can then select %7,;0780 4 and set up on the next occupy point, or select $ 449 0 %7,;0780 to re-shoot the traverse shot.

New Occupy Point Dialog Box

After traversing to a new point, the New Occupy Point dialog box will open that informs you of the points that have been updated and computes the azimuth to the new backsight. New Backsight Circle: displays the horizontal angle that should be displayed on the total station once it is set up over the New Occupy Point and facing the New Backsight Point. This angle is typically zero unless you are surveying in true azimuths, as set in the Surveying Settings screen (Page R-32). Height of Instrument: is the new height that the total station is above the ground.

R-77

Survey Pro Reference Manual

$03/  7. 0 94 3897:2039 : can be used once the instrument has been moved to the New Occupy Point and is aiming toward the New Backsight Point. The New Backsight Circle angle will then be sent to the total station so its horizontal angle will display this value. ,. 8 9 $09:5 : accesses the Backsight Setup screen (Page R-72) where the current backsight can be modified.

Point Exists Dialog Box

$:7;0 %7,;0780  $ /08 49 %7,;0780

or

$ /0 $ 49

When performing a traverse or side shot and the foresight point name already exists, the Point Exists dialog box will open where you select how to handle the new point.
;07 7 90  89 3 : will overwrite the existing point with the new coordinates. &80 0 9 ;, ,- 0 : will store the coordinates using the next available point name. $9470 // 9 43, -807;,9 43 : will write an observation record to the raw data file with the new coordinate values without changing the existing point in the job file. (This button is not available when shooting an existing traverse shot.)

R-78

Survey Menu

Remote Shot Screen (Remote Mode)

$:7;0 %7,;0780  $ /08 49 %7,;0780

or

$ /0 $ 49

When running in remote mode, tapping the %7,;0780 or $ /0 $ 49 button from the Traverse / Sideshot screen will open the Remote Shot screen, shown here. The Remote Shot screen is identical to the Remote Control screen (Page R-103), except it has an additional button that allows you to trigger the total station to take a shot.
%, 0 $ 49 : after the total station is properly aiming toward the prism, this will trigger the total station to take a shot. If you are performing a side shot, you will remain in the Remote Shot screen once the shot is completed. If you are performing a traverse shot, you will return to the Traverse / Sideshot screen when the shot is completed.

R-79

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Repetition Shots
$:7;0 #0509 9 43 $ 498

The Repetition Shots screen is used to perform side shots or traverse shots using any number of repetitions. Note: The sequence that the repetition shots are performed is selected in the Repetition Settings screen (Page R-35).
$099 3 8 : located at the top of the screen, is a shortcut to the Surveying and Repetition Settings screens (Page R-32 and R-35 respectively).

Foresight: is the name of the point that will be stored. Number of Sets: is the desired number of sets to shoot to the backsight and foresight. Note: One set is equivalent to two shots to the backsight and foresight point. HR: is the rod height. Average (of): shows the average angle or distance to the foresight from all the shots taken. The value in parenthesis is the total number of repetitions performed. Worst Residual: displays the worst residual calculated from all the sets of the selected measurement type. Description: is the description for the point that is being stored. This field appears prior to storing the new point. Note: A residual is the difference between a single measurement and the average of all the measurements. R-80

Survey Menu Note: If a residual exceeds the tolerances set in the Repetition Settings screen (Page R-35), that value is displayed in bold text.
 ,  , $ : allows you to replace the current repetition data for the corresponding button with new data. Once tapped, the repetition data for the tapped button will be deleted. You will then need to perform all sets defined in the Number of Sets field again, where the new data will replace the corresponding deleted data.  : will open the prompt shown here where you can either select to add an additional set to those already done, or start over. %488 : will delete the corresponding set that has the worst residual.

Note: A set can only be tossed when three or more sets have been collected.
$ /0 $ 49 : will use the repetition data gathered to create a new side shot point. The foresight point will automatically advance to the next available point. %7,;0780 : will use the repetition data gathered to create a new traverse point. The occupy point will automatically update to the previous foresight point and the backsight point will automatically update to the previous occupy point. ,. 8 9 : accesses the Backsight Setup screen (Page R-72) where the current backsight can be modified.

Note: The current backsight information is displayed across the top of the Repetition Shots screen.

R-81

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Multiple Sideshots
$:7;0 : 9 5 0 $ /08 498

The Multiple Sideshots screen is used to perform multiple side shots using any number of repetitions to each foresight without the need to re-shoot the backsight. Foresight: is the point name that will be stored. Description: is the description for the next stored point. HR: is the length of the rod. Number of Sets: is the desired number of sets to shoot to the backsight or foresight.
$099 3 8 : located at the top of the screen, is a shortcut to the Surveying and Repetition Settings screens (Page R-32 and R-35 respectively). $ 449 ,. 8 9 : is used to shoot the backsight. You will be required to shoot the number of sets to the backsight entered in the Number of Sets field.

Note: The backsight can be re-shot at any time, but it must be shot before the first side shot can be shot.
$ /0 $ 49 : is used to shoot a side shot. Once the final set is complete, the new point is stored and the foresight point will automatically advance to the next available point. ,. 8 9 : accesses the Backsight Setup screen (Page R-72) where the current backsight can be modified.

R-82

Survey Menu

Distance Offset Shot

$:7;0  89,3.0 11809 ,

or

Ctrl

-[O]

The Distance Offset screen is used to store a new point that is a known distance away from the rod location. This screen is useful when the rod cannot occupy the new points location.
$099 3 8 : located at the top of the screen, is a shortcut to the Surveying Settings screens (Page R-32).

Foresight: is the point name that will be stored. Description: is the description for the offset shot that is stored. HR: is the length of the rod. Offset: is the offset distance that is to the left (when L is selected) or right (when R is selected) of the prism from the total stations
3_ft right 1_ft back

point of view. Horz Dist Offset: is the offset distance that is beyond the prism (positive value) or in front of the prism (negative value) from the total stations point of view. Elevation Offset: is the offset distance that is below the prism (negative value) or above the prism (positive value). Note: multiple offsets can be applied simultaneously. : will take a shot to the prism, apply the offset(s) entered, and then store the new point.
$ 449

: accesses the Backsight Setup screen (Page R-72) where the current backsight can be modified.
,. 8 9

R-83

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Horizontal Angle Offset

$:7;0 47 439, 3 0 11809 ,

or

Ctrl

-[P]

The Horizontal Angle Offset screen allows you to compute and store the location of a new point that cannot be occupied, such as at the center of large tree. The routine shoots a prism positioned at the side of the new point and then reads the horizontal angle when aiming toward the center of the new point to compute the new points location.
$099 3 8 : located at the top of the screen, is a shortcut to the Surveying Settings screen (Page R-32).

Foresight: is the point name that will be used when storing the new point.
 2 03907 : will record the horizontal angle from the total station, which should be facing the center of the new point. $ 449 !7 82 : will take a shot to the prism, which is located at the side of the new point. ,. 8 9

: accesses the Backsight Setup screen (Page R-72).

Note: The new point will have the same elevation as the point occupied by the prism.

Note: The prism only needs to occupy the location at the side of the new point. A prism is not necessary when shooting the location directly in front of the new point.

R-84

Survey Menu

Vertical Angle Offset

$:7;0 '079 ., 3 0 11809 ,

or

Ctrl

-[Q]

The Vertical Angle Offset screen allows you to compute and store the location of a new point that exists directly above or below the rod location, but cannot be occupied, such as the top of a utility pole. The new point will have the same coordinates as the rod location, but with a different elevation.
$099 3 8 : located at the top of the screen, is a shortcut to the Surveying Settings screen (Page R-32).

Foresight: is the point name that will be used when storing the new point.
$ 449 !7 82

: will take a shot to the prism.

 2 03 9 : will read the vertical angle measured by the total station, which should be facing the new points location. ,. 8 9

: accesses the Backsight Setup

screen (Page R-72).

R-85

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Auto Collect
$:7;0 :94 4 0.9

The Auto Collect screen allows users with robotic total stations to automatically collect points either at a specified time interval or after the rod has moved a specified horizontal distance. Note: This routine only works when used with a robotic total station in remote control mode.
$099 3 8 : located at the top of the screen, is a shortcut to the Surveying Settings screen (Page R-32).

Foresight: is the point name that will be used when storing the first new point. Each successive point name will automatically be incremented by the next available point number. Description: is the description that will be assigned to all the points that are stored from this routine. Time: when this radio button is selected, a point will automatically be stored after each time specified in the corresponding field passes. Distance: when this radio button is selected, a point will automatically be stored each time the prism is moved from the last stored point by the horizontal distance specified in the corresponding field. Note: The accuracy that a point will be stored when auto collecting by Distance will vary depending on how frequently the total station measures a distance and how fast the prism is traveling.
,. 8 0 9  9

: accesses the Backsight Setup screen (Page R-72).

: accesses the next screen.

R-86

Survey Menu

Auto Collect Screen Two

The second Auto Collect screen displays information related to the points that have been stored and when the next point will be stored. The box in the upper-left corner displays the direction and distance the total station is aiming relative to the backsight. The upper-right corner displays the next store point number and when the next point will be stored in either seconds or distance. The lower-left corner is a graphic that shows the current total station position, the current prism position, and when collecting by distance, the approximate location of the next store point (represented by an X) based on the speed and direction the prism is moving from the previous store point. Previous stored points are also displayed as dots in this part of the screen. The lower-right corner of the screen displays the number of points that have been stored and the speed and direction the prism is traveling. : stores a point at the current prism location, even if the time / distance criteria is not yet met.
$9470 4 ,.

: returns to the previous Auto Collect screen.

$945

/ routine.
$9,79

: toggles between starting or stopping the Auto Collect

R-87

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Corner & 2 Lines

$:7;0 47307  308

The Corner and 2 Lines screen is used to store a point at the corner of a structure using a reflectorless total station where a direct measurement to the point is not possible, but two points on two intersecting lines can be shot. Foresight: is the name of the point that will be stored. Description: is the description for the point that will be stored. HR: 0.000: shows that no rod height will be used with this routine since all shots are direct reflectorless.
$ 449 30  : will prompt you to take two shots on Line 1, which intersects with Line 2 at the point you want to store.

Note: Each shot for a line can be in any location on the same line. (Shot 1 can be to the left or the right of Shot 2.) : will prompt you to take two shots on Line 2, which intersects with Line 1 at the point you want to store.
$ 449 30 

Line
1

1
2 1

Lin

e2

Target

Note: After all shots are done, the computed elevation is displayed for the new point. You can either enter a different elevation or tap to accept the computed elevation.

Corner & 2 Lines

,. 8 9 : accesses the Backsight Setup screen (Page R-72) where the current backsight can be modified.

R-88

Survey Menu

Corner & Angle

$:7;0 47307 3 0

The Corner and Angle screen is used to store a point that cannot be shot on a reference line using a reflectorless total station where two other points on the same line can be shot. Foresight: is the name of the point that will be stored. Description: is the description for the point that will be stored. HR: 0.000: shows that no rod height will be used with this routine since all shots are direct reflectorless. : will prompt you to take two shots on a line that intersects with the point you want to store.
$ 449 30

Line
Shot 1 Shot 2

Note: Each shot can be in any location on the line. (Shot 1 can be to the left or the right of Shot 2.)
Aim at target (no shot)
 2 ,9 47307 : will prompt you to aim at the corner (the point that you want to store). Although no shot is taken, the angles to the point will be used to compute its location.

Corner & Angle

Note: After all shots are done, the computed elevation is displayed for the new point. You can either enter a different elevation or tap to accept the computed elevation.

,. 8 9 : accesses the Backsight Setup screen (Page R-72) where the current backsight can be modified.

R-89

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Corner & Offset

$:7;0 47307 11809

The Corner and Offset screen is used to store a point using a reflectorless total station for a point that cannot be shot directly, but the offset(s) to the point can be measured from a reference line that can be shot. Foresight: is the name of the point that will be stored. Description: is the description for the point that will be stored. HR: 0.000: shows that no rod height will be used with this routine since all shots are direct reflectorless. Horiz Offset: is the horizontal distance on the line from Shot 1 to the new point. Select L if the new point falls to the left of Shot 1, or select R if it falls to the right. Perpendicular Offset: is the horizontal distance, perpendicular to the reference line, from the line to the new point (see diagram). A positive value extends away from the total station where a negative value is closer to the total station. Elevation Offset: is the vertical offset from the line to the new point. (See diagram.) A positive value will result in a new point above the reference line and a negative value results in a new point below the reference line.
Horiz. Offset (R) Shot 1

Line Shot 2

Perpend. Offset (-) Elevation Offset (-) Target

Corner & Offset

$ 449 30 : will prompt you to take two shots on the horizontal reference line.

Note: Each shot can be in any location on the reference line (Shot 1 can be to the left or the right of Shot 2), but the Horiz Offset is always measured from Shot 1.

R-90

Survey Menu
,. 8 9 : accesses the Backsight Setup screen (Page R-72) where the current backsight can be modified.

Note: After each shot is complete, the computed elevation is displayed for the new point. You can either enter a different elevation or tap to accept the computed elevation.

R-91

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Corner & Plane

$:7;0 47307 ! ,30

The Corner and Plane screen is used to store a point using a reflectorless total station for a point that cannot be shot, but three points on the same plane can be shot. Foresight: is the name of the point that will be stored. Description: is the description for the point that will be stored. HR: 0.000: shows that no rod height will be used with this routine since all shots are direct reflectorless.
$ 449 ! ,30 : will prompt you to take three shots on the same flat surface that the new point is located.

Note: Each shot can be in any location on the same plane, but they must not form a straight line and they should not be grouped close together.
 2 ,9 47307 : will prompt you to aim at the corner (the point that you want to store). Although no shot is taken, the angles to the point will be used to compute its location.

Shot 1

Shot 2

Aim at target (no shot)

Shot 3

Note: After all shots are done, the computed elevation is displayed for the new point. You can either enter a different elevation or tap to accept the computed elevation.

Corner & Plane

,. 8 9 : accesses the Backsight Setup screen (Page R-72) where the current backsight can be modified.

R-92

Survey Menu

Shoot From Two Ends

$:7;0 $ 449 742  3/8

The Shoot From 2 Ends screen is used to provide more accurate vertical closure to a traverse. The routine requires that a foresight point is shot, but it is not stored until after it is occupied and another shot is taken to the previous occupy point. The coordinates for the foresight point are computed from an average of data gathered at each occupy point. : located at the top of the screen, is a shortcut to the Surveying and Repetition Settings screens (Page R-32 and R-35 respectively).
$099 3 8

Foresight: is the name given to the next stored point. Description: is the description given to the next stored point. HR: is the length of the rod. Number of Sets: is the desired number of sets required when shooting each foresight. You must select at least one set. : will prompt you to shoot the Foresight point. After each set is performed, the Move To Other End dialog box will open (shown here) and prompt you to set up on the new point and enter a new instrument and rod height. The New Occupy Point dialog box (Page R-77) will open and inform you of the updated points.
%7,;0780 $ $09:5 : accesses the Backsight Setup screen (Page R-72) where the current backsight can be modified.

R-93

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Record Mode
$:7;0 #0.47/ 4/0

When running in Record Mode, all control of the total station is performed from the total stations keypad. The data collector will simply log each shot that is taken from the total station. This routine is typically used for topo work, where the total station remains over a single occupy point during all shots. Note: Not all total stations support record mode.
$099 3 8 : located at the top of the screen, is a shortcut to the Surveying Settings screen (Page R-32).

Foresight: is the point name that will be used when storing the next point. Once a point is stored, it will be incremented to the next available point. Description: is the description for all the shots that are stored. HR: is the length of the rod.
$9,79 #0.47/ 3

: starts recording all shots performed from the total

station.
$945

: stops record mode.

9

: accesses the Backsight Setup screen (Page R-72) where the current backsight can be modified.
,. 8

R-94

Survey Menu

Resection
$:7;0 #080.9 43

The Resection screen allows you to compute an unknown occupied position by shooting two to seven known positions. Store Point: is the name that will be used when the new occupied point is stored. Instrument Height: is the height of the instrument above the ground. Total Resect Points to Shoot: is the number of known positions that will be shot, from 2 to 7. Shots per Resect Point: is the required number of shots to shoot to each foresight when Direct Only is selected in the next field and is the required number of sets when Direct and Reverse is selected in the next field. Sequence: is the set order when shooting each foresight. You can select either Direct and Reverse or Direct Only. : accesses the Resection dialog box, described below, where all of the shots are performed.
$4 ;0

Resection Dialog Box

Resect Point: is the known point that you will shoot. Option: allows you to select the type of data that is recorded when shooting the specified foresight. You can select Distance and Angle, or if shooting at least three foresights, you can also select to record the Angle Only. HR: is the length of the rod.
%, 0 $ 49 : takes a shot to the prism at the specified foresight point. After the last shot is R-95

Survey Pro Reference Manual performed, the Save Point dialog box will open, described next.

Save Point Dialog Box

Once the final shot is completed, the Save Point dialog box will open showing the computed coordinates for the occupy point. Description: is the desired description for the point that will be stored. : stores the new point and automatically sets the point as the current occupy point.
,3.0

: exits the dialog without storing a new

point.

Results
Resection OC N: is the computed northing of the Occupy Point. OC E: is the computed easting of the Occupy Point. OC Z: is the computed elevation of the Occupy Point. Residuals dRMS: is the average distance residual from all shots performed. aRMS: is the average horizontal angle residual from all shots performed. FS: is the foresight name. dHD: is the distance difference of the measured shot and the computed shot. d(H)orizontal(D)elta dHA: is the angle difference of the measured shot and the computed shot. d(H)orizontal(A)ngle

R-96

Survey Menu

Remote Elevation
$:7;0 #02490  0;,9 43

The Remote Elevation screen will compute the elevation for the occupy point by shooting a foresight with a known elevation, or it will compute the elevation for a foresight when the occupy elevation is known. Known Elevation Is: is where you specify if the Occupy point or the Foresight point has a known elevation. Elevation: is the known elevation for the selected point. Shoot: defines if you want to perform a Direct shot only, or Direct & Reverse shots to the foresight. HI: is the distance that the total station is above the ground. HR: is the length of the rod. Store Pt: When checked, the elevation of the point specified here will be replaced with the computed elevation.
%, 0 $ 49 : computes the elevation for the point that had an unknown elevation and optionally writes that elevation to the specified Store Pt.

Results
OCC Elevation: displays the elevation for the occupy point. FS Elevation: displays the elevation for the foresight point.

R-97

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Solar Observation
$:7;0 $4 ,7 -807;,9 43

The Solar Observation screen is used to compute the azimuth to an arbitrary backsight based on the position of a celestial body; typically the sun.

WARNING! Direct viewing of the sun without a proper

filter will cause serious eye damage. Pointing a total station directly toward the sun without a solar filter can also damage the EDM components. Find Azimuth Using Ephemeris Data: select this method if you plan to enter data from an ephemeris. Find Azimuth Using Date and Time: select this method if you do not plan to use an ephemeris. Note: The fields within the Solar Observations screen will vary depending on the method selected above. All of the fields from each method are described below.
$099 3 8 : located at the top of the screen, is a shortcut to the Date/Time Settings screen (Page R-36).

Lat. / Long.: is the latitude and longitude of the total station. These values can be scaled from a map, such as a U.S.G.S. 7.5-minute quadrangle sheet or collected with a handheld GPS unit. Aim: selects the portion of the celestial body that where you intend to aim. You can select Left Edge of Center, Center, or Right Edge of Center. R-98

Survey Menu Note: Typically Left Edge of Center is selected when performing a sun shot in the northern hemisphere and Center is selected for star shots.
4770.9 438 : displays which corrections are currently selected with an N for no, or a Y for yes. When tapped, the Corrections dialog box opens where the following corrections are configured.

Non-linear Declination Correction: applies a correction for the linear interpolation of the declination of the sun for the time that an observation is taken. This error is usually negligible, but is removed when this is checked. (This should only be checked when performing sun shots.) Correct to State Grid: when selected, the computed azimuth is referenced from the local State Plane grid rather than true north. Center Meridian / Zone Constant: these values are used to adjust the computed azimuth to the local State Plane grid. Appendix A lists these values for the United States.

GHA0: is the Greenwich Hour Angle of the sun at zero hour Universal Time, Greenwich, on the current date. Decl0: is the declination of the sun at zero hour on the current date. GHA24: is the Greenwich Hour Angle of the sun at zero hour Universal Time, Greenwich, on the following day (24-hours later). Decl24: is the declination of the sun at zero hour on the following day. Solar Semi-Diameter: is the semi-diameter of the sun, expressed in minutes and seconds.

R-99

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Shots
Number of sets: is the number of sets that will be taken to the celestial object. Reverse Shots : When checked, reverse shots will be required with each set. When unchecked, only direct shots are required.
$ 449 : accesses the Enter Shot Data screen, described below, where the shot data is entered for the selected observation. %488 / 3. : will toggle the selected observation so that it will be hidden or un-hidden, respectively. When an observation is hidden, it will not be used when calculating the final azimuth.

Note: The %488 / 3. buttons perform the same function as checking / un-checking the checkbox in front of each observation.

Note: A backsight observation cannot be tossed.

0 : permanently deletes the most current observation if it is selected allowing you to shoot that shot again. #0809 : permanently deletes all observations. A warning prompt will appear before the observations are deleted.

R-100

Survey Menu

The Enter Shot Data Dialog Box

Horizontal Angle: displays the horizontal angle measured by the total station. This value is updated with the %, 0 $ 49 button, described below. Current Date / Time: displays the current date, time, and DUT. These settings can be changed from the Date/Time Settings screen (Page R-36). Date: if incorrect, the current date should be entered here. Time: is where the precise time that the observation occurred is entered. Hrs to GMT: is the number of hours that the time at the current location differs from Greenwich Mean Time.
%, 0 $ 49

: records the horizontal angle from the total station.

09 4., % 20 : fills in the Time field with the current time that is set in the data collector. This function is not available when shooting the backsight.

Sun Shot Procedure Summary

1. Point the telescope ahead of the path of the sun and lock the horizontal movement of the total station. 2. Immediately record the horizontal angle from the total station using the %, 0 $ 49 button. 3. When the target becomes properly aligned with the crosshairs, record the current time as accurately as possible. The time can be automatically read from the data collector using the 09 4., % 20 button, or measured from an external time piece and manually entered in the appropriate fields. 4. When finished, tap the observation. button to complete the current

R-101

Survey Pro Reference Manual When all observations are complete, the Results page displays the computed azimuth to the backsight.

Results
BS D/R: is the horizontal angle recorded to the backsight for the particular direct/reverse observation. Azi D/R: is the computed azimuth to the backsight for the particular direct/reverse observation. Avg: is the computed average azimuth of the backsight, relative to true north. Grid Avg: is the computed average azimuth of the backsight, relative to the local State Plane grid. This field is only displayed when a state grid correction is applied. Note: See the Users Manual for more information on the usage of the Solar Observation routine.

R-102

Survey Menu

Remote Control
$:7;0 #02490 43974 

or

Ctrl

-[Y]

Remote control mode is a special mode that makes it easier for users to control fully robotic total stations from a remote data collector. Note: The remote control functions are available only after a supported robotic total station is selected and enabled in the Instrument Settings screen.

Remote Control
The Remote Control screen allows you to turn the total station in any direction using the arrow buttons on the keypad and control the tacking functions. The arrow keys are typically used to get the total station to aim in the general vicinity of the prism prior to initiating a search. The total station will continue to turn in the direction of the button as long as the button remains pressed. : aims the scope upward. : aims the scope downward. : turns the scope to the right (as you face the total station from the data collector). : turns the scope to the left.
$0,7. : starts the search routine where the total station searches in a specific pattern until it sees the prism and then stops.

: puts the total station in track mode where it will track the movements of the prism.
4. $945

: stops the total station from tracking or searching.

R-103

Survey Pro Reference Manual

%:73 %4 : opens the Turn To screen, described below, where the total station can be turned to a specified direction or quickly flipped between face one and face two.

Show Distance: When checked, distances will continuously measured and displayed on the data collector along with the angles. Note: distances are always measured when a shot is taken, regardless of the Shoot Distance checkbox setting.

Turn To
$:7;0 #02490 43974 %:73 %4

The Turn To screen is used to turn a robotic total station to a specified horizontal and zenith angle, or to a specified point. Horizontal Angle: is the horizontal angle that the total station will turn to. Zenith Angle: is the zenith angle that the total station will turn to.
%:73 94 3 08 : turns the total station to the specified horizontal and zenith angles.

Existing Point: is the point from the current job that the total station will turn to.
%:73 94 !4 39 : turns the total station to the specified point. %:73 94 ,. 8 9

: turns the total station to the backsight point.

 5 : quickly rotates the total station from face one to face two, or vice versa.

R-104

Stakeout Menu
The Stakeout Menu contains a variety of stakeout routines, including offset staking. A: Stake Points B: Stake List of Points C: Stake to Line D: Offset Staking E: Slope Staking F: Line and Offset G: Curve and Offset H: Spiral and Offset I: Show Station (and Offset)

J: Store Offset Points K: Stake DTM L: Define a Location M: Where is Next Point

Note: The stakeout routines behave differently when running in remote control mode. For a description of this special mode, refer to Page R-103, and the Remote Control section of the Users Manual.

R-105

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Stake Points
$9, 04:9 $9, 0 !4 398

The Stake Points screen allows you to stake a single point or a series of points.
$099 3 8 : located at the top of the screen, accesses the Stakeout Settings screen (Page R33).

Design Point: is the name of the first point that you want to stake. Increment: when advancing to the next point, the point number is incremented by the value entered here. (A negative integer can be entered to have point numbers advance in descending order.)
0 9 !4 39  : advances the current Design Point by the Increment value. If that point does not exist and the Increment value =1, the Design Point is advanced to the next existing point.

Height of Rod: is the length of the rod.

,. 8 9

: accesses the Backsight Setup screen (Page R-72).

$4 ;0  : takes you to the second Stake Points screen where the distance and direction to the design point is displayed, see below.

R-106

Stakeout Menu

Stake Points Screen Two

Design point: displays the name of the design point that was entered in the first screen. Description: displays the description assigned to the design point. Angle Right: is the horizontal angle to turn to face the design point. Horz. distance: is the horizontal distance from the occupy point to the design point. Vert Distance: is the vertical distance from the occupy point to the design point. ZE to Rod: is the zenith angle required to face the prism over the design point.
 7. 0 074 : is used to modify the circle on the total station so that the angle right reading will be zero when it is facing toward the design point, which can sometimes be easier than turning to an obscure angle value. When this button is tapped, the following actions will occur:

1. A new backsight circle value is computed, sent to the instrument and stored in the raw data 2. The Angle Right value is changed to zero to reflect the change. The instrument now needs to be turned horizontally to zero to face the design point. 3. To prevent errors, the backsight set up is invalidated when exiting the Stakeout dialog if this button has been used. A circle zeroed on a design point is meaningless once the design point has been staked. 4. The dialog shown here will be displayed the first time  7. 0 074 is used during a stakeout session to warn that the original backsight reference will be lost.

R-107

Survey Pro Reference Manual Note: The  7. 0 total station.

,. $9, 0  074

button is not available when using a robotic

: returns to the first screen.

: accesses the third and final Stake Points screen where the shots to the stake point are performed.

Stake Points Screen Three

Height of Rod: is the length of the rod. Design Elev: displays the current design elevation, which can be modified with the  ,3 0 button. FORWARD / BACK: indicates if the rod must move forward (toward the total station) or backward (away from the total station). Go RIGHT / Go LEFT: indicates if the rod must move to the right or left from the total stations point of view. Coarse EDM (Fast Shot): When checked, sets the total station to coarse mode for faster, but slightly less-precise measurements. CUT / FILL: displays the required amount of cut or fill to bring the stake point to the design points elevation. Rod Elev: displays the elevation at the rods location computed from the last shot.
 ,3 0 : is used to modify the current design elevation, which will also modify the associated CUT/FILL value for the current station being staked.

: takes a shot to the prism and computes come/go, cut/fill information.

$ 49

Shot data: displays the measurements from the last shot. R-108

Stakeout Menu
$9470

: stores the stake point.

$9470%,50 : accesses the Stake Out Point (Tape Offset) dialog box (Page R-134), where the staked point can be stored that includes a specified offset. The default value is the appropriate distance correction to the design point. $9470 $$

: stores the last shot taken as a side shot.

%:73 :3 : (available with robotic total station) turns the total station toward the design point. ,.

: returns to the second screen.

$9, 0 0 9  : returns you to the previous Stake Points screen where the Design point is advanced by the Increment value.

R-109

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Remote Staking
$9, 04:9 $9, 0 !4 398 $4 ;0  $9, 0 

Performing stake out in remote mode is different from running in a non-remote mode because the feedback is continuous and provided in the rods point of view instead of the total stations point of view. When staking in remote mode, the first four shots taken in a row where no distance is returned will result in a beep to warn that the instrument has possibly lost track of the prism. There are three different graphic displays of the Remote Staking screen, depending on how close the rod is to the stake point. Each screen is shown here. : when you are satisfied with the location of the prism, this button will open the Stake Point screen (see Page R-106) where the staked point can be stored.
430

Display when prism is more than 3-meters from the target.

Display when prism is within 3 meters from the target.

Display when the prism is within the Horizontal Distance Tolerance specified in the Stakeout Settings screen (Page R-33).

R-110

Stakeout Menu

Stake List of Points Screen

$9, 04:9 $9, 0 89 41 !4 398


The Stake List of Points screen is used to stake points from a specified list of points. Points can also be selected by description or polyline.
$099 3 8 : located at the top of the screen, accesses the Stakeout Settings screen (Page R33). %,5 !4 398 : displays a map of the current job. Simply tap the points that you want to stake and then tap .

: opens a window where a range of points can be defined. The points within the specified range can then be staked.
%4742

: Allows you to select points using a variety of other methods including: select all points; all control points; all noncontrol points; by description; or by polyline. Design Point: displays the point to be staked. The initial Design Point is the first point of the selected polyline or point range.
 ,3 0 : opens the Edit Point List screen where the current point list can be edited.

Increment: is the number of points to advance from the Design Point after tapping 0 9 !4 39  . (A negative integer can be entered to have point numbers advance in descending order.) Height of Rod: is the length of the rod.
0 9 !4 39  : Advances the Design Point by the Increment and automatically solves to open the Stake List of Points screen where you can begin staking the point. The points are advanced in the same order that they were defined when the polyline was created or when the point range was defined. ,. 8 9

: accesses the Backsight Setup screen (Page R-72). R-111

Survey Pro Reference Manual

$4 ;0  : opens the next Stake List of Points screen where the current Design Point can be staked.

Note: The screens available after tapping $4 ;0  or 0 9 !4 39  are identical to Screens Two and Three in the Stake Points routine and are described on pages R-107 through R-108.

Edit Point List

$9, 04:9 $9, 04:9 $9, 0 $9, 0 89 41 !4 398 89 41 !4 398  ,3 0

or

Edit List

The Edit Point List screen is used to modify the existing point list.
#024;0 : removes the selected point from the point list.  0,7 

: removes all the points from the point

list. : is available only when the screen is accessed with the  ,3 0 button. This will automatically select the point in the point list that is nearest to the previously staked point, which is the selected point when the screen if first accessed.
%4  48089
38079 /
5503/ : will insert the point specified in the corresponding field above the point selected in the point list. When <End> is selected, the point is appended to the end of the list.

: is available only when the screen is accessed with the button. This is used to stake the point currently selected in the point list.
 ,3 0 94  ,3 0

R-112

Stakeout Menu

Stake to Line
$9, 04:9 $9, 0 94 30


Graphic when prism is greater than 10-feet from the line.

Graphic when prism is between 1-foot and 10-feet from the line.

The Stake to Line screen allows you to locate points on a continuous predefined line starting from shots to a prism at any location. Direction information is provided for the rod to locate the line by traveling the shortest possible distance (a perpendicular offset to the line) and by traveling on the line between the rod and the total station. Start Point: defines the first point of the line to be staked.
3/ !4 39 /  70.9 43 : defines the second point on the line, or the direction of the line to be staked, respectively.

Begin Station: defines the station associated with the Start Point.
Graphic when prism is within 1-foot of the line Graphic when prism is on the line or within the Horizontal Distance Tolerance specified in the Stakeout Settings screen (Page R-33).

: accesses the Backsight Setup screen (Page R-72).

,. 8 9

: takes you to the second Stake Points screen, described below.

$9, 0

R-113

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Stake to Line Screen Two

The second screen is where the staking is performed. The graphic display of this screen will change depending on how close the rod is to the specified line. The initial screen that is displayed before a shot is performed shows the position of the total station, the line of the backsight and the specified line to stake. Each type of graphic is displayed below. Note: Tap the graphic portion of the screen for an expanded view. Height of Rod: is the length of the rod. Coarse EDM (fast shot): When checked, sets the total station to coarse mode for faster, but slightly less precise measurements. BACK / FORWARD: is the distance that the rod must travel BACK (away from the total station) or FORWARD (toward the total station) in order to occupy the specified line. LEFT of Line / RIGHT of Line / ON LINE: is displayed if the rod is to the left or right side of Initial screen before a shot is performed the line, or is on the line. The LEFT and RIGHT side is determined as if occupying the Start Point and facing the Foresight Point or Direction of the line, specified in Screen One. ON LINE is determined if you are within the Horizontal Distance Tolerance specified in the Stakeout Settings screen (Page R-33). Offset Dist.: is the perpendicular offset from the specified line to the rod. This is the minimum distance that the rod must travel to occupy the line. Station: is the station on the specified line where the offset occurs, relative to the Start Point.

R-114

Stakeout Menu Shot Data: displays the information measured by the total station during the previous shot.
$ 49

: takes a shot to the prism. : returns to Screen One.

,.

$9470 : opens the Store Point dialog so you can store the last point that was shot.

Remote Stake to Line

The content of the Stake to Line screen when running in remote mode is nearly identical to running in non-remote mode, but the graphic portion of the screen looks and behaves differently. The graphic is more intuitive simply point the data collector toward the total station and the graphic tells you the orientation of the line and what direction to travel to reach the line in the shortest distance. (See the illustrations below.) If the Use Manual Updating (Remote Control) field is checked in the Stakeout Settings screen (Page R-33), a $ 49 button will be available, which allows you to manually control when shots are taken.

R-115

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Prism is greater than 10 feet from line.

Prism is between 1 and 10 feet from line.

Prism is within 1 foot of line.

Prism is on the line or within the horizontal distance tolerance specified in the Stakeout Settings screen (Page R-33).

R-116

Stakeout Menu

Offset Staking
$9, 04:9 11809 $9, 3 

The Offset Staking screen is used to stake the center of a road, the road edge, the curb/ditch edge, or any offset at fixed intervals. An existing polyline, alignment, or a specified point range can define the centerline of the road. The first Offset Staking screen is used to define the centerline of the road that you want to offset stake. : displays a map of all the polylines and alignments in the current job. Simply tap the line that you want to offset stake and then tap .
%,5 30 %4742 : opens a window where a range of points can be defined. The points within the specified range will define the centerline of the road to be offset staked.

Begin Station: is the station assigned to the first point of the selected polyline or point range.
,. 8 0 9 9

: accesses the Backsight Setup screen (Page R-72).

: takes you to the second Offset Staking screen.

R-117

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Offset Staking Screen Two

The second Offset Staking screen is used to define the cross section of the road that you want to offset stake. 1/2 Road Width: is the Left and Right width of the road, respectively, from the centerline to the edge of payment. (See diagram below.) X-Slope (%): is the Left and Right slope of the road, respectively, from the centerline to the edge of payment. Note: A negative slope will result in water running from the centerline toward the edge of payment. Stake Curb / Ditch: When checked, a curb or ditch and an offset can be defined beyond the edge of the pavement.
$ ,50  /  /  : when the above checkbox is checked, this button allows you to select the shape of the curb, ditch, or slope beyond the edge of pavement so cut / fill information can be computed on this surface if a random offset is specified. The selected shape is displayed by an icon next to the button, as well as with a bold line in the roads cross-sectional profile at the bottom of the screen.

Note: The selected Shape is irrelevant if a random offset is not specified since the nodes are always in the same place for each shape that uses the same Height and Offset values. Height: is the height of the curb, ditch, or slope in feet or meters. A positive value is considered a curb and a negative value a ditch. Offset From Edge of Road: is the distance that the curb or ditch extends from the edge of pavement.

R-118

Stakeout Menu Note: The specified curb or ditch height and offset will be applied to both sides of the road.
,. 0 9 

: returns to the previous screen. : accesses the next screen.

Offset Staking Screen Three

The third Offset Staking screen is used to select the station and section of the road to be staked and to specify an offset distance from the design point. Station to Stake: is the station to be staked. Station Interval: specifies how far to advance from the current station to the next station.
0 9 $9,9 43 : advances the current station by the Station Interval.

Note: When advancing, if you want to also stake the locations where the alignment of the road changes, be sure to check the Stake Corners, Not Just Even Intervals option in the Stakeout Settings card. Tapping the $099 3 8 button at the top of the screen will access the Stakeout Settings. /  : These buttons are used to select the section of the road that you want to stake. Offset from the segment above ___: When checked, is the offset distance that will be applied to the selected design point. A positive offset extends from the design point away from the centerline. A negative offset extends towards the centerline. X-Slope (%): is the slope of the selected road section.

R-119

Survey Pro Reference Manual 1/2 Road Width: displays the width of the selected road section defined in the previous screen. This value can quickly be edited from this field. HR: is the rod height.
,. 8 ,. $4 ;0  9

: accesses the Backsight Setup screen (Page R-72).

: returns to the previous screen. : accesses the next screen.

Offset Staking Screen Four

The fourth Offset Staking screen displays the information needed to aim the total station toward the selected design point. Station: displays the current station and section of the roadway being staked and the current line segment type from the polyline that describes the centerline. If staking the center and an offset was specified, (To L) or (To R) is also displayed to indicate if the offset is to the left or right of the centerline, respectively. Offset: displays the offset that is applied to the design point. Slope: displays the slope of the road at the section being staked. From Gun to Design Point: displays the angle and distance information from the total station to the design point (plus offset if specified). : is used to modify the circle on the total station so that the angle right reading will be zero when it is facing the current target, which can sometimes be easier than turning to an obscure angle value. When this button is tapped, the following actions will occur:
 7. 0 074

1. A new backsight circle value is computed, sent to the instrument and stored in the raw data

R-120

Stakeout Menu 2. The Angle Right value is changed to zero to reflect the change. The instrument now needs to be turned horizontally to zero to face the current target location. 3. To prevent errors if this button is used, the backsight set up is invalidated when exiting the Stakeout dialog. A circle zeroed on a design point is meaningless once the design point has been staked. Note: The  7. 0 total station.
,. 074

button is not available when using a robotic

: returns to the previous screen.

$9, 0  : accesses the next screen, which is identical to the third Stake Points screen, described on Page R-108.

R-121

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Slope Staking
$9, 04:9 $ 450 $9, 3 

The Slope Staking screen is used to locate the catch points for a roadway in any terrain. The first screen is used to define or select the line that describes the centerline of the road to be slope staked. An existing polyline or alignment can be selected, or a series of existing points can be entered to define the centerline.
%,5 30 : allows you to tap an existing polyline or alignment that defines the centerline of the road. %4742 : allows you to enter a range of points to define the centerline of the road.

Begin Station: defines the station at the beginning of the centerline.

,. 8 0 9 9

: accesses the Backsight Setup screen.

: opens the next screen.

Slope Staking Screen Two

The second screen is used to describe the profile of the road. 1/2 Road Width: is the horizontal width of Left and Right sides of the road, respectively, from the centerline to the nearest edge of the curb or ditch. X-Slope: is the cross slope of the Left and Right sides of the road, respectively. The slope is computed from (
Rise Run 100 ).

(A negative slope will

cause water to run from the centerline toward the edge.) R-122

Stakeout Menu Stake Curb / Ditch: When checked, this allows you to include a curb or ditch in the road profile. Height: defines the height of the curb, or depth of the ditch. (A negative value would be used to define the depth of a ditch.) Offset From Edge of Road: defines the width of the curb or ditch.
,. 0 9 

: returns to the previous screen. : opens the next screen.

Slope Staking Screen Three

Station to Stake: is the station that will be staked next. Station Interval: is the value that is added to the Station to Stake after the 0 9 $9,9 43 button is pressed.
0 9 $9,9 43 : advances the Station to Stake by the Station Interval.

Note: If the Stake Corners option is selected in the Stakeout Settings screen, the 0 9 $9,9 43 button will also stop at any horizontal or vertical alignment node that falls within the interval. Fill Slope: is the desired slope, calculated from rise over run, between the hinge point and catch point when the area requires a fill. Cut Slope: is the desired slope, calculated from rise over run, between the hinge point and catch point when the area requires a cut. Segment # (Fill HP): when the terrain requires a fill, you have the option to compute the hinge point from either side of the second segment. The option to use segment # 1 can simplify the situation where a ditch meets an area requiring a fill, which would otherwise result in an area with two similar or identical negative slopes. R-123

Survey Pro Reference Manual

,.

: returns to the previous screen. : opens the next screen.

$9, 0 ! 

Slope Staking Screen Four

The fourth screen is used to perform the actual slope staking shots. Height of Rod: is the rod height. Coarse EDM (Fast Shot): When checked, sets the total station to coarse mode for faster, but slightly less-precise measurements. The first button selects the type of slope that will be used between the catch point and hinge point from the following options: : selects the slope based on the current rod position. If the rod is above the hinge point, a cut slope is computed. If the rod is below the hinge point, a fill slope is computed.
:942,9 . $ 450

   

47.0 &% $ 450

: forces all computations to be based on a : forces all computations to be based on a

cut slope.
47.0  $ 450

fill slope. The second button selects which information is displayed in the lower corner of the screen from the following options:
'079 ., ,5

: displays a cross-sectional view at the current

station. Note: When you tap a map view, an expanded view of the same map will fill the screen.

R-124

Stakeout Menu Note: The Vertical Map will show an X at the location of each previous shot. This can be useful in determining if the current terrain will never intersect the slope (no catch point).

 

47 439, ,5

: displays an overhead view of the job.

$ 49 ,9,

: displays the shot data for the latest shot.

Left / Right: displays if a Cut or Fill slope is being computed and if it is on the Left or Right side of the road, respectively. Rod Elev: is the current elevation at the rod location. Des. Slope: is the design cut or fill slope. Obs. Slope: is the computed (observed) cut or fill slope based on the last shot and the corresponding hinge point. Cut / Fill: is the cut or fill required for the current rod location to be positioned on the design slope. Toward CL / Away CL: is the computed horizontal distance that the rod must move either toward the centerline or away from it, respectively, before it is positioned at the catch point. Note: The computed horizontal distance is based on the observed terrain computed from the last two shots. If only one shot has been taken, it is assumed that the terrain is level when computing this value. On Station / Back Sta / Ahead Sta: informs you if the rod is on the station being staked, or the distance it must move (parallel to the centerline) back or ahead to be on the correct station. HD to HP: is the horizontal distance from the rod to the hinge point. VD to HP: is the vertical distance from the rod to the hinge point. HD to CL: is the horizontal distance from the rod to the centerline. VD to CL: is the vertical distance from the rod to the centerline.
$9470 $$

: will store the last shot taken as a side shot. R-125

Survey Pro Reference Manual

,. $9470 

: returns to the previous screen. : opens the next screen.

Slope Staking Screen Five

The fifth screen is used to store a point for the last shot taken from the previous screen, which should be located at the catch point. Point Name: is the name assigned to the stored point. Description: is the description assigned to the stored point.
$9470 !

: stores the point.

Offset from CP: This field is used if you want to stake another location that is at the specified horizontal distance from the catch point away from the road.
$4 ;0  : opens a new screen, described next, used to stake the point at the offset specified above. ,.

: returns to the previous screen.

0 9 !  : returns to the third slope staking screen where the station to stake can be advanced and the next catch point can be located.

R-126

Stakeout Menu

Slope Staking Offset Stake Screen One

The following screens are only accessed if you choose to stake a point at a specified offset away from the catch point. Station: displays the current station being slope staked. Offset from CP: is the offset from the catch point specified in the previous screen. From Gun to Design Point: displays the angle and distance information from the total station to the design point.
 7. 0 074 : is used to modify the circle on the total station so that the angle right reading will be zero when it is facing the current target, which can sometimes be easier than turning to an obscure angle value. When this button is tapped, the following actions will occur:

1. A new backsight circle value is computed, sent to the instrument and stored in the raw data 2. The Angle Right value is changed to zero to reflect the change. The instrument now needs to be turned horizontally to zero to face the current target location. 3. To prevent errors if this button is used, the backsight set up is invalidated when exiting the Stakeout dialog. A circle zeroed on a design point is meaningless once the design point has been staked. Note: The  7. 0 total station.
,. $9, 0  074

button is not available when using a robotic

: returns to the previous screen.

: accesses the next screen, which is identical to the third Stake Points screen, described on Page R-108. R-127

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Stake Line and Offset

$9, 04:9 30 ,3/ 11809

The Stake Line and Offset screen is used to stake stations on a line, or at an offset to it, at fixed intervals. : located at the top of the screen, accesses the Stakeout Settings screen (Page R33).
$099 3 8

Start Point: defines the first point of the line to be staked.

3/ !4 39 /  70.9 43 : defines the second point of the line, or the direction of the line to be staked, respectively.

Begin Station: defines the station associated with the Start Point.
,. 8 0 9 9

: accesses the Backsight Setup screen (Page R-72).

: opens Screen Two.

Stake Line and Offset Screen Two

Station to Stake: is the desired station that you want to stake. Station Interval: is the value that is added to the Station to Stake after the 0 9 $9,9 43 button is pressed.
0 9 $9,9 43 : advances the Station to Stake by the Station Interval.

Offset: defines the offset distance and if the offset occurs to the right of the line, when R is selected, or left, when L is selected. The right or left side is referenced while viewing the line from the Start Point.

R-128

Stakeout Menu

location (when is selected).

 

'079 .,

11809

: is the offset distance that is below the design D is selected) or above the design location (when

7,/0 specifies a slope from the specified line to the parallel line that is being staked. When this is a non-zero value, the elevation for the staked points will increasingly differ from the design elevations as the Offset value increases.

Height of rod: is the length of the rod.

,. 8 ,. $4 ;0 9

: accesses the Backsight Setup screen.

: returns to the previous screen. : accesses the third Stake Line and Offset screen, described

next. Note: A motorized total station will automatically turn toward the design point after pressing $4 ;0 depending on the configuration of the Stakeout Settings screen (Page R-33).

Stake Line and Offset Screen Three

Station: displays the current station that is being staked. H. Offset: displays the offset distance of the line being staked from the specified line and if it is on the Right or Left side of the specified line. From Gun to Design Point: displays the direction and distance that the total station must aim toward so that it is facing the current station.
 7. 0 074 : is used to modify the circle on the total station so that the angle right reading will be zero when it is facing the current target, which can sometimes be easier than turning to an obscure angle value. When this button is tapped, the following actions will occur:

R-129

Survey Pro Reference Manual 1. A new backsight circle value is computed, sent to the instrument and stored in the raw data 2. The Angle Right value is changed to zero to reflect the change. The instrument now needs to be turned horizontally to zero to face the current target location. 3. To prevent errors if this button is used, the backsight set up is invalidated when exiting the Stakeout dialog. A circle zeroed on a design point is meaningless once the design point has been staked. Note: The  7. 0 total station.
,. $9, 0  074

button is not available when using a robotic

: returns to the previous screen.

: accesses the fourth Stake Line and Offset screen, which is identical to the third Stake Points screen, described on Page R-108. Note: Tap the graphic portion of the screen for an expanded view.

Screen Summary
Screen One is used to define the primary line used to determine the location of the line to be staked and the station associated with the Start Point. Screen Two is used to define the offset distance and location, the station to be staked and the station interval. Screen Three provides the distance and direction information to the current station to be staked. Screen Four is used to stake the current station.

R-130

Stakeout Menu

Stake Curve and Offset

$9, 04:9 :7;0 ,3/ 411809

The Stake Curve and Offset screen is used to stake stations on a curve or at an offset to it at fixed station intervals.
$099 3 8 : located at the top of the screen, accesses the Stakeout Settings screen (Page R33).

PC Point: is the starting point of the curve (point of curvature). / ! %,3 039 7 : defines the azimuth or bearing, respectively, of the tangent at the PC Point.
! %,3 039  2

/ 0 700 7. / 0 700  47/ : defines the radius, degree arc, or degree chord of the
#,/ :8

curve, respectively. Turn: defines if the curve turns to the Left or Right from the point of view of the PC. Begin Station: is the station assigned to the PC Point.
,. 8 9

: accesses the Backsight Setup screen (Page R-72).

0 9 : takes you to the second Stake Curve and Offset screen, described below.

R-131

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Curve and Offset Screen Two

Station to Stake: is the desired station on the curve that you want to stake. Station Interval: is the value that is added to the Station to Stake after the 0 9 $9,9 43 button is pressed. : advances the Station to Stake by the Station Interval.
0 9 $9,9 43

Offset: is the horizontal distance of the offset from the specified curve. The offset occurs on the left (while viewing the curve from the PC) when the L is selected or on the right when the R is selected. Note: An offset of zero would result in the specified curve being staked.
' 11809 : will result in the elevations for the design points to be adjusted by the value entered here and will change the cut / fill values accordingly. Design elevations will be lower when D is selected, and higher when U is selected. 7,/0 : specifies a slope from the specified curve to the curve that is being staked. When this is a non-zero value, the elevation for the staked points will increasingly differ from the corresponding design elevations on the specified curve as the Offset value increases.

 

Height of Rod: is the length of the rod.

,. $4 ;0

: returns to the previous screen. : accesses the third Stake Curve and Offset screen, described

next. Note: A motorized total station will automatically turn toward the design point after tapping $4 ;0 , depending on the configuration of the Stakeout Settings screen (Page R-33). R-132

Stakeout Menu

Curve and Offset Screen Three

Station: displays the current station that is being staked. H. Offset: displays the offset distance of the curve being staked from the specified curve and if it is on the Right or Left side of the specified curve. Angle Right: is the horizontal angle that the total station must aim toward so that it is facing the current station. Horz. distance: is the horizontal distance from the occupy point to the current station. Vert Distance: is the vertical distance from the occupy point to the current station. ZE to Rod: is the zenith angle that the total station must aim toward so that it is facing the current station.
 7. 0 074 : is used to modify the circle on the total station so that the angle right reading will be zero when it is facing toward the design point, which can sometimes be easier than turning to an obscure angle value. When this button is tapped, the following actions will occur:

1. A new backsight circle value is computed, sent to the instrument and stored in the raw data. 2. The Angle Right value is changed to zero to reflect the change. The instrument now needs to be turned horizontally to zero to face the design point. 3. To prevent errors, the backsight set up is invalidated when exiting the Stakeout dialog if this button has been used. A circle zeroed on a design point is meaningless once the design point has been staked. Note: The  7. 0 total station.
074

button is not available when using a robotic

R-133

Survey Pro Reference Manual

,.

: returns to the previous screen.

$9, 0  : accesses the next screen, which is identical to the third Stake Points screen, described on Page R-108.

Screen Summary
Screen One is used to define the primary curve used to determine the location of the curve to be staked and the station associated with the PC Point. Screen Two is used to define the offset distance and location, the station to be staked and the station interval. Screen Three provides the distance and direction information to the current station to be staked from the occupy point. Screen Four is used to stake the current station.

Stake Out Point (Tape Offset) Dialog Box

The Store Point (Tape Offset) dialog box allows you to store a point at a specified offset from the stake point, resulting in a point that is either closer to, or further away from the total station. Point: is the name assigned to the new offset point. Description: is the description assigned to the new offset point. Tape Out/Tape In: is the specified offset from the stake point. A positive value will result in a new point that is further away from the total station. The default value is the appropriate distance correction to the design point. : stores the new offset point.

R-134

Stakeout Menu

Stake Spiral and Offset

$9, 04:9 $5 7, ,3/ 11809

The Stake Spiral and Offset screen allows you to stake stations at fixed intervals on a spiral curve, or at an offset to it. Start Point: is the point associated with the beginning of the spiral curve. This can either be the TS or the CS, which is specified later in this screen (see below). | %,3 039 0,7 3 : defines the tangent azimuth or bearing at the entrance to the spiral
%,3 039  2

| 0 700 7. | 0 700  47/ : defines the radius, degree arc, or degree chord of the curve, respectively.
#,/ :8

Length: is the length of the spiral curve. Begin Station: is the station associated with the Start Point. Turn: defines if the curve turns toward the Left or Right from the point of view of the Start Point. Spiral: defines the direction of the spiral curve by the following options: TS to SC: the spiral begins at the tangent (Tangent to Spiral) and ends at the circular curve (Spiral to Curve). CS to ST: the spiral begins at the circular curve (Curve to Spiral) and ends at the tangent (Spiral to Tangent).

R-135

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Stake Spiral and Offset Screen Two

Station to Stake: is the desired station on the spiral curve that you want to stake. Station Interval: is the value that is added to the Station to Stake after the 0 9 $9,9 43 button is pressed. : advances the Station to Stake by the Station Interval.
0 9 $9,9 43

Offset: is the horizontal distance of the offset from the spiral curve. The offset occurs on the left (while viewing the spiral from the Start Point) when the L is selected or on the right when R is selected. Note: An offset of zero would result in the spiral curve itself being staked.
' 11809 : will result in the elevations for the design points to be adjusted by the value entered here and will change the cut / fill values accordingly. Design elevations will be lower when is selected, and higher when U is selected. 7,/0 : specifies a slope from the spiral curve to the curve that is being staked. When this is a non-zero value, the elevation for the staked points will increasingly differ from the corresponding design elevations on the spiral curve as the Offset value increases.

 

Height of rod: is the length of the rod.

,. 8 ,. $4 ;0 9

: accesses the Backsight Setup screen (Page R-72).

: returns to the previous screen. : accesses the third screen, described next.

R-136

Stakeout Menu Note: A motorized total station will automatically turn toward the design point after pressing $4 ;0 depending on the configuration of the Stakeout Settings screen (Page R-33).

Stake Spiral and Offset Screen Three

Station: displays the current station that is being staked. H. Offset: displays the offset distance of the spiral curve being staked from the specified spiral curve and if it is on the Right or Left side of the specified spiral curve. Angle Right: is the horizontal angle that the total station must aim toward so that it is facing the current station. Horz Dist: is the horizontal distance from the occupy point to the current station. Vert Dist: is the vertical distance from the occupy point to the current station. ZE to Rod: is the zenith angle that the total station must aim toward so that it is facing the current station.
 7. 0 074 : is used to modify the circle on the total station so that the angle right reading will be zero when it is facing toward the design point, which can sometimes be easier than turning to an obscure angle value. When this button is tapped, the following actions will occur:

1. A new backsight circle value is computed, sent to the instrument and stored in the raw data 2. The Angle Right value is changed to zero to reflect the change. The instrument now needs to be turned horizontally to zero to face the design point.

R-137

Survey Pro Reference Manual 3. To prevent errors, the backsight set up is invalidated when exiting the Stakeout dialog if this button has been used. A circle zeroed on a design point is meaningless once the design point has been staked. Note: The  7. 0 total station.
,. $9, 0  074

button is not available when using a robotic

: returns to the previous screen.

: accesses the next screen, which is identical to the third Stake Points screen, described on Page R-108.

Stake Spiral and Offset Screen Summary

Screen One is used to define the primary spiral curve used to determine the location of the curve to be staked and the station associated with the Start Point. Screen Two is used to define the offset distance and location, the station to be staked and the station interval. Screen Three provides the distance and direction information to the current station to be staked from the occupy point. Screen Four is used to stake the current station.

R-138

Stakeout Menu

Show Station and Offset

$9, 04:9 $ 4 $9,9 43

The Show Station and Offset routine allows you to take a shot to a prism that is positioned anywhere near a polyline, a range of points that define a line, or an alignment to see where the prism is located in relation to the line.
%,5 30 : allows you to tap an existing polyline or alignment that the station and offset will be computed from. %4742 : allows you to enter a range of points that define the line where the station and offset will be computed from.

Begin Station: is the station assigned to the beginning of the line. : accesses the Backsight Setup screen (Page R-72).
,. 8 9

: takes you to the next Show Station and Offset screen where the slope staking parameters are set up.
0 9 

R-139

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Show Station and Offset Screen Two

The second Show Station and Offset screen is used to take a shot to the prism and view the data. Height of Rod: is the length of the rod. Coarse EDM (Fast Shot): When checked, sets the total station to coarse mode for faster, but slightly less-precise measurements. Station: displays the station at the rod position. Offset Dist: displays the perpendicular offset from the centerline to the rod position. Elev: displays the elevation at the rod position. Offset: displays if the rod position is to the right of the line, left of the line, or on the line. Segment: displays the name of the templates segment at the rod position. Shot Data: displays the angles and distance measured by the total station from the last shot.
$ 49

: takes a shot to the prism. : returns to the previous screen. : stores the stake point.

,. $9470

R-140

Stakeout Menu

Store Offset Points

$9, 04:9 $9470 11809 !4 398

The Store Offset Points screen is used to store points in the current job at a specified offset from an existing polyline or alignment at a specified interval.
%,5 30 : allows you to tap an existing polyline or alignment that the station and offset will be computed from. %4742 : allows you to enter a range of points that define the line where the station and offset will be computed from.

Begin Station: is the station assigned to the beginning of the line. : takes you to the next Store Offset Points screen where the slope staking parameters are set up.
0 9 

Store Offset Points Screen Two

The second Store Offset Points screen is used to define the road profile, or offset distances that will be used to compute the offset point coordinates. 1/2 Road Width: is the Left and Right width of the road, respectively, from the centerline to the edge of payment. X-Slope (%): is the Left and Right slope of the road, respectively, from the centerline to the edge of payment calculated from
Rise Run 100 .

R-141

Survey Pro Reference Manual Note: A negative slope will result in water running from the centerline toward the edge of payment. Stake Curb / Ditch: When checked, a curb or ditch and an offset can be defined beyond the edge of the pavement. Height: is the height of the curb or ditch in feet or meters. A positive value is considered a curb and a negative value a ditch. Offset From Edge of Road: is the distance that the curb or ditch extends from the edge of pavement. Note: The specified curb or ditch height and offset will be applied to both sides of the road.
,. 0 9 

: returns to the previous screen. : accesses the next screen.

R-142

Stakeout Menu

Store Offset Points Screen Three

The third Store Offset Points screen is used to define which offset points will be stored. From Station: is the station where the stored offset points will begin. To Station: is the station where the stored offset points will end. Station Interval: is the distance between the stations where offset points are stored. Note: If the Stake Corners option is selected in the Stakeout Settings screen, offset points will also be stored where ever the horizontal or vertical section of the road changes. Start Point: is the point number that will be assigned to the first offset point that is stored. Each stored point that follows will be assigned the next available point number. Description: is the description that will be assigned to all the offset points that are stored. Center Line: offset points will be stored at locations on the centerline when checked. Edge of Pavement: offset points will be stored at the end of the first segment (the edge of the roadbed) on the left and/or right side when checked. Curb: offset point will be stored at the end of the second segment (the end of the curb or ditch) on the left and/or right side when checked.
&380 0.9  ,. $9470

: quickly unchecks all the checkboxes.

: returns to the previous screen. : stores all the offset points based on the information provided. R-143

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Stake DTM
$9, 04:9 $9, 0 %

The Stake DTM routine allows you to stake an area and get cut / fill and volume information based on a reference DTM or specified elevation datum. The routine requires either a DXF file containing a triangulated irregular network (TIN), or a digital terrain model (DTM) file for the area that you plan to stake, which is typically created from a previous topo job. This file will contain the elevation information at every location within the boundary of the original topo. The DXF file can be created by opening the original job in TDS ForeSight and exporting the job to a DXF file. ForeSight provides several options for the information that is written to the DXF file, but all the options will include the required 3-D Face, or TIN information when exporting to a DXF file. Both TDS ForeSight and Survey Link will export a DTM file from a DXF file. Note: The speed performance of the Stake DTM routine is enhanced when using a DTM file as opposed to a DXF file. DTM File: displays the selected DTM or DXF file.
74 80

: allows you to select a DXF or DTM

file.

R-144

Stakeout Menu

Warning: If importing a DXF or DTM file where the distance units in the source file are different than the distance units for the current job, the imported coordinates will be converted to the current jobs distance units when they are imported. This is normally the desired result, but it can cause a problem if the distance units for the imported data or the current job were set incorrectly. This situation can most commonly occur when working with Feet and US Survey Feet, where the conversion from one to the other is not always obvious. Usually the difference between Feet and US Survey Feet is negligible (2 parts per million), but when dealing with State Plane or UTM mapping plane coordinates, which are often very large in magnitude, the difference can be substantial if the coordinates are converted from one format to the other. If importing coordinates from a source where you are not sure if the units are in Feet or US Survey Feet into a job that is set to Feet or US Survey Feet, you will usually just want to import them without any conversion being performed. To do this, be sure to select the same distance units for the source file as those set for the current job. HR: is the rod height. With C.L.: When checked, offset and stationing information from the selected centerline to the stake point is also provided in the DTM Shot screen.
03907 30 : will open the Select Line screen where an existing polyline can be selected that describes the centerline.

Store Point: is the starting point number if points are stored during the staking process. Future points are stored with the next available point names. Generate TIN w\Staked Points: will add any staked points to the TIN so the shape of the DTM can be viewed at any time in the 3D View screen and live cut / fill values can be viewed. When unchecked, the 3D View is unavailable and cut / fill values cannot be viewed, but are still stored to the raw data file. R-145

Survey Pro Reference Manual Note: Viewing the DTM during DTM Stakeout is a useful quality assurance technique to determine where additional points are needed.
 % : accesses the 3D View screen (Page R-64) where a 3D view of the DTM can be viewed from any angle. ,. 8 9 : accesses the Backsight Setup screen (Page R-72) where the current backsight can be modified. $4 ;0 : opens the DTM Shot screen where the DTM area can be staked.

Select Line
$9, 04:9 $9, 0 % $4 ;0

The Select Line screen is used to select a particular polyline. Separate overhead and side views are displayed on the right side of the screen for the selected polyline. Simply select the desired line and tap .

R-146

Stakeout Menu

DTM Shot
$9, 04:9 $9, 0 % $4 ;0

The DTM Shot screen displays all relevant information on the current rod position and a graphic that shows the rod location, backsight, the occupied TIN triangle, and the rectangular DTM corners that encompass the DTM boundary. Note: the DTM boundary corners and TIN triangle are not always visible depending on the current scale of the screen.
%, 0 $ 49 : triggers the total station to take a shot to the prism.

Note: You must be within the boundary of the DTM before any cut / fill information is provided.
 ' 0 : accesses the 3D View screen (Page R-64) where a 3D view of the DTM can be viewed from any angle as well as cut / fill information for the current location.

Note: The  ' 0 button is only available when Generate TIN w\Staked Points is checked in the previous screen and at least three stake points have been stored.
$9470 : stores a point for the current rod location with the point name shown in the St Pt field and the description in the Desc field. Also advances the St Pt to the next available point name.

St Pt: is the point name that will be assigned to the next stored point. Desc: is the description that will be assigned to the next stored point. HR: is the height of the rod. R-147

Survey Pro Reference Manual Data: shows the angle and distance information from the previous shot. Result: shows the current northing, easting, and elevation of the rod as well as the computed elevation of the DTM at the current location and the cut or fill necessary to bring the elevation at the current location to the elevation of the DTM at the current location.

C.L.: shows the current station and offset information for the rod location relative to the centerline selected from the previous screen. The type of line segment in the polyline at the current station is also displayed. (This card is only available if the With C.L. checkbox was checked in the previous screen.) Note: If the DTM EL and Cut / Fill fields are blank after taking a shot, it indicates the rod is outside the DTM boundary.

Note: Tapping anywhere within the map view will open a larger map view, which provides zoom controls.

R-148

Stakeout Menu

Define a Location
$9, 04:9 01 30 , 4.,9 43

The Define a Location screen is used to manually enter the distance and direction to a new point from any existing reference point and then stakeout the new point. From Point: is the reference point that the specified angle and distance information is applied to for locating the new point. / 0,7 3 : is the direction from the reference point to the new point.
 2:9

+/- Angle: is the angle to be added to the specified azimuth or bearing, thus modifying the direction to the new point. Note: To subtract an angle from the specified azimuth or bearing, enter a negative +/- Angle value. Horiz. Dist: is the horizontal distance from the reference point to the new point. Vert. Dist: is the vertical distance from the reference point to the new point. Store point: When this is checked, the computed point will be stored with the name specified here.
$4 ;0 : will compute the location for the new point and access the next screen.

R-149

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Define a Location Screen Two

The second Define a Location screen displays the direction and distance information from the occupy point to the new point. Ref. Point: is the reference point specified in the From Point field in the previous screen. Description: is the description for the reference point. From Gun to Location: displays the angle and distance information from the total station to the new point. Users would aim their non-robotic total station the direction specified here.
 7. 0 074 : is used to modify the circle on the total station so that the angle right reading will be zero when it is facing toward the design point, which can sometimes be easier than turning to an obscure angle value. When this button is tapped, the following actions will occur:

1. A new backsight circle value is computed, sent to the instrument and stored in the raw data 2. The Angle Right value is changed to zero to reflect the change. The instrument now needs to be turned horizontally to zero to face the design point. 3. To prevent errors, the backsight set up is invalidated when exiting the Stakeout dialog if this button has been used. A Circle zeroed on a design point is meaningless once the design point has been staked. Note: The  7. 0 total station.
,. 074

button is not available when using a robotic

: returns to the previous screen.

$9, 0  : accesses the third Define a Location screen where the new point can be staked out.

R-150

Stakeout Menu Note: The third Define a Location screen is identical to the third Stake Points screen, which is described on Page R-108.

Where is Next Point

$9, 04:9 070 8 0 9 !4 39

or

Ctrl

-[S]

The Where is Next Point screen is used to assist the rod person in locating another point, given the current rod point, a reference point, and the point to locate. Current Rod Pt: is the current rod point. Next FS Point: is the point that the rod person wants to locate. Increment: is added to the Next FS Point value after pressing the 0 9 !4 39  button. (A negative integer can be entered to have point numbers advance in descending order.)
0 9 !4 39  : advances the Next FS Point value by the specified Increment, replaces the current rod point by the previous FS point, and accesses

Screen Two. Note: If the Next FS Point does not exist and the Increment value=1, pressing the 0 9 !4 39 button will access the next existing point. If the Increment is greater than one and the next point does not exist, a warning is displayed.
#010703.0 !4 39 / #010703.0  2 : is the reference point / azimuth used to determine the direction to the Next FS Point. $4 ;0  : computes the direction and distance to the Next FS Point and accesses the second screen.

R-151

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Where is Next Point Screen Two

This screen shows two graphics that indicate the direction and distance that the rod person must travel to reach the Next FS Point. The clock-style graphic shows the current rod location at the center, a line in the 12 oclock position indicates the direction to the Reference, and an arrow shows the direction to the Next FS Point. There is also a text indicator that explains the direction to travel in a clock format. The second graphic is a map view that shows the Current Rod Point, the Reference and the Next FS Point. It also shows the Occupy Point if the backsight has been set. The lower left portion of the screen displays the azimuth from the rod to the Next FS Point and the horizontal distance between them.
,. 430

: returns you to the first screen. : closes the screen.

R-152

Inverse Menu
The Inverse Menu contains routines that compute the direction and distance between two objects. The following screens are available from the Inverse Menu:

A: Inverse Point to Point B: Inverse Point to Line C: Inverse Point to Polyline D: Inverse Point to Multiple Points E: Inverse Point to Location / Point

R-153

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Inverse Point to Point

3;0780 !4 39 94 !4 39

or

Ctrl

-[G]

The Inverse Point to Point screen will calculate the distance and direction between two existing points. Begin Point: is the reference point used to compute the distance and direction to the End Point. End Point: is the point whose relationship to the Begin Point is computed.
$0 0.9 1742 ,5 : allows you to quickly select both the Begin Point and End Point from a map view. The first point tapped is entered as the Begin Point and the second as the End Point. $4 ;0 : will compute the distance and direction from the Begin Point to the End Point.

Results
Azimuth: is the azimuth from the Begin Point to the End Point. Horz Dist: is the horizontal distance from the Begin Point to the End Point. Vert Dist: is the vertical distance from the Begin Point to the End Point. Slope Dist: is the slope distance from the Begin Point to the End Point. North: is the change in the Y-coordinate from the Begin Point to the End Point. East: is the change in the X-coordinate from the Begin Point to the End Point. Elevation: is the change in elevation from the Begin Point to the End Point. R-154

Inverse Menu Grade: is the slope from the Begin Point to the End Point.

Inverse Point to Line

3;0780 !4 39 94 30

The Inverse Point to Line screen computes the perpendicular offset distance and direction from a known point to a continuous line defined by two points or one point and a direction. Inverse Point: is the known point that the offset information to a specified line is computed. Begin Station: is the beginning station value that corresponds with the Start of Line, which is used to compute the inverse station in the results. Start of Line: is the first point that defines the line from which the offset is computed.
!4 39 /  70.9 43 : is the second point or known direction that defines the line from which the offset is computed.

Store Point: When checked, will store the coordinates for the point located on the specified line, tangent to the offset. : will compute the distance and direction of the offset from the known point perpendicular to the specified line.
$4 ;0

Results
Inv. Station: is the station on the specified line where the perpendicular offset occurs, starting from the Begin Station. Offset: is the horizontal distance of the perpendicular offset between the Inverse point and specified line. Offset is: indicates if the Inverse point is located to the Right, Left, or on the specified line as you occupy Point 1 and face the second point or direction of the line. R-155

Survey Pro Reference Manual Azimuth (pt to line): is the azimuth of the offset from the Inverse point toward the specified line. North: is the Y-coordinate on the specified line, tangent to the perpendicular offset. East: is the X-coordinate on the specified line, tangent to the perpendicular offset. Elevation: is the elevation on the specified line, tangent to the perpendicular offset.

Inverse Point to Polyline

3;0780 !4 39 94 !4 30

The Inverse Point to Polyline screen computes the offset distance from a known point perpendicular to a polyline. Inverse Point: is the known point that the offset to a polyline segment is computed. Begin Station: is the starting station assigned to the beginning of the polyline, which is used to compute the Station in the results.
%,5 !4 30 : allows you to tap an existing polyline from a map view. / 947 : accesses the Polyline Editor (Page R-45) where a new polyline can be created or an existing polyline can be modified. %,5 !4 398 : provides a map view where you can tap any existing points to create a temporary polyline.

R-156

Inverse Menu
%4742

: provides point selection by entering point names.

Store Point: When checked, will store the first solution where a perpendicular offset intersects with a polyline using the specified point name. If additional solutions are found, the following solutions will be stored using consecutive point names.
$4 ;0 : will compute the distance and direction of the offset from the known point perpendicular to the polyline.

Note: There is no solution if a perpendicular offset does not occur within the extents of any selected polyline segments.

Results
Station: is the station along the polyline where the offset occurs, starting from the Begin station. Offset: is the horizontal distance of the offset. Offset is: indicates if the Inverse Point is located to the right, left, or on the specified line as you occupy the beginning of the polyline and face the end. Segment Type: shows if the segment is a line, arc, or spiral. Beg. Pt: if applicable, this is the first point selected that defines a line. End Pt: if applicable, this is the second point selected that defines a line.

R-157

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Inverse Point to Multiple Points

3;0780 : 9 5 0 !4 398

The Inverse Point to Multiple Points screen will calculate the distance and direction from an existing point to one or more other points. Inverse point: is the reference point used to compute the distance and direction to the other points.
%,5 !4 398 : provides a map view where you can tap multiple points. %4742

: provides selection of points by point

name.
$4 ;0 : will compute the distance and direction from the Inverse point to all selected points.

Results
Azimuth: is the azimuth from the Inverse Point to the selected point. Horz Dist: is the horizontal distance from the Inverse Point to the selected point. Vert Dist: is the vertical distance from the Inverse Point to the selected point. Slope Dist: is the slope distance from the Inverse Point to the selected point. North: is the change in the Y-coordinate from the Inverse Point to the selected point. East: is the change in the X-coordinate from the Inverse Point to the selected point. R-158

Inverse Menu

Inverse Point to Location / Point

3;0780 4.,9 43  !4 39

The Inverse Point to Location / Point screen will calculate the distance and direction from any point or location to another point or location. Begin: is the reference point or location used to compute the distance and direction to another point or location. End: is the other point or location whose correlation to the Begin point or location is computed. Each location is defined by one of the following methods:
4.,9 43 : when selected, the coordinates for any location can be entered in the appropriate fields.

!4 39 : when selected, any existing point name can be entered in the appropriate field or selected from a map view.

Store Pt.: When checked, will store a point for the location(s) entered.
$4 ;0 : will compute the distance and direction from the Begin point or location to the End point or location.

R-159

Cogo Menu
The Cogo Menu contains all of the coordinate geometry routines used to perform computations from the existing job data. The following screens are available from the Cogo Menu:

A: Point in Direction B: Intersection C: Offset Line D: Offset Points E: Corner Angle F: Compute Area G: Triangle Solutions H: Map Check I: Predetermined Area

J: HD/VD to SD/ZA K: SD/ZA to HD/VD

R-161

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Point in Direction
4 4 !4 39 3  70.9 43

The Point in Direction screen will calculate and store the position of a new point after providing a distance and direction from a known point. From point: is the point name of the reference point used for locating the new point.
 2:9 / 0,7 3 : is the direction from the reference point to the new point.

+/- Angle: is the angle added to the Azimuth / Bearing to modify the direction to the new point. Note: To subtract an angle from the specified azimuth or bearing, enter a negative +/- Angle value. Horiz. Dist: is the horizontal distance from the reference point to the new point. Vert. Dist: is the vertical distance from the reference point to the new point. Store point: When this is checked, the computed point will be stored with the name specified here.
$4 ;0

: will compute the location for, and optionally store the new

point.

R-162

Cogo Menu

Intersection
4 4 390780.9 43

The Intersection screen computes, and optionally stores, the coordinates for the intersection of two lines, where the lines are tangent to existing points. Each line is independently defined by a known direction or a known length. (See illustration below.)

Point 1 Point 1 Point 2

Point 2 Point 1

Point 2

Direction - Direction Intersection

Direction - Distance Intersection

Distance - Distance Intersection

Point 1: is an existing point that is tangent to the first line. Point 2: is an existing point that is tangent to the second line.
 89,3.0 /  2 47 7 : is the length or direction, respectively, of the specific line.

Store point: When checked, is the point name used when storing the intersection(s) of the two lines. If two intersections occur, the second solution is stored using the next consecutive point name.
$4 ;0 : will compute the intersecting point, optionally store the point and display the information in the Map view.

R-163

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Offset Line
4 4 11809 30

The Offset Line screen is used to store points or an alignment that is parallel to an existing set of points, a polyline, or an alignment, at a specified perpendicular offset. Note: When storing points, the number of new points stored will equal the number of points in the selected polyline or point range. If the offset is from an alignment, the number of points stored will equal the number of nodes that occur in the horizontal portion of the alignment. : allows you to tap an existing polyline or alignment that the offset will be computed from.
%,5 30

: allows you to enter a range of points that define the line where the offset will be computed from.
%4742

Offset: defines the offset distance and which side the offset occurs. The right or left side is referenced from the first point that defines the specified line. Save to job as an alignment: when checked, the computed offset line will be saved as a new alignment under the name specified in the Description field. Note: Spiral curves cannot be generated in a new offset alignment. If the original centerline contains any spiral curves, they will be treated as straight sections in the offset alignment that is created. The Offset Staking or Offset Points routine should be used to stake offsets from a spiral curve.

R-164

Cogo Menu Store Pts: When checked, is the first point name that will be used when storing the computed offset points. Additional points will automatically be assigned with the next consecutive point name, such as 8, 9, 10 or Offset, Offset2, Offset3 Description: is the description that will be assigned to the new points that are generated or to the new alignment.
$4 ;0

: computes and stores the new offset points and polyline.

Offset Points
4 4 11809 !4 398

The Offset Points screen is used to store points at a specified perpendicular offset to an existing polyline, alignment, or point range. Points can be stored that correspond with the nodes of an alignment, points of a polyline, and/or at a specified station interval.
%,5 30 : allows you to tap an existing polyline or alignment that the offset points will be computed from. %4742 : allows you to enter a range of points that define the line where the offset will be computed from.

Offset: defines the offset distance and which side the offset occurs. The right or left side is referenced from the first point that defines the selected line. Store Pts: When checked, will store the offset points that are computed based on the selected line and which of the two following checkboxes are checked. R-165

Survey Pro Reference Manual Note: Leaving the Store Pts field unchecked and solving the screen will result in a map screen that displays the points that would be stored, but without actually storing anything to the job. This is useful for testing the routine before storing information. Store Nodes: When checked, computes offset points that correspond to each node in the selected alignment (points where the horizontal or vertical alignment change), or that correspond to the existing points in a selected line or point range. Sta. Intervals: When checked, computes offset points from the beginning of the selected line or point range, and at each specified station interval along the line or point range. Description: is the description that will be assigned to all points that are stored. : computes the offset points, and stores them if the Store Pts checkbox is checked.
$4 ;0

R-166

Cogo Menu

Corner Angle
4 4 47307 3 0

or

Ctrl

-[H]

The Corner Angle screen provides information on the horizontal angle created from three known points. Backsight: is an end point of the angle to be solved. Middle Point: is the corner point of the angle to be solved. Foresight Point: is the other end point of the angle to be solved
$0 0.9 1742 ,5 : Allows you to quickly select all of the above points from a map view. The first point tapped is entered in the Backsight field, the second in the Middle Point field and the third point tapped is entered in the End Point field. $4 ;0 : will compute the following results that describe the angle defined by the three points provided.

Results
Angle left: is the horizontal angle created as you occupy the Middle Point, face the Backsight, and turn counterclockwise to the Foresight Point. Angle right: is the horizontal angle created as you occupy the Middle Point, face the Backsight, and turn clockwise to the Foresight Point. 180 right: is the angle that results from subtracting the angle right value from 180. HD to Beg.: is the horizontal distance between the Backsight and the Middle Point. HD to End: is the horizontal distance between the Foresight Point and the Middle Point. R-167

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Compute Area
4 4 425:90 70,

Allows you to compute the area of a selected boundary. : allows you to tap an existing polyline from a map view.
%,5 30 %4742

: provides selection of points by point

name.
$4 ;0 : will compute the area of the selected boundary.

Results
Area: is the area that the boundary encloses. If the boundary is not closed, the area is computed as if a line joined the two ends. Length: is the length of the selected boundary. Perimeter: is the length of the selected boundary, plus any additional length between the two ends of an open boundary.

R-168

Cogo Menu

Triangle Solutions
4 4 %7 ,3 0 $4 :9 438

or

Ctrl

-[I]

The Triangle Solutions screen will solve for the unknown parts of a triangle after providing three known parts. Triangle Solution: is where you select the parts of the triangle that are known. You can select any of the following from the dropdown list: Side-Side-Side: The lengths of all three sides are known. Angle-Side-Angle: Two angles and the side between them are known. Side-Angle-Angle: Two angles and one side (that does not lie between those angles) are known.

Side-Angle-Side: Two sides and the angle between them are known. Side-Side-Angle: Two sides and one angle (that is not between those sides) are known. will solve for the unknown parts of the triangle.

$4 ;0

Results
Side a / b / c: displays the length of each side. Angle A / B / C: displays the corresponding angle. Area: displays the area of the triangle in square feet and acres, or in square meters and hectares.

R-169

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Map Check
4 4 ,5  0. 

The Map Check screen is used to manually enter boundaries from a map to check for closure and other information related to the boundary.
/ 9 : accesses the appropriate editor screen where you can edit the selected line or curve from the list. 0 090  0,7

: deletes the selected line segment.

: clears all line entries. : accesses the Results page.

 48:70

// 30 : accesses the Add / Edit Line screen, (Page R-171), where a new line can be added prior to the select segment. // 7. : accesses the Add / Edit Curve screen (Page R-171) where a new curve can be added prior to the selected segment. // 94 ,5 : accesses the Add to Map screen (Page R-172) where the map data entered in the list can be added to the current job as a polyline.

Results
Area: is the area that the boundary encloses. If the start and end points are in different locations, the area is computed as if a line joined these two points. Length: is the length of the boundary from the first point to the last point. Perimeter: is the length of the boundary from the first point to the last point, plus any additional length between the last point and the first point. R-170

Cogo Menu Error dist.: is the distance between the last point and the first point. Error azm: is the direction from the last point to the first point Precision: is the ratio between the Error distance and Perimeter.

Add / Edit Line

The Add / Edit Line screen is used to enter a new line to the list prior to the selected line segment. line.

2:9

0,7 3

: is the direction of the

Length: is the length of the line, in feet or meters. : enters the line to the list. : closes the screen without entering any new line data.
,3.0

Add / Edit Curve

The Add / Edit Curve screen is used to enter a new curve to the list prior to the selected line segment.
#,/ :8 : The distance from the radius point to the curve 0 9, : The internal angle from center to tangent points 0 700 7. : The internal angle equivalent to a 100-ft arc length 0 700  47/ : The internal angle equivalent to a 100-ft chord length 03 9  47/

: The arc length : The chord length R-171

Survey Pro Reference Manual

%,3 039

: The distance from the PC or PT to the PI

/ 7/ 3,90 : The distance between the curve and the chord at the center of the curves length.  9073,  2:9

: The minimum distance between the PI and the curve. /

0,7 3

: defines the direction of the curve, tangent at the

PC. Turn: defines if the curve turns to the Left or Right while viewing the curve from the PC Point. : appends the curve to the list.

Add to Map
The Add to Map screen is used to add the existing line and curve data to the current job as a polyline. Description: is the name that will be assigned to the new polyline that will be added to the project. : can be used to manually enter the coordinates for the first point of the polyline.
4.,9 43

 

: can be used to define the starting location of the first point of the polyline by an existing point.
!4 39

Store Points: is the first point name that will be used for the new points that are needed to add the figure to the current job. All additional points will be incremented from this point. : adds the figure to the job at the specified location.
,3.0

: closes the screen without adding any new data to the job.

R-172

Cogo Menu

Predetermined Area
4 4 !70/09072 30/ 70,

4 (hinge) 1 ?

The Predetermined Area routine will take a boundary with one open side and compute the location of a line that will enclose the boundary with a specified area using the Hinge Method or the Parallel Method. The Hinge Method computes the location of the side of a boundary that can pivot on a fixed point. The Parallel Method computes the location of one side of a foursided boundary where the computed side is parallel to a stationary side of the boundary.

Hinge Method

The top-left field is used to enter the desired area of the specified boundary. In the next field, select the units entered from the dropdown list. Hinge: solves the boundary using the Hinge Method when selected. Parallel: solves the boundary using the Parallel Method when selected.

4 1

: allows you to tap an existing polyline from a map view to define the fixed sides of the boundary.
%,5 !4 30

Parallel Method

Note: a boundary has two fixed sides and one side defined by a direction when using the Hinge Method. It has one fixed side and two sides defined by a direction when using the Parallel Method.
/ 947 : accesses the Polyline Editor (Page R45) where a new polyline can be created or an existing polyline can be modified. %,5 !4 398 : provides a map view where you can tap any existing points to define the fixed sides of the boundary.

R-173

Survey Pro Reference Manual

%4742

: provides point selection by entering point names.

Store Pt 1 / 2: When checked, will store a point at the location of the end point(s) of the computed boundary line.
 2:9 / 0,7 3 : defines the direction of the boundary sides with lengths that are not yet known.

Results
Point 1 / 2: Displays the coordinate of the end points of the computed boundary line. Total Area: is the total area of the boundary. Plot Area: is the area enclosed by the pre-defined fixed boundary lines. Difference: is the difference between the Total Area and the Plot Area.

R-174

Cogo Menu

HD/VD to SD/ZA
4 4 ' 94 $ 

The HD/VD to SD/ZA screen will convert a vertical and horizontal distance to an equivalent slope distance and zenith angle. Horz Dist: is the horizontal distance from the occupy point to the foresight point. Vert Dist: is the vertical distance from the occupy point to the foresight point. HI: is the distance that the total station is above the ground. HR: is the length of the rod. Earth Curvature Adjust: When checked, the resulting zenith angle and slope distance will account for the curvature of the earth and refraction.
$4 ;0 : computes the equivalent slope distance and zenith angle from the data entered.

Results
Zenith: is the computed zenith angle from the occupy point to the foresight point. Slope Dist: is the computed slope distance from the occupy point to the foresight point.

R-175

Survey Pro Reference Manual

SD/ZA to HD/VD
4 4 $  94 '

The SD/ZA to HD/VD screen will convert a slope distance and zenith angle to an equivalent horizontal distance and vertical distance. Slope Dist: is the slope distance to be converted. Zenith: is the zenith angle to be converted. HI: is the distance that the total station is above the ground. HR: is the length of the rod. Earth Curvature Adjust: When checked, the computed horizontal distance and vertical distance will account for the curvature of the earth and refraction.

R-176

Curve Menu
The Curve Menu contains routines that will compute all aspects of a horizontal curve and assist in curve layout. A: Curve Solution B: PI and Tangents C: 3-Point Curve D: Radius Point E: Tangent to Circle F: Curve Layout G: Traverse on Curve H: Parabolic Curve I: Parabolic Layout

J: Straight Grade K: Spiral L: Spiral Layout M: Traverse on Spiral

R-177

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Curve Solution
:7;0 :7;0 $4 :9 43

or

Ctrl

-[M]

The Curve Solution screen provides detailed information on a curve when two parts of the curve are known. The first known part of the curve is defined by one of the following:
#,/ :8 : is the distance from the radius point to the curve. 0 9,

: is the deflection angle.

0 700 7. : is the deflection angle that results in a 100-ft. arc length. 0 700  47/ : is the deflection angle that results in a 100-ft. chord length.

The second known part of the curve is defined by one of the following:
0 9,

: is the deflection angle. : is the arc length. : is the chord length. : is the distance from the PC or PT to the PI.

03 9  47/

%,3 039

/ 7/ 3,90 : is the distance between the curve and the chord at the center of the curves length.  9073,

: The minimum distance between the PI and the curve.

$4 ;0

: Computes the details for the horizontal curve.

, 4:9 : Accesses the Horizontal Curve Layout screen (Page R-183) where points can be created so the curve can be staked in the field. %7,;0780

: Accesses the Traverse on Curve screen (Page R-190).

R-178

Curve Menu

Results:
Radius: is the distance from the radius point to the curve. Length: is the arc length. Chord: is the chord length. Deg. Arc: is the deflection angle that results in a 100-ft. arc length. Deg. Chord: is the deflection angle that results in a 100-ft. chord length. Delta: is the deflection angle. Tangent: is the distance from the PC or PT to the PI.
Deflection Angle (Delta) Ta ng Length of Curv ent e Mid-Ordinate Long Chord PT EC PI

n Ta 100 Arc
PC BC
100 ord Ch
rd C ho

nt ge

External: is the minimum distance between the PI and the curve. Mid Ord.: is the distance between the curve and the chord at the center of the curves length. External: (not shown) The minimum distance between the PI and the curve.

g. De rc g. A De
Fillet Sector Segment

Ra diu s

Segment: is the area between the arc length and the chord. Sector: is the area between the arc length and the two edge radii. Fillet: is the area between the arc length and the tangents.

Ra diu s
Delta

R-179

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Known PI and Tangents

:7;0 ! ,3/ %,3 0398

The PI and Tangents screen is used to compute and store the PC, PT, and radius points when the PI point and the direction of both tangents are known, along with one other curve attribute. PI Point: is the PI point.
 2 !
! / 7 !
! : is the direction of the tangent from the PI to the PC.  2 !
!% / 7 !
!% : is the direction of the tangent from the PI to the PT.

The remaining curve attribute can be defined with one of the following selections:
#,/ :8 : is the distance from the radius point to the curve. 0 9,

: is the deflection angle. : is the deflection angle that results in a 100-ft. arc : is the deflection angle that results in a 100-ft.

0 700 7.

length.
0 700  47/

chord length. Store PC: When checked, will store the computed PC point with the specified point name. Store RP: When checked, will store the computed radius point with the specified point name. Store PT: When checked, will store the computed PT point with the specified point name.

R-180

Curve Menu

Results:
Radius: is the distance from the radius point to the curve. Delta: is the deflection angle. Tangent: is the distance from the PC or PT to the PI.

Three Point Curve

:7;0  !4 39 :7;0

The Three Point Curve screen will compute the details of a curve when three points of the curve are specified; the PC, PT and any other point on the curve; or the PC, PT and radius point. First point: is the first point from the current job that defines the curve. The specified point can be either the PC or the Radius Point by selecting the appropriate radio button. Note: The selection made for the first point determines the available choices in the remaining fields. Pt. on Curve: is any point that lies on the curve between the PC and PT. PC: is the point that defines the beginning of the curve (Point of Curvature). PT: is the point that defines the end of the curve (Point of Tangency). Store RP: When checked, the radius point will be computed and stored with the name specified here. R-181

Survey Pro Reference Manual

$4 ;0

: will compute the curve based on the selected points.

%7,;0780 : accesses the Traverse on Curve screen (Page R-190), where the curve can be included in a traverse. , 4:9 : accesses the Curve Layout screen (Page R-183), where the location of points on a curve can be computed at any station interval.

Results:
Radius: is the distance from the radius point to the curve. Length: is the arc length. Chord: is the chord length. Delta: is the deflection angle. Tangent: is the distance from the PC or PT to the PI. Mid Ord.: is the distance between the curve and the chord at the center of the curves length. External: is the minimum distance between the PI and the curve. Deg. Arc: is the deflection angle that results in a 100-ft. arc length. Deg. Chord: is the deflection angle that results in a 100-ft. chord length. Segment: is the area between the arc length and the chord. Sector: is the area between the arc length and the two edge radii. Fillet: is the area between the arc length and the tangents.

R-182

Curve Menu

Compute Radius Point

:7;0 #,/ :8 !4 39

The Compute Radius Point screen is used to compute and optionally store the radius point for a curve when certain parts of the curve are known. PC Point: is the point that defines the beginning of the curve (Point of Curvature). PT Point: is the point that defines the end of the curve (Point of Tangency). Turn: specifies if the curve turns to the Left or Right as you face the curve from the PC. Arc: specifies if the arc is Small (less than 180) or Large (greater than 180). The final part of the curve is defined by one of the following choices:
#,/ :8 0 9,

: is the distance from the radius point to the curve.

: is the deflection angle. : is the deflection angle that results in a 100-ft. : is the deflection angle that results in a 100-ft.

0 700 7.

arc length.
0 700  47/

chord length. Store RP: When checked, the computed radius point will be stored with the name specified here.
$4 ;0

: computes the location of the radius point. : accesses the Curve Layout screen (Page R-185). : accesses the Traverse On Curve screen (Page R-190).

, 4:9 %7,;0780

R-183

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Results
Radius: is the distance from the radius point to the curve. Length: is the arc length. Chord: is the chord length. Deg. Arc: is the deflection angle that results in a 100-ft. arc length. Deg. Chord: is the deflection angle that results in a 100-ft. chord length. Delta: is the deflection angle. Tangent: is the distance from the PC or PT to the PI. External: is the minimum distance between the PI and the curve. Mid Ord.: is the distance between the curve and the chord at the center of the curves length. Segment: is the area between the arc length and the chord. Sector: is the area between the arc length and the two edge radii. Fillet: is the area between the arc length and the tangents.

R-184

Curve Menu

Line Tangent to Circle

:7;0 %,3 039 94  7. 0

Will compute the location of a line that is tangent to the specified sides of two specified circles. Tangent Line: determines which sides of the circles the computed line will be tangent to as you occupy the 1st Radius Point and face the 2nd Radius Point. (See illustration below.) 1st / 2nd Radius Pt: defines the points around which the circles are computed. Radius: defines the radius of the circles that are used to compute the Tangent Line. Store Tan Pt: When checked, will store the computed tangent points.
$4 ;0 : computes the location of the tangent line and optionally stores the two tangent points.

ad

iu s

ngent n 1st Ta t Tange Poin

ngent 2nd Ta t Poin t Line

Results
TP 1: displays the coordinates for the first tangent point. TP 2: displays the coordinates for the second tangent point. Azimuth: is the azimuth of the tangent line from the first tangent point to the second. Distance: is the length of the tangent line.
2

2nd Radius Pt.

1st Radius Pt.

Line Tangent to Circles solution illustrating the location of a Left-Left Tangent Line.

ad

iu

R-185

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Horizontal Curve Layout

:7;0 47  , 4:9

The Horizontal Layout screen is used to assist in the layout of a horizontal curve by computing the direction and distance to points on the curve using a variety of methods.

Method: The method determines how the points on the curve are laid out. Each method is described below. PC Deflection: provides deflection angles and distances to each station on the curve as if occupying the PC and backsighting the PI. The results are given in the following format: o o o o Station: is the current station on the curve. Deflection: is the angle to turn to the current station. Long chord: is the distance from the PC to the current station. Short chord: is the distance from the previous station to the current station.
RP
Cho rd

PT

Current Station PI

Deflection PC

PC Deflection

R-186

Curve Menu

PT

RP

Current P I to Station Sta tion PI io Deflect n

PI Deflection: provides deflection angles and distances to each station on the curve as if occupying the PI and backsight the PC. The results are given in the following format: o o o Station: is the current station on the curve. Deflection: is the angle to turn to the current station. PI to Station: is the distance from the PI to the current station.

PC

PI Deflection
PT

Current Station RP

Tangent Offset: provides perpendicular offset information from the tangent (the line from the PC to the PI) for each station on the curve. The results are given in the following format: o Station: is the current station on the curve Tan dist (TD): is the distance on the tangent, from the PC to the PI, or the PI to the PT, where the perpendicular offset occurs. Tan offset: is the distance, perpendicular to the tangent, to the curve at the particular station. Tan: is the length of the tangent (the distance from the PC to the PI). Tan TD: is the distance on the tangent, from the PI to the PC, or the PI to the PT, where the offset occurs R-187

is t

Ta n

n Ta O

PI

ng Ta

ffs et

Tan - TD

o
en t

PC

o
Tangent Offset

o o

Survey Pro Reference Manual Chord Offset: provides perpendicular offset information from the chord (the line from the PC to the PT) for each station on the curve. PC deflection information is also provided. The results are given in the following format: o o Station: is the current station on the curve.
RP PT

Chord Offset

Current Station

ngth

Chord dist.: is the distance on the long chord from the PC (toward the PT) where the perpendicular offset occurs. Chord offset: is the distance to the current station on the curve, perpendicular to the long chord. PC Deflection: is the angle to turn to the current station, as if occupying the PC and backsighting the PI. Chord Length: is the distance from the PC to the current station on the curve.

Chord Dist.

Cho

rd Le

PI

PC Deflection PC

Chord Offset

The first known part of the curve is defined by one of the following:
#,/ :8 0 9,

: is the distance from the radius point to the curve.

: is the deflection angle. : is the deflection angle that results in a 100-ft. arc : is the deflection angle that results in a 100-ft.

0 700 7.

length.
0 700  47/

chord length. The second known part of the curve is defined by one of the following:
0 9, 03 9  47/

: is the deflection angle. : is the arc length. : is the chord length. : is the distance from the PC or PT to the PI.

%,3 039

/ 7/ 3,90 : is the distance between the curve and the chord at the center of the curves length. R-188

Curve Menu
 9073,

: is the minimum distance between the PI and the curve.

PC Station: is the starting station assigned to the PC. Interval: When checked, all necessary information for each station at the specified interval on the curve will be computed. Start station: when not computing by interval (above), only the information for the particular station entered here is computed.
$4 ;0 : will solve and display all the details of the specified curve, without the layout information. $9,
$9,

: decreases the current station by the station interval. : increases the current station by the station interval.

, 4:9 : will solve and display the layout information for all the stations of the specified curve.

Results
Radius: is the distance from the radius point to the curve. Length: is the arc length. Chord: is the chord length. Delta: is the deflection angle. Tangent: is the distance from the PC or PT to the PI. Mid Ord.: is the distance between the curve and the chord at the center of the curves length. External: is the minimum distance between the PI and the curve. Deg. Arc: is the deflection angle that results in a 100-ft. arc length. Deg. Chord: is the deflection angle that results in a 100-ft. chord length. Segment: is the area between the arc length and the chord. Sector: is the area between the arc length and the two edge radii. Fillet: is the area between the arc length and the tangents.

R-189

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Traverse on Curve
:7;0 %7,; 43 :7;0

The Traverse on Curve screen will compute the PT and radius point for a curve when the tangent azimuth at a PC point is known. The first known part of the curve is defined by one of the following:
#,/ :8 : is the distance from the radius point to the curve. 0 9,

: is the deflection angle.

0 700 7. : is the deflection angle that results in a 100-ft. arc length. 0 700  47/ : is the deflection angle that results in a 100-ft. chord length.

The second known part of the curve is defined by one of the following:
0 9, 03 9  47/

: is the deflection angle. : is the arc length. : is the chord length. : is the distance from the PC or PT to the PI.

%,3 039

/ 7/ 3,90 : is the distance between the curve and the chord at the center of the curves length.  9073,

: is the minimum distance between the PI and the curve.

! !4 39 : is the point that defines the beginning of the curve (Point of Curvature).  2:9 / 0,7 3 : is the direction of the tangent at the beginning of the curve.

Turn: specifies if the curve turns to the Left or Right as you face the curve from the PC. R-190

Curve Menu Store PT: When checked, will store the computed PT point with the specified point name. Store RP: When checked, the computed radius point will be stored with the name specified here.
$4 ;0

: will compute and store the PT, and if desired, the radius

point.

Results
Radius: is the distance from the radius point to the curve. Length: is the arc length. Chord: is the chord length. Delta: is the deflection angle. Tangent: is the distance from the PC or PT to the PI. Mid Ord.: is the distance between the curve and the chord at the center of the curves length. External: is the minimum distance between the PI and the curve. Deg. Arc: is the deflection angle that results in a 100-ft. arc length. Deg. Chord: is the deflection angle that results in a 100-ft. chord length. Segment: is the area between the arc length and the chord. Sector: is the area between the arc length and the two edge radii. Fillet: is the area between the arc length and the tangents.

R-191

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Parabolic Curve
:7;0 !,7,-4 . :7;0

or

Ctrl

-[N]

The Parabolic Curve screen provides detailed information on a vertical parabolic curve when certain parts of the curve are known. Known: The PVC or PVI radio button is selected to define which point on the curve is known. One of the following options must be selected from the dropdown list: Curve Length: is selected when the length of the curve is known. When selected the following must also be specified: o Curve length: is the length of the vertical curve (the horizontal distance between the PVC and PVT).

Point On Curve: is selected when the location of another point on the curve is known. When selected, the following must also be specified. o o Station: is the station where the other point is located on the curve. Elevation: is the elevation of the other point.

Hi/Lo Elevation: is selected when the high or low point for the curve is known. When selected, the following must also be specified. o Hi/Lo Elevation: is the elevation of the curve at the location where the tangent is zero (the crest of the curve).

R-192

Curve Menu

Note: When the begin and end grades are both positive or both negative, the high / low elevation will not be located between the PVC and PVT. PVC / PVI Station: is the station for the specified point. PVC / PVI Elevation: is the elevation for the specified point. Begin Grade: is the grade at the tangent of the PVC. End Grade: is the grade at the tangent of the PVT.
$4 ;0

: computes the details for the vertical curve.

, 4:9 : accesses the Parabolic Curve Layout screen (Page R-194) where you can solve for an elevation at a specified station, or solve for a station at a specified elevation.

Results
PVC sta.: is the station at the PVC. PVI sta.: is the station at the PVI. PVT sta.: is the station at the PVT. Hi/Lo sta.: is the station where the vertical curve has a tangent equal to zero (the crest of the curve). elev.: is the elevation for the respective point.

R-193

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Parabolic Layout
:7;0 !,7,-4 . , 4:9

The Parabolic Layout screen allows you to compute an elevation at a specified station, or a station at a specified elevation. Beg. Grade: is the percent grade at the PVC. End Grade: is the percent grade at the PVT. Curve Length: is the horizontal distance between the PVC and PVT. PVC Station: is the starting station at the PVC. PVC Elevation: is the elevation at the PVC. Solve for: is where you select to solve for an unknown Elevation, or an unknown Station. The selection made here determines which of the following choices will be available. Interval: When checked, the Current station can be incremented by the specified interval by using the $9,
and $9, buttons and then re-computed with the , 4:9 button. Current station: is the station that will be solved for with the button.
, 4:9

Elevation: is the known elevation for the location(s) on the parabolic curve where you want to compute the station(s).
$4 ;0 $9,
$9,

: computes the details of the vertical curve. : decreases the Current station by the Interval. : increases the Current station by the Interval.

, 4:9 : computes either the elevation at the specified Current station or the station(s) at the specified Elevation.

R-194

Curve Menu

Results
PVC sta.: is the station at the PVC. PVI sta.: is the station at the PVI. PVT sta.: is the station at the PVT. elev.: is the elevation for the respective point. Hi/Lo sta.: is the station where the vertical curve has a tangent equal to zero (the crest of the curve).

R-195

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Straight Grade
:7;0 $97, 9 7,/0

The Straight Grade screen will solve for the elevation at a specified station or a station at a specified elevation on a straight grade. Begin Station: is the station where the straight grade begins. Begin Elev: is the elevation at the Begin station. Grade: is the percent slope (
Rise Run 100 ).

Solve for: is where you select to solve for an Elevation or a Station. The choice made here determines which of the following selections are available. End station: is the station where you want to compute the elevation. Interval: When checked, the End station can be incremented by the specified interval by using the $9,9 43
and $9,9 43 buttons and then re-computed with the , 4:9 button. End Elevation: is the elevation at the point where you want to compute the station.
, 4:9

: performs the computation and displays the results.

Results
Station: is the current station. Elevation: is the elevation for the current station.

R-196

Curve Menu

Spiral
:7;0 $5 7, 

The Spiral screen will compute the details of a spiral curve, given the spiral length and radius. Spiral length: is the length of the spiral curve. Radius: is the circular curve radius.
$4 ;0

: computes the details of the spiral curve.

: accesses the Spiral Layout screen (Page R-198) where the location of stations on the spiral curve can be computed.
, 4:9

: accesses the Traverse on Spiral screen (Page R-199).

%7,;0780

Results
X of Throw: is the distance along the tangent where a perpendicular line intersects with the radius point. Y of Throw: is the minimum distance between the tangent and the extended circular curve. X: is the distance from the TS to the SC along the tangent. Y: is distance from the SC to the tangent. Delta: is the angle between the tangent, and the line between the PI and SC.

R-197

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Spiral Layout
:7;0 $5 7, 

The Spiral Layout screen is used to compute station locations on a spiral curve. Radius: is the radius of the circular curve. Spiral Length: is the length along the spiral curve from TS to SC. TS station: is the station at the TS point. Interval: When checked, is the spiral arc distance that is added or subtracted from the Current Station using the $9, and $9, buttons. Current Station: is the station on the curve that is computed.
$4 ;0 $9,
$9,

: solves and displays the details for the specified spiral curve. : decreases the Current Station by the specified Interval. : increases the Current Station by the specified Interval. : computes the location of the Current Station.

, 4:9

Results
Station: is the current station. Deflection: is the horizontal angle to the current station as if occupying the TS and backsighting the Spiral PI. Long crd.: is the chord R-198

Curve Menu length from the TS to the current station. Short crd.: is the chord length from the previous station to the current station.

Traverse on Spiral
:7;0 $5 7, 

The Traverse on Spiral screen is used to compute the location of, and optionally store the SC, or ST and spiral PI points. Radius: is the radius of the circular curve. Length: is the length along the spiral curve from TS to SC. TS / CS Point: is the existing point associated with the TS or CS point. / 0,7 3 : is the tangent direction at the TS or CS point.
 2:9

TS->SC: specifies that the curve starts at the tangent to spiral and ends at the spiral to curve. CS->ST: specifies that the curve starts at the curve to spiral and ends at the spiral to tangent. Right / Left: specifies is the curve turns toward the right or left as you face the spiral from the TS or CS. Store SC / ST: When checked, saves a point for the computed SC point. Store PI: When checked, saves a point for the computed spiral PI.

Results
Tangent In: the tangent direction entering the spiral at the TS or CS. Tangent Out: the tangent direction exiting the spiral at the SC or ST. X of Throw: is the distance along the tangent where a perpendicular line intersects with the radius point. R-199

Survey Pro Reference Manual Y of Throw: is the minimum distance between the tangent and the extended circular curve. X: is the distance from the TS to the SC along the tangent. Y: is distance from the SC to the tangent. Delta: is the angle between the tangent, and the line between the PI and SC.

R-200

Roads Menu
The Roads Menu contains the routines used to perform road layout. A: Edit Templates B: Edit Alignments C: Edit Roads D: Road Stakeout E: Slope Staking F: Show Station (Road Station and Offset)

R-201

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Add/Edit Templates
#4,/8 / 9 %025 ,908

The Add/Edit Templates screen is used to edit an existing template or create a new template. Templates describe the cross-sectional profile of a roadway. They can contain information such as the road width, its slope, a curb, and/or a ditch. Each separate portion of a template is called a segment. All templates must have at least one segment and all templates of a particular road must have the same number of segments. Any template can describe either the left or right side of the roads cross-section (theyre reversible). If a roads left and right side are identical, only one template needs to be created; the other side can use the same template, or be mirrored later when the road is defined. All of the saved templates are listed displayed in this screen including each templates name, number of segment, cut slope, and fill slope. An image of the selected segment is also displayed in this screen.
0 : opens the New Template screen where a new template can be created. This screen is identical to the Edit Template screen except most the buttons are initially deactivated. / 9 : opens the Edit Template screen where the selected template can be edited. 45 : opens the Save As dialog box where a copy of the selected template can be saved with a different name. 0 090

: deletes the selected template.

25479 : opens the Open dialog box where a template can be copied from one folder to the current folder and imported into the job.

R-202

Roads Menu

Edit Template
#4,/8 #4,/8 / 9 %025 ,908 / 9 %025 ,908 / 9 0  

or

The Edit Template screen is identical to the New Template screen and is used to create a new template or edit an existing one. All of the segments of the current template are listed in the screen. The list shows the name of each segment, the horizontal and vertical offsets (lengths), and the slope. Note: The length of the first segment must be greater than zero. Cut Slope: is the slope that will be used when locating the catch point in a situation where the existing terrain is above the level of the hinge point. Fill Slope: is the slope that will be used when locating the catch point in a situation where the existing terrain is below the level of the hinge point.
38079 : opens the Edit Segment screen where a new segment will be added prior to (above) the segment selected in the Edit Template screen.

Note: To add a segment to the end of all existing segments (furthest away from the centerline), be sure <End> is selected from the Edit Template screen prior to tapping 38079 .
/ 9 : opens the Edit Segment screen where the details of the selected segment can be edited.

Note: The selected segment is shown with a thicker line in the map view in the lower portion of the Edit Template screen. R-203

Survey Pro Reference Manual

#024;0 : removes the selected segment and automatically joins the previous segments to the following segments.

Note: When a segment is removed the existing segments toward the centerline will not change. Only those on the side of the removed segment away from the centerline are adjusted.

Edit Segment
#4,/8 #4,/8 #4,/8 / 9 %025 ,908 / 9 %025 ,908 / 9 %025 ,908 / 9 / 9 0 38079 / 9  

or

or


38079

The Edit Segment screen is identical to the New Template screen and is used to create a new template or edit an existing one. Segment Name: is the name for the segment. A name is required, but it does not have to be unique. Horizontal Distance: is the horizontal length of the segment. Slope / V Dist: is the slope of the segment, or the vertical length, respectively. When defining a vertical distance, select the D if the segment travels downward, or select U if the segment travels upward from the point of view of the centerline. Note: A segment with a negative slope will result in water that flows from the centerline toward the road edge.

R-204

Roads Menu

Edit Alignments
#4,/8 4/ 9  320398

or

/ 9 

320398

The Edit Alignments screen is used to create an alignment that defines the centerline of a road containing both horizontal and vertical elements. Editing alignments is fully described, starting on Page R-48.

Add/Edit Roads
#4,/8 / 9 #4,/8

The Add/Edit Roads screen is used to define your road. This is where the templates are added to the alignment and any widenings and super elevations are defined. All existing roads are listed in this screen. If an existing road is selected, the overhead and profile view of that road are also displayed.
0 : Opens the New Road screen where a new road can be defined.

: Opens the Edit Road screen where the selected road can be edited. The Edit Road screen is identical to the New Road screen.
/ 9

: Opens the following prompts to delete the selected road(s).

0 090

Are you sure you want to delete the selected Roads?: Answering Yes to this prompt will disassociate the selected road(s) from the current job so they are no longer displayed in the Add/Edit Roads screen. In this case, the road can still be re-associated with the 25479 routine. R-205

Survey Pro Reference Manual Answering No to this prompt will return you to the Add/Edit Roads screen without making any changes. Delete alignment alignment name?: Answering Yes to this prompt will delete the selected alignment(s) from the current job so they are no longer displayed in the Edit Alignments screen. In this case, the alignment can be re-associated with the 25479 routine from the definition in the RD5 file. Answering No to this prompt will open the next prompt without deleting the selected alignment(s) from the current job. Delete Roadname.RD5 file?: Answering Yes to this prompt will permanently delete the selected alignments and road (RD5) files from the data collector.

: Opens the Import Road screen where an existing road (RD5) file can be added to the current job. This is useful to copy road files that were transferred to the data collector from a PC and to add roads that were stored in a directory other than the current directory.
25479

New Road Screen / Edit Road

#4,/8 / 9 #4,/8 0

or

/ 9

The New Road screen is identical to the Edit Road screen and is used to assemble the parts of a road or edit an existing road. This screen consists of five separate index card style tabs. Each tab accesses a different card that is used to define a particular part of the road.

R-206

Roads Menu

The Road Card

#4,/8 / 9 #4,/8

0

or

/ 9

#4,/

The Road card of the New Road screen is used to select the alignment to use for the road. If an alignment has not yet been created, refer to Page R-48 for information on creating an alignment. Road Name: is the name assigned to the road. The name must not be the same as any existing road name. Alignment Description: displays the name of the selected alignment.
 4480  32039 : opens the Choose Alignment screen where an existing alignment can be selected.  0. : checks the road for errors and displays the results in the Roads Report screen. '0 !741 08 : opens the Road Profiles screen where you can see information about the cross-sectional profile of the road at any station. $09 !  : opens the Road Alignment Properties screen where information about the current alignment can be changed.

Roads Report Screen

#4,/8 / 9 #4,/8

0

or

/ 9

#4,/

 0.

The Roads Report screen displays a list of any errors after performing the following tests. Confirm that the alignment contains both a HAL and a VAL. Confirm that the horizontal length of the VAL is greater than or equal to the HAL. Confirm there is at least one template for each side of the road. R-207

Survey Pro Reference Manual Confirm the first template coincides with the starting station. Confirm that all template segments have a name. (The names do not have to be unique.) Confirm that the same number of segments exist on each side of the alignment. Confirm that each widening start station is less than the corresponding widenings end station. Confirm that one widening does not overlap with another widening. Confirm that the start station for each super elevation is less than the end station. Confirm that no two super elevations overlap. Confirm that the start and end of each super elevation either both hinge on the centerline or both hinge on the edge. Confirms all templates, widening and super elevations are on the alignment. Confirms no more than one template exists at any particular station on the same side of the road. Confirms the first segment of all templates is greater than 0. Checks for empty templates. Checks for widenings with zero width. Checks for overlapping parabolic transitions. Checks for template-widening width matching. Checks for template-super elevation slope matching.

R-208

Roads Menu

Road Profiles Screen

#4,/8 / 9 #4,/8

0

or

/ 9

#4,/

'0

!741 08

The Road Profiles screen allows you to see information about the cross-sectional profile of the road at any station after at least one template has been added to each side of the road. ,  : these buttons move a circle icon that starts at the centerline to each node of the template at the current station. Information for the selected segment is displayed in the right portion of the screen. The name for the selected segment is shown between these buttons. : opens a dialog box where a specific station can be entered. Once is tapped, the profile at the entered location is shown in the Road Profiles screen.
4 !741 : opens the Details screen and lists several details about the roads cross-sectional profile at the current station. $0 : opens the Details screen and lists information related to the selected segment at the current station.

Road Alignment Properties Screen

#4,/8 / 9 #4,/8

0

or

/ 9

#4,/

$09 !

The Road Alignment Properties screen is used to change information about the current alignment. Description: is the name of the current alignment. A new name can be assigned to the alignment from this field. / 4.,9 43 : depending how this button is toggled, you can change the POB of the alignment by entering a new point number or new coordinates.
!4 39

R-209

Survey Pro Reference Manual Start Station: replaces the existing starting station of the alignment with the starting station entered here.

The Templates Card

#4,/8 / 9 #4,/8

0

or

/ 9

%025 ,908

The Templates card of the New Road screen is used to add existing templates to the road. The screen displays a list of left and right templates that are currently assigned to the road. When a particular template is selected, a cross-sectional profile view of the selected template is displayed and an overhead view shows where the selected template occurs on the alignment.
// : when a template or <End> is selected from the L or R columns in the Templates card, this button opens the Add Template screen, which allows you to add a new template to the same side of the road that was selected. / 9 : allows you to edit the selected template in the Edit Template screen, which is identical to the Add Template screen. #024;0

: removes the selected template from

the list.
 0. : checks the road for errors and displays the results in the Roads Report screen, described above.

R-210

Roads Menu

Add / Edit Template Screen

#4,/8 / 9 #4,/8

( 0

or

/ 9

%025 ,908

( //

or

/ 9

The Add / Edit Template screen allows you to add a template to the road or edit an existing template. Template: The Template column lists all the templates that can be added to the road. Selecting a template will display an image of that template in the lower corner of the screen. Once the first template is added, this box will only list templates with the same number of segments as the first. Start Sta: is the location of the template on the alignment.
 0. : opens the Roads Report screen and displays any errors (see Page R-207) 0 : opens the New Template screen, which is identical to the Edit Template screen, where a new template can be created (see Page R-203). / 9 : opens the Edit Template screen where the selected template can be modified (see Page R-203), although accessing the templates editor from here will not allow inserting or removing of segments.

The Widenings Card

#4,/8 / 9 #4,/8

0

or

/ 9

/03 3 8

The Widenings card of the New Road screen is used to add or edit widenings. A widening is a section of a road that changes in width, but does not necessarily require any new templates. The road width is adjusted by changing only the width of the first segment of the template that leads into the beginning of the widening. Any additional segments, like those that may describe a sidewalk or ditch, are not adjusted. R-211

Survey Pro Reference Manual The following rules must be considered when adding a widening to a road: A widening must have a starting station and an ending station or a length. Left and right widenings are separate and independent of each other. The start and end stations must occur within the boundaries of the alignment. The starting station must occur before the ending station. The beginning of a widening must match the width of the previous widening or template. The end of a widening must match the next template or widening unless it is the last element in the road. The beginning or ending of a widening cannot occur within the boundaries of another widening, but the beginning of one widening can occur at the same station as the end of a previous widening. Widenings are always positioned by their start station.

// : when a widening or <End> is selected from the L or R columns in the Widenings card, this button opens the Add Widening screen, which allows you to add a widening to the same side of the road that was selected. / 9 : allows you to edit the selected widening in the Edit Widening screen, which is identical to the Add Widening screen. #024;0

: removes the selected widening from the list.

 0. : checks the road for errors and displays the results in the Roads Report screen, described on Page R-207.

R-212

Roads Menu

Add / Edit Widening Screen

#4,/8 / 9 #4,/8

( 0

or

/ 9

/03 3 8

( //

or

/ 9

The Add / Edit Widening screen allows you to add a widening to the road or edit an existing widening. Start Station: is the location of the beginning of the widening on the alignment.
03 9 / 3/ $9,9 43 : is the length of the widening measured from the Start Station, or it is the end station, depending on how the button is toggled.

Starting Width: is the starting width of the widening. This must match the width of the previous template, or widening. Ending Width: is the ending width of the widening.
 0. : opens the Roads Report screen and displays any errors (see Page R-207) 0 : opens the New Widening screen, which is identical to the Edit Widening screen, where a new widening can be created (see Page R-203). / 9 : opens the Edit Widening screen where the selected widening can be modified (see Page R-203).

Mirror to Right / Left: duplicates the widening to the other side of the road when checked.

Super Elevations Card

#4,/8 / 9 #4,/8

0

or

/ 9

$:507  0;,9 438

The Super Elevations card of the New Road screen is used to add or edit super elevations. A super elevation changes the cross slope of the first segment of a template in order to bank a curve the slope of any remaining segments will remain unadjusted. One super elevation defines a begin point and an end point where the slope change begins and R-213

Survey Pro Reference Manual where it finishes the transition for one side of a road. Therefore, to bank a two-lane road, four super elevations would be required one at the beginning and one at the end of the curve for each side of the road. A super elevation can either hinge at the outer edge of the first segment, or at the centerline. Hinging at the center results in the elevation of the outer segments to change. Hinging at the edge results in the elevation of the centerline changing. Because of this, Survey Pro will only allow you to hinge on edge for one side of a road. If the other side is also super elevated, you will be forced to hinge that side at the center so that an abrupt change in elevation does not occur at the centerline.
// : when a super elevation or <End> is selected from the L or R columns in the Super Elevations card, this button opens the Add Super Elevation screen, which allows you to add a super elevation to the same side of the road that was selected. (Widenings and super elevations are always sorted in this list by their specified start stations.) / 9 : allows you to edit the selected super elevation in the Edit Super Elevation screen, which is identical to the Add Super Elevation screen. #024;0  0.

: removes the selected super elevation from the list.

: checks the road for errors and displays the results in the Roads Report screen, described on Page R-207.

R-214

Roads Menu

Add / Edit Super Elevation Screen

#4,/8 / 9 / 9 #4,/8

( 0

or

/ 9

$:507  0;,9 438

( //

or

The Add / Edit Super Elevation screen allows you to add a super elevation to the road or edit an existing super elevation. Start Station: is the location of the beginning of the super elevation on the alignment.
03 9 / 3/ $9,9 43 : is the length of the super elevation measured from the Start Station, or it is the end station, depending on how the button is toggled.

Note: Keep in mind that the slope at the end of a super elevation will continue down the road unless another super elevation is entered to change the slope back again. For example, a curve will typically require two super elevations for each side of the road: one at the beginning of the curve and one at the end. Slope 1 / 2: is the starting and ending slopes of the road, respectively. The starting slope must match the current slope of the road at that station. Parabolic Transition 1 / 2: is the length of the vertical curve that will lead in and out of the super elevation, respectively. Parabolic transitions are optional parts of a super elevation and result in a smoother change going into and coming out of a super elevation, similar to how a spiral curve is used with a horizontal curve. Note: One half of the parabolic transition length will extend before and after the starting point and/or the ending point of the super elevation. This should be considered when using parabolic transitions near the end of an alignment since this length cannot extend beyond the limits of the road.

R-215

Survey Pro Reference Manual Hinge on 03907 / / 0 : determines if the super elevation is computed by rotating the road around the centerline or the roads edge. Note: When hinging on edge, the road is actually rotated around the end of the first segment of the template that leads into the super elevation. Only the first segment is adjusted with a super elevation. The length and slope of any segments beyond the first will not be adjusted from a super elevation.
 0. : checks the road for errors and displays the results in the Roads Report screen, described on Page R-207.

R-216

Roads Menu

Road Stakeout
#4,/8 #4,/ $9, 04:9

The Stake Road screen is used to stake any segment of a road profile at any station.
%,5 #4,/ : opens the Tap on a Road screen where you can tap on any road in the job to select it.

Name: displays the name of the selected road. Begin Station: displays the station assigned to the beginning of the road. End Station: displays the final station in the road. : accesses the Backsight Setup screen (Page R-72).
,. 8 9

: takes you to the next Stake Road screen where a specific point on the road can be selected to stake.
0 9 

Stake Road Screen Two

The second Stake Road screen displays a cross-sectional profile view of the road at the current station. Any particular point on this view can be selected and staked.

R-217

Survey Pro Reference Manual Station Interval: is the value that is added to the Station to Stake after the 0 9 $9,9 43 button is pressed.
0 9 $9,9 43 : advances the Station to Stake by the Station Interval.

Note: If the Stake Corners option is selected in the Stakeout Settings screen, the 0 9 $9,9 43 button will also stop at any horizontal or vertical alignment node, and the beginning and end of any widening and super elevation that falls within the interval. ,  : These buttons are used to select the particular node, or an offset to it, from your road profile that you wish to stake. The segment name at the selected node is also displayed. If staking the centerline with an offset, the side of the road that the offset occurs is also displayed. Offset from the segment above: When checked, allows you to specify an offset distance to stake as opposed to staking the actual node locations. Note: A positive value offset is applied at the specified distance from each node away from the centerline. A negative value offset is applied at the specified distance from each node toward the centerline.

Note: If an offset occurs past the edge of the road, no vertical or cut / fill information will be computed for that point.
,. 8 ,. 0 9  9

: accesses the Backsight Setup screen (Page R-72).

: returns to the previous screen.

: takes you to the next Stake Road screen where the direction and distance information to the stake point is displayed. R-218

Roads Menu

Stake Road Screen Three

The third Stake Road screen displays distance, direction, and other information about the point to be staked. Station: displays the station where the stake point occurs and the type of line segment it falls on in the alignment. Segment: displays the name of the segment tangent to the point to be staked; if the point is on the Left or Right side of the road; and the specified offset, if any. Angle Right: is the horizontal angle from the backsight to the stake point. Horz Dist: is the horizontal distance from the total station to the stake point. Vert Dist: is the vertical distance from the total station to the stake point. ZE to Rod: is the zenith angle from the total station to the stake point.
 7. 0 074 : is used to modify the circle on the total station so that the angle right reading will be zero when it is facing toward the design point, which can sometimes be easier than turning to an obscure angle value. When this button is tapped, the following actions will occur:

1. A new backsight circle value is computed, sent to the instrument and stored in the raw data 2. The Angle Right value is changed to zero to reflect the change. The instrument now needs to be turned horizontally to zero to face the design point. 3. To prevent errors, the backsight set up is invalidated when exiting the Stakeout dialog if this button has been used. A Circle zeroed on a design point is meaningless once the design point has been staked.

R-219

Survey Pro Reference Manual Note: The  7. 0 total station.

,. $9, 0  074

button is not available when using a robotic

: returns to the previous screen.

: accesses the final Stake Road screen where the shots to the stake point are performed.

Stake Road Screen Four

The fourth and final Stake Road screen is used to perform the shots necessary to locate the design point. This screen is identical to the final Stake Points screen, which is explained on Page R-108.

R-220

Roads Menu

Road Slope Staking

#4,/8 $ 450 $9, 3 

The Road Slope Staking screen is used to locate the catch point of the road at any station.
%,5 #4,/ : opens the Tap on a Road screen where you can tap on any road in the job to select it.

Name: displays the name of the selected road. Begin Station: displays the station assigned to the beginning of the road. End Station: displays the final station in the road. : accesses the Backsight Setup screen (Page R-72).
,. 8 9

: takes you to the next Road Slope Staking screen where the slope staking parameters are set up.
0 9 

Road Slope Staking Screen Two

The second Road Slope Staking screen is used to set up some slope stake parameters prior to slope staking the road. Station: is the station to be slope staked. Station Interval: specifies how far to advance from the current station to the next station.
0 9 $9,9 43 : advances the current station by the Station Interval.

R-221

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Note: If the Stake Corners option is selected in the Stakeout Settings screen, the 0 9 $9,9 43 button will also stop at any horizontal or vertical alignment node, and the beginning and end of any widening and super elevation that falls within the interval.
,. 8 ,. 9

: accesses the Backsight Setup screen (Page R-72).

: returns to the previous screen.

H. Map Card
The H. Map card displays information about the horizontal details of the road at the current station. Segment Type: displays the type of horizontal section at the current station. Left / Right: is the description of the left and right templates that are being used at the current station.

V. Map Card
The V. Map card displays a graphic of the crosssectional profile of the road at the current station. The hinge points and slopes are also displayed.

Slopes Card
The Slopes card is used to specify the desired cut and fill slopes that will be used when computing the location of the catch points. These values are always initialized from the templates every time the station to be staked is modified. You can then override these default values here to account for terrain constraints. Changes to slopes will be adequately reflected in the V. Map card graphic. Cut Slope: is the left and right slope, respectively, to use when the terrain requires a cut (the hinge point is located below the terrains surface). R-222

Roads Menu Fill Slope: is the left and right slope, respectively, to use when the terrain requires a fill (the hinge point is located above the terrains surface).

Fill Hinge Points Card

When the terrain requires a fill, you have the option to compute the hinge point at any existing template segment. The option to use a segment other than the last segment can simplify the situation where a ditch meets an area requiring a fill, which would otherwise result in an area with two similar or identical negative slopes. Left / Right: is the specified left and right segment, respectively, to compute the hinge point from in a situation that requires a fill. Changes to these fields will be reflected in the V. Map card graphic.
$9, 0 !  : opens the next slope staking screen. The following slope staking screens are identical to non-road layout slope staking screens and are described starting on Page R-124.

R-223

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Road Station and Offset

#4,/8 $ 4 $9,9 43

The Road Station and Offset routine allows you to take a shot to a prism that is positioned anywhere on the road and compute the details of where that point is located in relation to the road. This information can then be compared to the data from a grade sheet.
%,5 #4,/ : opens the Tap on a Road screen where you can tap on any road in the job to select it.

Name: displays the name of the selected road. Begin Station: displays the station assigned to the beginning of the road. End Station: displays the final station in the road.
,. 8 9 : accesses the Backsight Setup screen (Page R-72). 0 9  : takes you to the next Road Station and Offset screen where the slope staking parameters are set up.

R-224

Roads Menu

Road Station and Offset Screen Two

The second Road Station and Offset screen is used to take a shot to the prism and view the data from various cards. Height of Rod: is the length of the rod. Coarse EDM (Fast Shot): When checked, sets the total station to coarse mode for faster, but slightly less-precise measurements.
$ 49

: takes a shot to the prism. : returns to the previous screen. : stores the stake point.

,. $9470

Alignment Card
Station: displays the station at the rod position. Template: displays the name of the template that is used at the rod position. Segment: displays the name of the templates segment at the rod position. Elev: displays the elevation at the rod position. Offset Dist: displays the perpendicular offset from the centerline to the rod position. Right of Line / Left of Line / On Line: displays if the rod position is to the right of the centerline, left of the centerline, or on the centerline, respectively.

R-225

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Cross-Section Card
Station: displays the station at the rod position. Template: displays the name of the template that is used at the rod position. Segment: displays the name of the templates segment at the rod position. Cut / Fill: is the necessary cut or fill that will bring the rod position even with the roads surface. Cut / Fill to CL: is the necessary cut or fill that will bring the rod position to the same elevation as the centerline at the current station. Cut / Fill to Edge: is the necessary cut or fill that will bring the rod position to the same elevation as the outer edge of the last segment at the current station.

Shot Data Card

Displays the angles and distance measured by the total station from the last shot.

R-226

Adjust Menu
The Adjust Menu contains routines to perform a variety of adjustments. A: Scale B: Translate C: Rotate D: Traverse Adjust

R-227

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Scale
/ :89 $., 0

The Scale screen will scale the distances of a range of points relative to a specified base point. This is useful to correct a survey where a scale factor was inadvertently applied during data collection.
%,5 !4 398 : allows you to select points by tapping them from a map view. %4742 : allows you to select points by typing in a point range.

Base point: The distances to all the selected points will be scaled relative to this point. (The coordinates for the base point will not change.) Scale factor: is the scale factor that is applied to the distances from the base point to the selected points. Include Elevation in Adjustment: When checked, the elevations to the selected points will also be adjusted by the scale factor relative to the Base point.
$4 ;0 : will perform the adjustment on the selected points and change the coordinates accordingly. Information will be written to the raw data file detailing the adjustment.

R-228

Adjust Menu

Translate
/ :89 %7,38 ,90

The Translate screen will move a group a points horizontally and vertically by a specified distance and direction.
%,5 !4 398 : allows you to select points by tapping them from a map view. %4742 : allows you to select points by typing in a point range.

Translate by Coordinates: When checked, all of the selected points will be adjusted in the same direction and distance as between a specified From point or location and a To point or location. When unchecked, the selected points will be adjusted by the specified direction and distance. The choice made here determines the options available below. Note: The choice made above determines which fields will be available below.

 2:9

0,7 3

: is the direction to move the selected points.

Horizontal Distance: is the horizontal distance that the selected points are moved. Vertical Distance: is the vertical distance that the selected points are moved. From: is where the first point or location is defined that is used to compute the direction and distance that the selected points are adjusted. To: is where the last point or location is defined that is used to compute the direction and distance that the selected points are adjusted. R-229

Survey Pro Reference Manual

!4 39 / 4.,9 43 : allows you to enter either a point name or location coordinates. $4 ;0 : adjusts the selected points in the same direction or distance as defined from the From point to the To point, or by the direction and distance entered. Information will be written to the raw data file detailing the adjustment.

R-230

Adjust Menu

Rotate
/ :89 #49,90

The Rotate screen will rotate selected points around a specified point. This is useful to correct a survey where an incorrect backsight was used during data collection.
%,5 !4 398 : allows you to select points by tapping them from a map view. %4742 : allows you to select points by typing in a point range.

Rotation Point: The selected points will be rotated around the point specified here. (The coordinates for the rotation point will not change.) Simple Angle: when selected, this allows you to enter the deflection angle to rotate the selected points. Old and New Azimuths: when selected, this allows you to enter an old and new azimuth, which is used to compute the angle to rotate the selected points. Note: The choice made from the two options above determines which fields will be available below. Rotate: is the angle to rotate the selected points around the Rotation point.
/  2:9 / / 0,7 3 : is a known direction between any two points in the current job before they are rotated. 0  2:9 / 0 0,7 3 : is the direction between the same two points specified above after the rotation.

 

: will perform the rotation on the selected points and change the coordinates accordingly. Information will be written to the raw data file detailing the adjustment.
$4 ;0

R-231

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Traverse Adjust
/ :89 %7,;0780 / :89

The Traverse Adjust wizard is a series of screens that allow you to adjust a closed traverse for angular error and/or perform a compass rule adjustment on a closed or open traverse. Choose Your Traverse: is used to select a traverse to adjust from the following options:
%,5 !4 30 : is used to tap an existing polyline from a map view. %4742 : provides selection of points by point name.

Angle Adjust: When checked, will perform an angle adjustment to the closed traverse. An angle adjustment will apply the angular error equally among all of the angles of the closed traverse and adjust the coordinates for all but the first two traverse points. (The first leg of the traverse is not adjusted.) Compass Rule: When checked, will perform a compass rule adjustment on the selected traverse. Adjust elevation: when selected, the elevations for the traverse points are also adjusted from the compass rule adjustment. Adjust Sideshots: When checked, any side shots that were stored while occupying the traverse points in the selected traverse will also be adjusted. The side shot locations will be recomputed using the original angles and distances stored in the raw data file along with the adjusted locations of the occupy and backsight points. The user cannot explicitly define the side shots that are adjusted. Instead, they are determined by the information stored in the raw data file. If no side shots were stored from any of the traverse points, an error message will be displayed and no adjustment is performed. If any of the following settings were changed during or after the traverse was recorded, then side shots cannot be adjusted. R-232

Adjust Menu
0 9 

Distance units Angle units Earth curvature adjustment Scale factor : opens the next screen of the adjustment wizard.

Traverse Adjust Angle Adjustment

If an angle adjustment is being performed, this screen will appear next.

3 4 2

Closing Angle: is the closing angle for the traverse, which must be represented as an angle-right. (See illustration.)
0 9 

: opens the next screen of the adjustment wizard.

1 6 Closing Angle

R-233

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Traverse Adjust Compass Rule

If a compass rule adjustment is being performed, this screen will appear next. Closed Traverse: select this option if you are adjusting a closed traverse. Close to Known Location: select this option if you are adjusting an open traverse and closing to a known point or location. Note: if a closing location is not specified, it is automatically assumed that the first point of the traverse will be the closing location.
4.,9 43 : allows you to enter coordinates to define the closing location.

o o

North: is the Y-coordinate for the closing location. East: is the X-coordinate for the closing location. Elev: is the elevation for the closing location.

!4 39 : allows you to select an existing point to define the closing location.

o
0 9

Point: is the name of the existing point at the closing location.

: opens the next screen of the adjustment wizard.

R-234

Adjust Menu

Traverse Adjust Results

This screen displays the changes that will be made by the adjustment, where they can be previewed before the actual adjustment is made. The screen lists the adjustment details in three main sections: the angle adjustment details; the compass rule adjustment details, and the point details where the before-and-after coordinates for each point are listed. An example of the information provided in the Preview screen is shown here. Error dist: is the horizontal distance between the starting point and closing point. Error azm: is the direction from the closing point to the starting point. Precision: is the ratio of the error distance to the length. Angular error: is the difference between (N-2)180 and the actual sum of the internal angles, where N is the number of sides in the traverse. Length: is the sum of all the sides of the boundary. Perimeter: is the length plus the error distance.
/ :89 : if the results in the preview are acceptable tap this button to perform the adjustment.

R-235

Miscelaneous Screens
The following screens are only available via a hotkey or a power button (see the Users Manual). They are not available directly from any menu item.

Past Results Map Display Options Map View

Past Results
, Past Results (where applicable), or
Ctrl

-[J]

When the Past Results option is used to enter a value in a specific field that was computed previously within Survey Pro. Select the line that contains the value that you want to use and tap . The selected value will then be entered in the field associated with that power button.

R-237

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Create Points Screen

4/ 9  320398

Create Points

The Create Points screen is used to store points that coincide with specific locations on an alignment. Alignment Nodes: When checked, will store points at locations where a change occurs on an alignment, for example where a straight section and a curved section meet. Sta. Intervals: When checked, will store a point at the specified station interval along an alignment. Start Point Name: is the name for the first point that will be stored from this screen. Description: is the description that will be given to all the points that are stored from this screen. Start Location: is the location for the first point, which is the reference location used to compute the locations of the remaining points. The default location is the POB defined from the Edit Alignment screen.

R-238

Miscellaneous Screens

Map Display Options

Using this will simply toggle the point names and descriptions on and off in some screens, but in other screens it will open the Map Display Options screen, which gives you even more control over what is displayed in the Map View. The Map Display Options screen is used to configure the information that is displayed in the Map View (described below). Show Points: will show a dot for each point that is in view. Names: will show the point name for each point that is in view. Descriptions: will show the point description for each point in view. Show Lines: will show all the polylines that are on the DTM layer Show Only This Layer: When checked, will show only the selected point data that exists on the specified layer. When unchecked, point data from all layers is displayed.
,3, 0 , 078 : opens the Manage Layers screen (Page R-66) where the layers can be configured.

Save as Default Display Options: When checked, will save the selections made to this screen as the default selections.

R-239

Survey Pro Reference Manual

Map View
Many screens provide access to a map view, which show the points from the current job and other useful information. It can be accessed from the Main Menu with the button, or any screen that has a button. Some map views also display a vertical profile. The bar at the bottom of a map indicates the scale. Tip: You can pan around your map by dragging your finger or stylus across the screen.

Zoom Extents Button: will change the scale of the screen so that all the points in the current job will fit on the screen. Zoom In Button: will zoom the current screen in by approximately 25%. Zoom Out Button: will zoom the current screen out by approximately 25%. Zoom Window Button: allows you to drag a box across the screen. When your finger or stylus leaves the screen, the map will zoom to the box that was drawn. Increase Vertical Scale: is only available when viewing a vertical profile. Each time it is tapped, the vertical scale of the view is increased. Decrease Vertical Scale: is only available when viewing a vertical profile. Each time it is tapped, the vertical scale of the view is decreased. Zoom Preview Button: will display only the points that are currently in use. R-240

Miscellaneous Screens Display / Hide Labels Button: this button will toggle on and off the names and descriptions associated with the points on the screen, or it will access the Map Display Options screen, described above, depending on which screen the button is pressed from.

R-241

Appendix A
Transverse Mercator Zones
Central Meridians for State Plane Coordinates E = East W = West C = Central State Alabama Zone E W 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 E C W Central Meridian 85 50 87 30 142 00 146 00 150 00 154 00 158 00 162 00 166 00 170 00 110 10 111 55 113 45 75 25 Maine Florida E W E W 81 00 82 00 82 10 84 10 Michigan (1934) E W E C W 68 30 70 10 83 40 85 45 88 45 State Hawaii Zone 1 2 3 4 5 E C W E W E W Central Meridian 155 30 156 40 158 00 159 30 160 10 112 10 14 00 115 45 88 20 90 10 85 40 87 05

Alaska

Idaho

Illinois

Arizona

Indiana

Delaware

Georgia

Reference Manual

State Mississippi

Zone E W E C W E C W

Central Meridian 88 50 90 20 90 30 92 30 94 30 115 35 116 40 118 35 71 40 74 40

State New Mexico

Zone E C W E C W

Central Meridian 104 20 106 15 107 50 74 20 76 35 107 50 72 30

Missouri

New York

Nevada

Vermont Wyoming 1 2 3 4

New Hampshire New Jersey

105 10 107 20 108 45 110 05

Lambert Zones
Central Meridian and Zone Constants for State Plane Coordinates N = North S = South C = Central NC = North Central SC = South Central M = Mainland I = Island O = Offshore

A-2

Appendix A

State Arkansas California

Zone N S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 N C S N N S N S N S N S O M I N C S N C S N C S N S

Colorado

Connecticut Florida Iowa Kansas Kentucky Louisiana

Maryland Massachusetts Michigan

Minnesota

Montana

Nebraska

Central Meridian 92 00 92 00 122 00 122 00 120 30 119 00 118 00 116 15 118 20 105 30 105 30 105 30 72 45 84 30 93 30 93 30 98 00 98 30 84 15 85 45 92 30 91 20 91 20 77 00 71 30 70 30 87 00 84 20 84 20 93 06 94 15 84 20 109 30 109 30 109 30 100 00 99 30

Zone Constant 0.581899 0.559691 0.653884 0.630468 0.612232 0.596587 0.570012 0.549518 0.561243 0.646133 0.630690 0.613378 0.663059 0.502526 0.677745 0.658701 0.632715 0.614528 0.622067 0.606462 0.528701 0.500013 0.454007 0.627634 0.671729 0.661095 0.722790 0.706407 0.680529 0.741220 0.723388 0.700928 0.746452 0.733354 0.714901 0.673451 0.656076 A-3

Reference Manual New York (Long Island) North Carolina North Dakota Ohio Oklahoma Oregon Pennsylvania South Carolina South Dakota Tennessee Texas 74 00 79 00 100 30 100 30 82 30 82 30 98 00 98 00 120 30 120 30 77 45 77 45 81 00 81 00 100 00 100 20 86 00 101 30 97 30 100 20 99 00 98 30 111 30 111 30 111 30 78 30 78 30 120 50 120 30 79 30 81 00 90 00 90 00 90 00 0.654082 0.577171 0.744133 0.729383 0.656950 0.634520 0.590147 0.567617 0.709186 0.684147 0.661540 0.648793 0.564497 0.544652 0.707738 0.689852 0.585440 0.579536 0.545394 0.515059 0.489913 0.454007 0.659355 0.640579 0.612687 0.624118 0.606925 0.744520 0.726396 0.637773 0.618195 0.721371 0.705577 0.687103

N S N S N S N S N S N S N S N NC C SC S N C S N S N S N S N C S

Utah

Virginia Washington West Virginia Wisconsin

A-4

Index
2
2D/3D points ......................40

C
calculator ....................... R-68 central meridian ..............111 Central Meridian............. A-1 check backsight ............. R-73 choose from map................11 choose polyline......... 90, R-61 chord offset .......... 132, R-188 codes description..........19, 32, 33 raw data .........................29 unlock ...............................2 collection mode ............ 8, R-2 compass rule ....................142 compass rule adjustment144, R-234 compute area ............... R-168 compute radius point .. R-183 control file ....................19, 30 example ..........................31 coordinate file ....................28 corner angle ................. R-167 create points screen..... R-238 curve and offset ... 135, R-131 curve layout ................. R-186 chord offset...................132 horizontal .....................131 parabolic .......................133 PC deflection ................131 PI deflection .................131 spiral.............................134 tangent offset ...............132 curve solution .............. R-178 cut sheet offset............... R-35

3
3D view...........................R-64 3D view settings ............R-65

A
about Survey Pro ...........R-24 add/edit break-lines.92, R-61 adjustment angle .........142, 144, R-233 compass rule142, 144, R-234 rotate ................141, R-231 scale ..................138, R-228 translate ...........139, R-229 alignment properties ...R-209 alignments ...............41, R-48 angle adjustment142, 144, R233 angle format.........................4 archive job......................R-18 ASCII file ...........................28 attributes .......................R-43 auto collect .....................R-86 auto linework .................R-55 azimuth format ....................4

B
backsight check ...........................R-73 circle.................. R-72, R-74 backsight setup..............R-72 backup job ......................R-18 battery icon ..........................8 battery level .....................R-2 bearing format .....................4 beep ..........................26, R-38 break-lines ...............92, R-61

D
data collection....................51 date settings ......................25 date/time settings.......... R-36 I-1

Reference Manual Decl0...............................R-99 Decl24.............................R-99 define a location...........R-149 demo mode ...........................2 description codes................19 description file .............19, 32 codes..........................32, 33 opening ...........................34 distance offset ........105, R-83 distance units.....................13 DTM view .............................R-59 DTM stake..............87, R-144 DUT correction ..............R-37 moving between .............26 output .............................10 fieldwork ............................47 file ASCII ..............................28 control.............................19 coordinate .......................28 description......................19 job....................................28 raw data .........................29 file settings .................... R-31 file transfer .................... R-22 files control.............................30 description......................32 files settings.......................19 format settings ........ 18, R-30

E
earth curvature..............R-32 edit alignments ..............R-48 create points .............R-238 edit GPS point flags.......R-42 edit point general ........................R-40 geodetic .......................R-41 location .......................R-41 edit point flags ...............R-41 edit points ......................R-39 edit polyline....................R-62 edit polylines..................R-44 edit road .......................R-206 edit segment...................R-51 ephemeris.........................111 exit ..................................R-24 export coordinates ...99, R-15 *.CR5...........................R-16 *.JOB ..........................R-16 *.TXT ..........................R-16

G
general settings ....... 26, R-37 GHA..................................111 GHA0.............................. R-99 GMT .................................112 GPS point flags editing......................... R-42

H
HAL .......................... 43, R-49 HD/VD to SD/ZA.......... R-175 hinge method ....... 128, R-173 horizontal angle offset106, R84 horizontal curve layout131, R186 horizontal curve solutionR-178 hotkeys .................................9

F
features...........................R-43 field label..............................1 fields .....................................1 input................................10 I-2

I
import coordinates... 98, R-10 *.CR5 .......................... R-11 *.GPS .......................... R-12 *.JOB .......................... R-11

Index *.TXT ..........................R-12 index card...........................12 input field...........................10 input shortcuts ..................12 instrument settings .16, R-26 intersection ..........125, R-163 inverse point to line ..............R-155 point to location .......R-159 point to multiple points .R158 point to point ............R-154 point to polyline .......R-156 menu items ..........................7 modules ................................2 multiple sideshots ......... R-82

N
new job ............................. R-5 new occupy point ........... R-77 note................................. R-59

O
offset line ......... R-164, R-165 offset points ................. R-165 storing ...................... R-141 offset shots .......................105 distance .............. 105, R-83 horizontal angle . 106, R-84 vertical angle ..... 107, R-85 offset staking ............... R-117 open job ............................ R-8 open/new job .................... R-4 output fields.......................10

J
job backup / restore..........R-18 information.................R-67 new................................R-5 open...............................R-8 open/new.......................R-4 job settings ...........................6

P
parabolic curve ............ R-192 parabolic curve layout.....133 parabolic layout ........... R-194 parallel method ... 129, R-173 past results .................. R-237 PC deflection....................131 PI and tangents ........... R-180 PI deflection......... 131, R-187 POB ...................... R-50, R-51 point feature attributes R-43 point flags editing......................... R-41 point in direction ......... R-162 point labels .................. R-241 point symbols.....................11 point to line inverse .... R-155 point to location inverseR-159 point to multiple points inverse ...................... R-158 I-3

L
Lambert zones .................A-2 layers for staking DTM.........R-60 manage .......................R-66 line and offset ..............R-128 line tangent to circle....R-185 linework .........................R-55

M
main menu .......................R-2 Main Menu...........................7 manage layers................R-66 manual mode .....................17 map check ............126, R-170 map display options.....R-239 map view ................14, R-240 point labels ...............R-241 zoom ................................14

Reference Manual point to point inverse ..R-154 point to polyline inverseR-156 points on DTM layer......R-63 polyline ...............................41 polylines .........................R-44 power button ......................10 predetermined area128, R-173 hinge method................128 parallel method ............129

S
save as .............................. R-9 save point ....................... R-96 scale...................... 138, R-228 scale factor ..................... R-32 scroll button .......................11 SD/ZA to HD/VD.......... R-176 server mode.................... R-22 settings date / time................... R-36 date/time.........................25 file ............................... R-31 files .................................19 format ................... 18, R-30 general.................. 26, R-37 instrument............ 16, R-26 job......................................6 repetition ...... 24, 100, R-35 stakeout ................ 21, R-33 surveying .............. 20, R-32 units...................... 18, R-29 settings screen ...................15 shoot from two ends104, R-93 shortcuts ............................12 show station and offsetR-139 side shot .............................55 slope staking ................ R-122 road ........................... R-221 snapshot ......................... R-20 solar observation ... 110, R-98 spiral and offset ........... R-135 spiral curve .................. R-197 spiral curve layout...........134 spiral layout................. R-198 stake curve and offset . R-131 stake DTM ............. 87, R-144 stake line and offset .... R-128 stake list of points ....... R-111 stake offset................... R-117 stake points.................. R-106 remote mode............. R-110

R
radius point compute ....................R-183 raw data note .............................R-59 view .............................R-58 raw data codes ...................29 raw data file .......................29 record mode....................R-94 refraction........................R-32 register modules ........2, R-23 remote control ......115, R-103 remote elevation ............R-97 remote mode stake points ..............R-110 stake to line ..............R-115 traverse / sideshot ......R-79 turn to .......................R-104 repetition..........................100 repetition settings24, 100, R35 repetition shots ..............R-80 resection .................108, R-95 restore job.......................R-18 road profile ...................R-209 road report ...................R-207 road slope staking........R-221 road stakeout ...............R-217 road station and offset.R-224 road templates .............R-202 roads .............................R-205 rotate ....................141, R-231 I-4

Index stake spiral and offset .R-135 stake to line..................R-113 remote mode .............R-115 stakeout..............................59 road ...........................R-217 stakeout settings .....21, R-33 station and offset .........R-139 road ...........................R-224 store offset points ........R-141 straight grade ..............R-196 sun shot ..................110, R-98 super elevations...........R-213 surveying in azimuths.......65 surveying settings ...20, R-32

U
units settings ........... 18, R-29 unlock code ..........................2 upgrading.............................2

V
VAL .......................... 45, R-50 vertical angle offset107, R-85 vertical curve ....... R-192. See parabolic curve vertical curve layout ... R-194 view DTM....................... R-59 view raw data ................ R-58

T
tangent offset .......132, R-187 tape offset.....................R-134 tape out/in ..........................64 templates......................R-202 add / edit ...................R-211 three points on a curve R-181 time format ..........................4 time settings ......................25 time/date settings ..........R-36 TIN .........................87, R-144 total station........................16 transfer...........................R-22 translate ...............139, R-229 by coordinates ..............140 by distance....................139 traverse / sideshot .........R-75 remote mode ...............R-79 traverse adjustment ....R-232 traverse now or later .....R-77 traverse on curve .........R-190 traverse on spiral.........R-199 traverse shot ......................56 triangle solutions.........R-169 turn to ..........................R-104

W
where is next point...... R-151 widenings..................... R-211

Z
zone constant ........... 111, A-1 zoom extents ............................14 in 14 out...................................14 preview ...........................14 window ............... 15, R-240

I-5